EPA-R4-73-023a Environmental Monitoring Series
March 1973
Reviews of Current Literature
on Analytical Methodology
and Quality Control
No. 14
Office of Research and Monitoring
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Washington, D.C. 20460
-------
REVIEWS OF CURRENT LITERATURE ON
ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL
No. 1U
By
Analytical Methodology Information Center (AMIC)
Information Systems Department
Battelie Memorial Institute
505 King Avenue, Columbus, Ohio 43201
Contract No. 68-01-1832
Prepared for
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND MONITORING
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
NATIONAL ANALYTICAL METHODS DEVELOPMENT RESEARCH PROGRAM
ANALYTICAL QUALITY CONTROL LABORATORY
REVIEWS OF CURRENT LITERATURE ON
ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL
No. 1U March, 1973
Arrangement of the citations following the major research areas of the Analytical
Quality Control Laboratory and other segments of the National Analytical Methods
Development Research Program. Items which apply to more than one area are cross-
referenced .
CONTENTS
1. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS Page 1-32
Scope: Wet chemical methods; Nutrients; NTA; Trace metals; Helium glow;
Chromatography (thin layer, gas, liquid); Spectroscopy (atomic absorption;
flame emission, arc-spark, visible, UV, IR, fluorescent); Radiochemistry;
Automation of methods; Ion-specific and other probes; Mass spectrometry;
Mass spectra; NMR; Instrument-computer interface; Chlorinated hydrocarbons
(pesticides, PCB's, other); Trace organics; Petroleum processes (reforming,
hydroforming, platforming, catalysts); Petroleum additives; Reduced crudes;
Sulfur isotopes; Boiling range determination; Asphatenes and carboids;
Weathering; Organometallics; Elemental analysis; Paraffinic distribution;
Petroleum wastes; Water quality standards; Effluent monitoring.
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS Page 33-57
Scope: Plankton; Periphyton; Macrophyton; Macroinvertebrates; Fish;
Sample collection (grab samplers, artificial substrates); Sample
processing (preservation, staining, automatic and manual sorting and
counting); Organisms identification (taxonomic keys, optical and electron
microscopy, gas chromatography, electrophoresis, karyosystematics); Biomass
measurements (drying, freeze-drying, ashing, ATP, DNA, chlorophyll measure-
ment, calorimetry); Metabolic rates (primary productivity, respiration,
electron transport, nitrogen fixation); Culturing; Biomonitoring; Bioassay;
Bioaccumulation of hazardous materials; Community structure (indicator
organisms, species diversity, community stability); Mathematical models;
Statistical analysis.
-------
3. MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS Page 58-66
Scope; Pollution indicators; Waterborne pathogens; Sampling; Detection;
Identification; Enumeration; Monitoring; Survival; Automation; Instrumenta-
tion; Cell counting; Selective and differential media; Growth factors;
Metabolic products; Membrane filter procedures; Microbiological standards;
Specific bacteriophage; Fluorescent antibody techniques; Radioactive
tracers; Antigen identification; Photomicroscopy; Optical measurements;
Data handling, presentation, and interpretation.
4. METHODS AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION Page 6?-69
Scope; Collaborative testing; Laboratory and analyst performance evaluation;
Inter- and intralaboratory quality control; Evaluation of laboratory equip-
ment; Statistical treatment of analytical data; Experimental design.
5. INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT Page 70-71*
Scope; Intake systems (methods of sampling, connecting lines, wells, motors,
pumps, mode of operation); Sensors (electro-chemical, electro-biological,
thermodynamic, mechanical, optical, nuclear); Analyzers (analog and digital
amplifiers, output displays); Recording systems (telemetry, data logging,
digital data processors).
ii
-------
1. PHYSTCftI- uffo CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-2931
"BORCH FRCH AN ENVIROHMeNTAL POINT OF VIEW", Royal Swedish Academy of Engineering
Sciences. Stockholm, Sweden, Report No. IVA-33, 1970, 21 pp. NTIS Report Ho.
N71-30598.
By comparison of previous measurements of boron content In river-, lake-,
or seavater with today's knowledge of the same, It has been possible to Identify the
effect of the Increase of boron In effluents on green plants and human beings. It
appears that from the data so far available on the boron content In nature, boron
and Its pollution do not constitute an acute problem for the environment. However,
a number of actions ore recommended such as the Investigation of the minimum toxic
dose for green plants and for human beings, the average Increase of boron In
effluents, and so forth. (In Swedish)
INDEX TERMS: Pollutant Identification, Water pollution effects. Aquatic habitats,
Toxicity, Boron, Rivers, lakes, Sea water, Aquatic environment, Water pollution
sources, Waste effluents, On-slte tests, Sampling, Instrumentation, Water
pollution.
AMIC-U12I*. (Continued)
Card 2/2
Fhosphothloate pesticides, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Phenolic
pesticides, Gas ehranatography, Trlazlne pesticides, Carbamate pesticides,
Trlazole pesticides, Polyehlorlnated blphenyls, Urea pesticides, Degradation
(decomposition), Metabolism, Isolation, Soil analysis, Water analysis, Structure,
Mass spectrometzy, Biological samples, Urine, Blood, Tissue.
AMIC-IH2U
"RECENT APPLICATIONS OF MASS SPECTRCMETRY AND CCMBIBED QAS CHROMATOBttPHY-MASS
SPECTRCMETRY TO PESTICIDE RESIDUE ANALYSE", Biros, F. J., Residue Reviews. Vol. UO,
1971, PP 1-63.
Mass spectral fragmentation studies of several classes of organic pestlcldal
compounds are outlined. These Include the organochlorlne and organophosphate classes of
Insecticides, carbamates, uracil, and trlazlne herbicides, and several miscellaneous
classes Including nlcotlnolds, rotenoids, and phenacyalkanolc acids. The available
literature relating to the application of mass spectrometry In the characterization of
Individual pesticide residues has been reviewed with emphasis on studies involving
animal metabolism of pesticides, plant- and soil-Induced chemical alteration of
pestlcldal materials, and the photodecomposltion of pesticides. Techniques for the
separation, Isolation, and collection of Individual pesticide residues for subsequent
mass spectral analysis have been tabulated, with special reference to gas
chroaatographlc and thin-layer chromatographlc trapping devices. A discussion is
presented on the various types of coupling techniques used for Interfacing a gas
chrcmatograph with a mass spectrometer. Included are methods utilizing direct coupling
of gas chromatographlc columns as well as those employing carrier gas separator
Interfaces operating on diffusion or effusion principles. Other mass spectroaetrlc
instrumental considerations are also outlined, particularly those associated with
enhancement of sensitivity, identification of multlcomponent gas chromatographlc
peaks, and the use of nass spectrometry as a gas chromatographlc detector In the
confirmation of chemical Identity. Recent applications of the combined technique to
the confirmation of pesticide residues and the characterization of metabolites and
photodecomposltion products are discussed.
AMIC-5965
"MARINE HEAVY-METAL POLLUTANT ANALYSIS BY ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROMETRY", Burrell,
D. C., University of Alaska, Institute of Marine Science. College, Alaska. Report No.
COHF-7110U4-1, Contribution No. 130, Contract Nos. AT (W-3)-310 and AT (&5-l)-2229,
October 1971, 2U pp. NTIS Report No. RLO-2229-T-1-10.
The principle advantage of AAS analysis for trace heavy metals In the marine
environment lies in the potential for an approximation to realtime data acquisition for
a large number of samples. The chief problems are associated with deletions and
additions of the test elements during collection, storage, and pre-analysls treatment
of the samples; problems common also to non-spectrophotometrlc methods. The latter
source of error may be largely negated In the future by the use of flame-less AAS
techniques. In any case, the portability of AAS Is a major advantage over neutron
activation and the latest X-ray fluorescence methods. It must be emphasized that •"
of the commonly utilized pre-AAS analysis concentration methods for trace metals In
seawater fractionate - Inadvertently or otherwise - the chemical forms of the test
element. It Is probably preferable at present to preface these treatments with some
oxidation step and to aim for total values, although AAS is a potentially valuable
tool for looking at separated organic fractions. Neutron activation analysis Is
currently of comparable utility for total analysis but will be superceded when
direct AAS and AFS techniques have been developed for routine ship-board use. Anodic
stripping voltamoetry is also very suitable for the analysis of Fb, Cd, Zn, and Cu In
seawater; all of major concern as potential marine-pollutants. These methods are not
routine at present, but ship-board use Is possible. Since It appears to be difficult
to electrolytically reduce Hg In a seawater medium, an amalgamation concentration,
possibly coupled with specialised long path-length absorption cells, appears to offer
-------
1. PHYSICAL AMP
METHODS
AMIC-5965 (Continued)
Card 2/2
the most promise for marine Hg detection. The accuracy and precision data quoted for
marine heavy-metal analysis relates almost exclusively to the Instrumental, analysis
operations; the major errors lie vlth the sampling and other pre-analysla
manipulations.
IHDEX TERMS: Analytical techniques, Water analysis. Sea water, Metals, Heavy metals,
Zinc, Mercury, Lead, cadmium, Copper, Separation techniques, Neutron activation
analysis, Review, Chelatlon, Filtration, Manganese, Iron, Cobalt, Nickel,
Atonic absorption, Atomic absorption spectrophotonetry. Sample preparation,
Preconcentratlon, Precision, Shipboard analysis. Anodic stripping voltammetry,
X-ray fluorescence, Detection limits, Silver.
AHEC-6191
"REAGENTS FOR DETERMINATIONS OF TRACE IMPURITIES IN WATER", Abercromble, P. N., Caskey,
A. L., Antepenko, R. J., et al., Illinois University, Water Resources Center, Urbana,
Illinois, Final Report, February 1972, Sb9 pp. NTIS Report No. EB 208 597.
Sensitive, specific, stable water-soluble reagents are needed for rapid,
spectrophotometrlc determination of trace Impurities In water. Syntheses, purification^
and characterization of the naphthol-mono-sulfcnlc acids are described. In addition,
data essential to the quantitative evaluation of various naphtholsulfonlc acids are
presented. A nev method for the determination of nitrate In water is described; the
proposed method, which uses 2-nitroso-l-naphthol-U-ffulfonic acid, is much more rapid
than the presently accepted standard methods for determination of nitrate. Another
method, which uses 1-naphthol-lt-sulfonlc acid for the determination of nitrate and
proposed by another worker has been carefully and critically evaluated and found to be
satisfactory only under very carefully controlled conditions. A nev reagent, sodium
2-nitroso-l-naphthol-5-sulfonate, has been proposed for the rapid, specific, sensitive
determination of cobalt In natural waters. Full development of water resources and the
control of pollutants returned to natural-water systems are dependent upon methods of
determining trace constituents; significant contributions toward meeting those needs
have been accomplished In this work. The methods can readily be applied to such diverse
systems as lakes where agricultural fertilizer runoff may be significant, to effluents
from, plants In the metallurlgical industry, to natural-water systems In highly minera-
lized areas, and to runoff from strip-mined lands. Effective new research areas
are readily Identified as an extension of the work reported here; better methods for the
determination of nitrate In water, and more sensitive methods for the determination of
cobalt In water are envisioned.
AMIC-6016
"G. L. C. ANALYSIS OF TRACE-METALS IN SEAWATER: SOLVENT EXTRACTION TECHNIQUES", Lee,
H.-L., Burrell, D. C., University of Alaska, Institute of Marine Science, College,
Alaska, Report Ro. RLO-2229-T1-6, 15 pp.
A chelatlon-solvent extraction procedure was tested for its ability to remove
metals from seavater for gas-liquid chromatographlc analysis. Seavater samples spiked
with radloisotopes of Indium, iron, cobalt, and zinc were combined at various pH
ranges vlth equal volumes of toluene-trlfluoroacetylacetone on toluene-TFA-lsobutylamlne
to remove the metals for analysis. Extraction efficiency vas determined as a function
of phase ratio and time by varying Initial quantities of seavater and different
equilibria time. 99-5 percent of the Indium may be extracted over a pH range from
6.3-10.0, and Iron Is effectively removed between pH b.0-10.0. Only a trace of zinc
could be extracted from seavater of any pH, qualitatively; the extractablllty of
cobalt vas also found to be very low. Trace aluminum concentrations may also be
detected.
INDEX TERMS: Sea vater, Solvent extractions, Efficiencies, Separation techniques,
Chelatlon, Methodology, Heavy metals. Trace elements, Pollutant identification,
Hydrogen Ion concentration, Radloehemlcal analysis, Gas liquid ehromatography,
Sample preparation, chemical Interference, Bi-llU, 7e-59, Co-60, Zn-65, Chemical
recovery, Toluene-trlfluoroacetylacetone, Organic solvents.
AMIC-6191 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Pollutant identification, Water analysis, Chemical analysis. Nitrates,
Cobalt, Methodology, Gas chromatography, Separation techniques, Heavy metals,
Sulfonates, Industrial wastes, Mine wastes, Agricultural runoff, Naphthol-mono-
sulfonlc acids, Natural waters, Reagents, Sodium 2-nltroso-l-naphthol-5-sulfonate,
2-Nitroso-l-naphthol-U-sulfonlc acid, 1-Naphthol.U.sulfonlc acid, Organic solvents
Sensitivity, Precision, Sample preparation.
-------
1.
PHYSICAL AHD CHEMICAL METHODS
AjgC-6257
"DETERMIHATION OP L3AD IH FISH BY FURNACE ATCMIC ABSaRPTIQH", Pagenkopf, 0. K.,
Neman. D. R., Woodrlff, R., Analytical Chemistry, vol. I*, Ho. 13, November 1972,
pp 22U8-2250. ——•———^
A meth A method Is reported tor lead analysis In fish using furnace atomic absorption.
One to five grams of fish muscle vere obtained by dissection and freeze-drled; about
1 gram of the dried tissue was weighed, digested In a mixture of concentrated nitric and
perchloric acids, and the colorless samples transferred to clean volumetric flasks.
Twenty mlcrollters of the sample vere placed Into graphite cups which were In turn
placed under an TR light and heated until the solvent evaporated. The cups vere then
placed In the furnace and the peak absorbances were recorded. The detection limit of
the outlined method Is 0.1$ ng/g with an absolute sensitivity of 5.5 plcognms. The
accuracy of the method was evaluated using standard addition whereby a known quantity of
lead was added to approximately 1-gram equivalents of dried muscle. The resulting data
Indicate that virtually no lead Is being lost during the procedure. The procedure
appears to be free of matrix effects and should be applicable to lead analysis In any
biological system.
INDEX TERNS: Lead, Heavy metals. Chemical analysis. Freeze drying. Pollutant
Identification, Assay, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry. Furnace atomic
absorption, Graphite furnace, Detection limits, Muscle, Animal tissues, Chemical
digestion. Sample preparation. Precision, Chemical Interference, Absorbance.
AMXC-6271
"NATIONAL ASSESSMENT OF TREKDS IN WATER QUALITY", Envlro Control, Inc., Washington,
D.C., Final Report, Contract No. EQC211*, June 1972, W3 pp. HTE3 Report Ho.
PB 210 669.
This study was performed for the Council on Environmental Quality to develop
a new approach for assessing trends In national water quality. Data were analyzed
from KPA's STQRBT system which contains Input from 70,000 stations. The quality
parameters examined were limited to those measured at least quarterly for most stations
having at least 8 years of records. This restriction eliminated some Important
parameters such as pesticides and heavy metals. The parameters analyzed Included
organic Indicators (DO, BOD, COD, TOG), nutrient indicators (total P, soluble P,
anaemia plus organic N, and H03 plus H02), sediment measures (suspended solids and
turbidity), and salinity measures (total dissolved solids and conductivity). Trends
were analyzed as a function of flow which was felt to be the most powerful determinant
of water quality. Data from 1U2 stations (which are not necessarily representative)
satisfied the criteria established and were therefore analyzed. The analyses showed
that some parameters (e.g. suspended solids and turbidity) were roughly proportional
to flow, whereas others (e.g. total dissolved solids) vere inversely proportional.
The most significant finding was that In many cases oxygen-demanding load and nutrients
were directly related to flow. Trends of the various parameters from the lb2 stations
are tabulated.
INDEX TERtG: water quality, Rutrlents, Suspended solids. Turbidity, Salinity,
Conductivity, Flow, Forecasting, Oxygen demand, Dissolved oxygen, Biochemical
oxygen demand. Chemical oxygen demand, Phosphates, Nitrates, Nitrites, Dissolved
solids, Data Interpretation, Organic carbon, Trends. •
AMIC-6270
"ENVIRCHMEHTAL INDICATORS FOR PESTICIDES1', Strickland, J., Blue, T., Stanford Research
Institute, Menlo park, California, Final Report, Contract No. EQC217, April 1972,
123 PP- NTIS Report No. PB 210 666.
Results are presented from a study concerned with environmental Indicators
of pesticides. The Indicators Include consideration of: (1) Production, Imports,
exports, and consumption of pesticides by type and over time, (2) amounts of
pesticides found in food, air, water, soil, wildlife, plants, and the human body, and
(3) Indirect measures of pesticide utilization as they relate to public health, crop
quality and yield, and recreational and aesthetic values. Steps are Identified which
should be taken for future collection and processing of the data necessary for
calculation of these Indicators at appropriate Intervals. A comprehensive framework
was developed which characterizes the modes by which materials move, the mediums
affected, the ecological phenomena that can be observed, and the environmental factors
concerned. Recommendations are Included for effectively orienting and "°~^<"e pest
control programs with maximum environmental enhancement.
INDEX TERMS: Pesticide residues, Water pollution effects, Monitoring, Transportation,
Path of pollutants, lakes, Rivers, Estuaries, Fish, Public health, Wildlife,
Rain.
AHIC-6S72
"ucvBJjurriiiHi OF ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINIHG CHLORINATED HYDROCARBON RESIDUES
IH WATERS AHD SEDIMENTS FROM STORAGE RESERVOIRS", Lyons, E. T., Salman, H. A.,
Bureau of Reclamation, Engineering and Research Center, Denver, Colorado, Report No.
REC-ERC-72-15, April 1972, 10 pp. HTIS Report Ho. PB 210 639.
Analytical methods for measuring and detecting chlorinated hydrocarbon
insecticides In reservoir and bottom muds are described. A semiautomatic extraction
with hexana followed by gas chronatography was used to determine the presence of
Insecticides In water. A 16-hr soxblet extraction using 6 percent dlethyl ether in
petroleum ether followed by florlsil cleanup and gas chromatograpby gave the most
reproducible results for determining Insecticides In bottom muds. For both water and
sediment samples, a known volume was Injected Into the gas chromatograpby, the
concentration of the Insecticide determined by comparing their peak heights with those
of insecticide standards, and corrected for percent of recovery. Water and sediment
samples taken from Lake Mead were analyzed by these methods for numerous Insecticides.
The water samples contained lindane at a concentration of 0.02 to 5.00 parts per billion
(ppb). No other insecticides vere found. No Insecticides were found In the sediments;
however, gas chromatograph Interferences made the sediment analysis extremely difficult
even after column cleanup.
INDEX TERMS: Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Water analysis. Sediments, Separation
techniques. Gas chrooatography, DDD, DDE, DDT, Heptachlor, Aldrln, Dleldrln,
Sample preparation, Chemical Interference, Lindane, Kelthane, Reptachlor epoxlde,
Perthane, Endrln, Hethoxychlor.
-------
i. PBTSICAL Am CHEMICAL. METHODS
AMIC-627U
"THE ROLE OP-PAPER MILL ADDITIVES AS POTENTIAL STREAM POLLUTANTS DEVELOPMENT OP
NUCLEAR TECHNIQUES", Chatters, R. M., Washington State University, College of
Engineering Research Division, Pullman, Washington, Report Ho. X 23, Annual Progress
Report No. 2, Contract Ho. AT(it5-l)-2221, March 1, 1972, 6b pp. HTIS Report Ho.
RLO-2221-T3-2.
The purpose of this study vas to develop nuclear analytical techniques
where needed for 'better controlling paper mill additives to prevent their release
Into the environment as pollutants. The results of the second year's efforts are
reported in this document. A new method for the determination of glucose, and In
turn starch, was developed based upon the reduction of mercury oimmmidn by glucose
followed by the use of dlatomaceous earth to recover •'" mercury so liberated from
its compound. The new technique vas satisfactorily employed under actual mill operating
conditions. Extensive studies were made in the laboratory and cooperatively with paper
mill personnel to determine the correlation between glucose levels and BCD on the same
effluent samples. An adhesive-type additive was successfully tagged with a metal
element and tested twice under normal mill operating conditions. It vas also found
that a metallic bleach compound could be readily detected by neutron activation
analysis in paper and In effluents. The metal was present in non-toxic quantities In
the finished product as well as the effluent. A method vas developed for tagging one
of the Important non-starchy sizing compounds with a metal element. The resultant
product vas found by a paper-chemlcala company to yield identical test results on
paper as did the untagged compound. One filler and whitening compound vas tested and
found to be satisfactory for neutron activation analysis as well as by means of x-ray
fluorescence spectrometry. For neutron activation analysis, a new type of Irradiation
AJOC-6308
"A SURVEY OF THE SELENIUM CONTEST OF FISH FROM »»9 HEW YORK STATE WATERS", Pakkala,
I. S., Gutenmann, V. H., Lisle, D. J., et al.. Pesticides Monitoring Journal, Vol. 6,
Ho. 2, September 1972, pp 107-111*.
A survey vas made of the selenium content of 1*38 fish .of various species
collected in 1969 from U9 Rev York State waters and a group of lake trout sampled
in 1970 from Cayuga Lake only. Decapitated, eviscerated fish were chopped, mixed,
and frozen in polyethylene bags prior to analysis. Selenium vas determined by an
adaptation of the Allavay and Cory method Involving oxygen-flask combustion of dried
fish and the determination of the fluorescence of the selenium 2,3-dlanlnonaphthalene
complex. The method vas sensitive to about 0.1 ppm of Se In fish. Concentrations
of selenium on a freshvelght basis were usually below 1 ppm. There was little apparent
correlation between selenium concentrations and species or sampling locations except
that sturgeon from the Hudson River, lake trout from Lakes George and West Canada,
vhitefish from Raquette Lake, and several species from Lake Pleasant had consistently
higher levels of selenium than other samples; all fish from Lakes Butterfleld and
CT^"'*''' and the Chenango and Salmon Rivers had consistently lover levels. Ho
correlation vas apparent between selenium levels and size or sex of fish. Selenium
did not appear to be cumulative in lake trout of known age up to 12 years from
Cayuga Lake.
INDEX TERMS: Freshwater fish, Anadromous fish. Brackish-water fish, Saline water fish,
New York, Lakes, Rivers, Separation techniques, Sampling, Cold-water fish,
Marine fish, Pollutant identification, Chemical analysis, Selenium, Chalcogens,
Sample preparation, Sample preservation, Chemical recovery, Detection limits.
AKIC-6S7I* (Continued)
Card 2/2
container vas developed and has been adopted by other investigators. Wherever possible
during the Investigations to date, samples for study have been collected In cooperating
INDEX TERMS: Pulp wastes, pulp and paper Industry, Radioactivity techniques, Blochemicf
oxygen demand, Neutron activation analysis, X-ray fluorescence, Dyes, Bleaching
wastes. Starch, Glucose, Adhesives, Whlteners, Fillers, Sugars, Sizing agents.
AMIC-6363
"COMPARISCn OF OXYGEN-BOMB COMBUSTION WITH STANDARD IGNITION TECHNIQUES FOR DETERMXRIHa
TOTAL ASH", Relners, W. A., Relners, N. M., Ecology. Vol. $3, No. 1, Winter 1972,
pp 132-136.
Ash was determined In a variety of plant and organic soil samples by
oxygen-bomb combustion and by a simple muffle-furnace technique. The Influence of
using different drying temperatures was also assessed. One hundred thirty-nine
plant tissue and 1? organic soil samples were collected and analyzed by oxygen-bomb
combustion, muffle-furnace, char, and calorlmetric techniques. Bomb combustion
produced a systematic error of underestimate and a random error of variation between
trials. These errors varied among the different types of material tested, but in
general both types of error increased with the ash content of the material. The
average systematic error of underestimate of ash content for all samples was
1.U6 percent, which led to an error of l.$6 percent when adjusting caloric coefficients
to an ash-free basis. Lower drying temperatures had an insignificant effect on
adjusted caloric coefficients. Independent ash determinations are recommended for
materials with aah content greater than 5 percent to restrict the error of adjusted
coefficients below 1 percent. The muffle-furnace technique is recommended for close
approximations of absolute ash content.
INDEX TERMS: Chemical analysis, Methodology, Biomass, Soil analysis, Productivity,
Plant tissues, Oxygen-bomb combustion, Muffle-furnace technique. Dry ashing.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AHD CHEMICAL METHOIS
AMIC-6392
"SEPARATION"OF ALDHIN FROM AROCLOR 125V, Hannan, E. J., Bills, D. P.. Bulletin of
Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 8, No. 6, December 197B, pp 327-328.
IVo gas chromatographlc methods have teen found for the separating of aldrln
from polychlorlnated biphenyls. The most direct, quickest, and easiest method for
quantification Involved the use of an OV-225 column on vhlch aldrln vlll precede Aroclor
1251*. The second method Involved the use of SE-30/QF-1 and OV-17 columns. Peaks can be
trapped from either column and relnjected on the other. The latter method Is more
applicable to environmental samples; It can also be applied to the separation of
dleldrln from FOB'S only when the peak containing dleldrln Is trapped from the SE-30/
QF-1 column and relnjected on the OV-17 column.
INDEX TERMS: Separation techniques, Aldrln, Pollutant Identification, Polychlorlnated
biphenyls, Dieldrln, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Methodology, Aroclor
Electron capture gas chromatography, Column chromatography.
AMC-6397
"A SIMPLE TEST FOR ESTIMATING FREE CHLORIDE", Bauer, R., Philips, B. F., Rupe. C. 0.,
journal American Water Works Association, vol. 6U, Bo. 11, November 1972, pp 787.789.
A simple device is described for determining the presence of free chlorine
in vater vhlch vlll In turn provide a convenient means of measuring germicidal
activity. Since syrlngaldazlne reacts vlth free chlorine and not vith bound chlorine
such as chloramlnes, it has teen used In combination with vanllllnazlne on paper
strips for measuring free chlorine both In the laboratory and the field. With this
wicklng device, more chlorine can be brought Into contact vlth the indicator, thus
enhancing color production such that 0.2-2.0 ppm free chlorine can be estimated.
Chlorine, Pollutant Identification, Vater analysis, Laboratory tests,
On-slte tests. Halogens, Color reactions. Methodology, Quantitative analysis,
Chloramlnes, Syrlngaldazlne, Chemical indicators, Vanllllnazlne.
AMIC-6395
"THE GAS CHRCMATOGRAPHIC DETERMINATICH OF PARAQUAT IN WATER", Soderqulst, C. J.,
Crosby, D. G., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 8,
No. 6, December 1972, PP 303-300
A simple, Inexpensive, and reproducible method for the resolution and specific
detection of paraquat In vater Involves: (1) complete hydrogenatlon of paraquat to
1,1'-dlmethy 1-4,4'-blplperldlne (III) In aqueous solution, (2) extraction Into
organic solvent, and (3) analysis by flame lonizatlon gas liquid chromatography. This
procedure has a limit of detectablllty of lesa than 0.1 ppm but recoveries of only
36-1*3 percent at 0.1-1.0 ppm. The detection limit may be extended by preconcentratlng
a larger vater sample by evaporation or hydrogenatlon. Although the recoveries are
low, they are constant and reproducible. The analysis requires less than one hour per
sample. This method may be used for the qualitative confirmation of paraquat or dlquat
residues.
INDEX TERMS: Paraquat, Gas chromatography, Water analysis, Chemical analysis.
Pollutant identification, Herbicides, Halogenated pesticides, Dlquat, Methodology,
Solvent extractions, Pesticide residues, Flame lonizatlon gas chromatography.
Detection limits, Recovery, Reproduclbllity.
AMIC-6398
"OIL SPILL IDENTIFICATION WITH MTCRCENCAPSUIATED COMPOUNDS SUITABLE FOR ELECTRON
CAPTURE", Mitchell, B. L., Slmoonds, P. G., Shalr, F. H., Environmental Science
and Technology, Vol. 7, No. 2, February 1973, pp 121-1S4. -
A technique Involving the mlcroencapsulatlon of hlgh-vapor-pressure compounds
suitable for electron capture detection Is proposed for the rapid, unambiguous
Identification of oil slicks. The principal steps In testing a sample are: separating
all of the partlculate matter, Including the mlcroencapsulated tracer, from the oil;
opening the olcrocapsules at the desired tine to release the primary compounds Into the
airspace overhead; and injecting a portion of the overhead gas Into the gas
chromatograph column. Experimental diffusion studies Indicate that the tracer will
remain within the mlcrocapsules during the lifetime of an oil slick. Small-scale
field studies were conducted vlth 30-mlcron dlam mlcrocapsules containing Freon 113.
Initial tagging densities of about 100 partlcles/cu cm were adequate to permit
Identification for periods up to at least a month after the spill. This identification
technique allows the possibility of providing over a million distinguishable mixtures
from 20 primary compounds.
INDEX TERMS: Oil spills, Water pollution sources, Pollutant identification, Methodology
Tagging, Tracers, Mlcroencapsulatlon, Electron capture gas chromatography.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AHD CHEMICAL METHODS
AJdC-6399
"HEAVY METAL LEVELS OF OTTAWA ADD RIDEAU RIVER SEDIMENTS", Oliver, B. 0., Environmental
Science ana Technology. Vol. 7, No. 8, February 1973, pp 135-137.
Surface sediment samples were collected with a Lane sediment sampler at
2-mlle Intervals along the Ottava and Rldean Rivera near Ottawa, Canada, la 1971. Three
samples were taken at each sampling station about 10 yards from each bank and In the
center of the river. One gram at each alr-drled sample vas weighed, digested In an
acid solution for 2 hr at 70-90 C and the acid extracts analyzed for Pb, Kg, Zn, Cu,
HI, Co, Fe, Mi, and Cr using atomic absorption spectrophotomatry. The finer aedlnent
samples generally contained more heavy metal than the coarser samples. Since there
vas such a pronounced difference In the average metal concentrations, the surface areas
of the samples were measured and taken Into consideration when deciding whether or not
metal levels were unusually high. Some anomalously high heavy metal concentrations
found In the sediments In certain locations appeared to be related to pollution of the
rivers by municipal and Industrial waste water discharges and vaste disposal practices.
INDEX TERtG: Heavy metals. Pluvial sediments, chemical analysis, Soil analysis.
Aquatic soils. Coarse sediments, Silts, Clays, Mercury, Lead, Zinc, Copper,
Nickel, Cobalt, Iron, Manganese, Chromium, Atomic absorption spectrophotonetry,
Ottawa River, Rldeau River.
AMTC.6U02
"MERCURY: SHORT-TERM STORAGE OF NATURAL WATERS", Carr, R. A., Hiltaiss, P. E.,
Environmental Science and Technology, Vol. 7, No. 1, January 1973, PP 62-63.
Surface water samples from the Chesapeake Bay were used In a study to
determine the effects of sample storage on the analysis of natural waters for mercury.
Carrier-free Hg-197 was added to two 1-liter and two 19-liter samples, stored In
polyethylene containers, and one of each pair was acidified to pH 1 with redistilled
nitric acid. Five-milllliter allquots were withdrawn for B days following storage and
counted for total, filter, and filtrate portions. Use of the carrier-free Hg-197
and Improved flameless atomic absorption techniques shoved negligible losses to sample
containers upon 8-day storage at pH 1. At the time of sampling, 60 percent of the
total mecury was associated with partleulates, while at the end of the storage period
only 10-15 percent was associated with partleulates. Ho vaporization losses were
observed under these conditions. A similar tracer experiment was performed on acldlflec
glacial Ice meltwater obtained from a depth of 57 meters at the Camp Century (Greenland)
This sample had remained frozen until Just prior to the addition of the radlotracer.
The Re was almost quantitatively associated with the filterable solids but was
released Into solution during storage at a pH less than 1.
INDEX TERMS: Mercury, Storage, Tracers, Water analysis, Flameless atomic absorption
spectrophotcmetry.
AMIC-6UOO ZZZ
"TREATMENT OF EFFLUENT FROM MANUFACTURE OF CHLORINATED PESTICIDES WITH A SYNTHETIC,
POLYMERIC ADSORBENT, AMBERLTTE XAD-U", Kennedy. D. C., Environmental Science and
Technology, Vol. 7, No. 2, February 1973, p 13B-1IH. "~~~"~~~~"~~"~~~~"~~
Laboratory experiments were conducted In order to devise a treatment method
with specific application to Industrial wastes streams which contain chlorinated
pesticides. The use of the adsorbent Ambarlite XAD-U vas evaluated la comparison
with the widely used activated carbon. Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticide effluent
samples obtained from a pesticide manufacturer were analyzed by a technique involving
a liquid-liquid extraction concentration step followed by electron capture gas-liquid
chromatography In order to characterize their content. Laboratory adsorption
•Imenta were performed in 1.77-cm l.d. glass columns. A coarse glass frit In the
bottom of the column was used to retain the adsorbent bed. Forty mill niters of
adsorbent (ca. 32-cm bed depth) vas used In each experiment. Solutions were pumped
through the column with a Hach variable flow piston pump. Column effluent samples
were collected periodically and analyzed for total chlorinated pesticides. The leakage
of unadsorbed pesticides from the XAD-U column was significantly lower than that from
the activated carbon column. The adsorbed pesticides were efficiently desorbed from
IAD-It by elutlng with isppropanol but the activated carbon could not be regenerated
effectively with Isopropanol.
INDEX TERMS: Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Adsorption, Industrial wastes,
Effluents, Separation techniques, Activated carbon, Pollutant Identification,
Amberllte XAD-U.
AMIC-fltC*
"REMOVAL OF HEAVY METALS FROM WATER AND BRINE USING SILICON ALLOYS", McKaveney, J. P.,
Faaslnger, W. P., Stivers, D. A., Environmental Science and Technology, Vol. 6, No. 13,
December 1972, pp 1109-1113.
A one-step method using silicon alloys has been proposed for the removal of
heavy metals from waste waters and brine solutions. Silicon alloys of calcium and
magnesium produced the best results both from the view of scope In the exchange
(zinc thru mercury in the electromotive series) as well as replacement of heavy metals
with elements cannon to natural waters (calcium and magnesium). Silicon alloys of
aluminum, barium, Iron, and titanium were also found suitable but their use nay require
some posttreatment (hydrolysis or sulfate precipitation). Ferrosllicon Is fairly
selective In removing mercury without significant iron contamination In t$e water. The
alloys can be used in either a column or batch contact type of operation. Brine and
other aqueous solutions over the pH range of 1-12 have been treated. However, to
minimize acid attack and to conserve alloy, the pH should be greater than or equal to
U.O. Metals successfully removed were; Ag, As, Au, Cd, Cu, Cr, Fe, Rg, Pb, V, and
Zn. Mercury has also been successfully removed from chlor-alkall brines.
INDEX TERMS: Heavy metals. Separation techniques, Waste water (pollution). Brines,
Aqueous solutions, Pollutant Identification, Waste Identification, Pollutants,
Hydrogen ion concentration, Calcium, Magnesium, Gold, Cadmium, Copper, Chromium,
Iron, Mercury, Lead, Zinc, Water analysis, Methodology, Water pollution sources,
Silicon alloys, Silver, Arsenic, Vanadium.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AM) CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6I*05
"CCRCENTRATTON OP ARSENIC FROM WATER SAMPUS BY DISTIIlATlaR", Parkas, 3. J.,
Grlesbach, R. C., Schachter, D., Button, M., Environmental Science and Technology.
Vol. 6, NO. 13, December 1972, pp 1116-1117.
Determination of the amount of arsenic In samples of drinking voter Is
facilitated If the arsenic In the sample can first be concentrated Into a smaller
volume. The utility of the distillation method described In standard reference works
was Investigated. During the course of the Investigation, some of the variables
Influencing the recovery of arsenic using the distillation method were systematically
studied. Optimum conditions for application of this method were determined based on
experiments in which percentage recovery of the arsenic present In the original sample
was measured as a function of the amounts of the reagents added to the original sample
and of the volume of distillate collected. The following Improvements were made In
the experimental technique: (1) a carrier gas was not used; (2) the distillation
apparatus was closed to the atmosphere except for a side arm on the distillate
collection flask which was connected to another flask via tubing; (3) the distillate
flask was kept cold and the condensate was led Into it via a short dip tube; and
(*) after the completion of distillation, 100 ml of cold distilled water was added
thereby diluting the HCl In order to avoid an overly violent reaction with the arsenic
determination reagents.
Water analysis, Chemical analysis, Separation techniques, Distillation,
Potable water, Pollutant identification, Water quality control, Methodology,
Heavy metals, Arsenic.
AMXC-6U10
"A SIMPLIFIED METHOD OF FREDICTZHO DISSOLVED OXYGEN DISTRIBUTION IN PARTIALLY-
STRATIFIED ESTUARIES", Ratasuk, s.. Water Research, vol. 6, Ho. 12, December 1972,
pp 1525-1532.
The pattern of salinity and dissolved oxygen stratification in a part
partially-stratified estuary was delineated from results obtained during a pollution
study of the Tyne Estuary In North-east England. Salinity data showed that the
estuary was normally partially-stratified but could become well-mixed at lew freshwater
flow. However, a two-layer flow system always existed, even under well-mixed
conditions, unlike salinity stratification, dissolved oxygen stratification existed
at all freshwater flow rates due to the two-layer flow condition and the
self-purification process. It is suggested that only the surface and bottom dissolved
oxygen conditions ore required for practical use In pollution control of
partially-stratified estuaries. A simple method of determining the surface and
bottom dissolved oxygen concentrations from the depth-averaged concentration was
developed and found to give satisfactorily accurate results. The method was based on
the finding that. In almost all cases, dissolved oxygen varies linearly with depth.
The depth-averaged dissolved oxygen, Cav, can then be expressed as a function of the
surface, Csf, and bottom, Cb, dissolved oxygen concentrations: Csf plus Cb equals
2 Cav. The data for Cav are obtained from the one-dimensional model. Consequently,
If either Csf or Cb Is known, the other remaining unknown can be readily determined.
IHDEX TERMS: Dissolved oxygen, Estuaries, Stratification, Methodology, Forecasting,
Profiles, Equations, Flow rates, Salinity, Tyne Estuary, England, Salinity
stratification.
AK£C-6I»06
"DISTRIBUTIOn OF MERCURY IN THE SEDIMENTS OF HEW HAVEN (CONK.) HARBOR", Applequlst,
M. D., Katz, A., Tureklan. K. K., Environmental Science and Technology. Vol. 6, No. 13,
December 1972, p 1123-1124.
A study was undertaken to assess the distribution and levels of mercury In the
sediments of a typical industrial harbor and to Identify the probable sources of high
concentrations encountered. Sediment samples were collected using a 15-cm-long gravity
corer with a PVC core ^"rr b.8 cm in diameter. Cores were collected In water less
than one meter deep using manual depression of an aluminum tube. Segments (generally
the top 8-cm portion) of the cores to be analyzed were disaggregated, homogenized, and
heated at 90-100 C for 2 days. Smaller allquots were then pulverized and carried
through the acid, digestion and permanganate oxidation steps. The Insoluble silicate
residue was separated from solution to prevent loss of Eg by adsorption, and the
absorption cell was wrapped with a heating tape to prevent water condensation on the
quartz windows. Analysis for mercury was carried out by cold atomic absorption
spectrophotometry. The concentration range of mercury in 0-6- and 8-15-cm cores from
the long Wharf area was 0.06-1.33 and 0.08-2.1*0, respectively. There was found to be
a direct correlation between the highest Eg concentrations and the location of the
major municipal sewer outfalls.
INDEX TERMS: Methodology, Sediments, Soil analysis, Mercury, Water pollution sources.
Heavy metals, Aquatic soils, Chemical analysis, Spatial distribution, Pollutant
Identification, Sampling, Cold atomic absorption spectrophoteraetry.
AMIC-6U12
"TRICKLING FILTER EXPERIMENT FOR PURIFICATION OF ANTIBIOTIC-CQKTAIHIHO HOSPITAL
SEWAGE", Csanady, M., Desk, Z., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 12, December 1972,
pp 15"H-15«>7.
The purpose of this study was to determine whether antibiotics in hospital
sewage Inhibit biological treatment by trickling filters. Preliminary Investigations
of sewage treatment In tuberculosis sanitoria with trickling filters showed that In
most cases purification efficiency was not satisfactory but that some technical
deficiency existed In every case. For establishing efficiency of treatment 12
parameters were used. Organic matter was determined by the acid permanganate method.
BOD?, coll and bacterial counts (at 20 degrees and 37 degrees C), and Clostrldlum
numbers were also determined. The antibiotic effect, I.e., streptomycin concentration,
of sewagewas determined mlcroblologically (Kavanagh, 1963). Experiments were performed
at a tuberculosis-sanitarium where a small, separate trickling filter was operating.
At the time of the experiment the treatment plant was operated and loaded as usual, and
its treatment efficiency was satisfactory. The plant was loaded by sewage of 6U patient*
and 28 personnel; drug use In the dispensary was precisely registered throughout the
experiment. Experiments were carried out under the following operating conditions:
streptomycin was fed to the settled sewage in 6 and 12 g/cu m doses for 7 and 3 days,
respectively, expressed as active streptomycin base. Streptomycin In a concentration
of 6-7 ng/1 did not affect the operation of the lowload trickling filter. As this
concentration is at least 6-8 times as high as that of tuberculosis-sanatoria sewages,
it is concluded that Inhibition of purification by such antibiotics does not occur.
At a concentration of 12 ng/1, streptomycin adversely affected the performance of the
trickling filter by moderately decreasing the efficiency of organic matter removal
-------
1. PHYSICAL ASP CHEMICAL METHODS
AKK-6M2 (continued)
Card 2/2-
and considerably reducing Its efficiency In removing bacteria. Antibiotics In severs
In unregulated and high concentration nay thus disturb treatment of the sevage.
1HDEX TERMS: Biological treatment, Sevage effluents, Hospitals, Efficiencies, Waste
water treatment, Antibiotics (pesticides), Trickling filters, Sevage bacteria,
Inhibition, Streptomycin.
AMIC .61121
•DETECTION OF IONIC WATER POLLUTANTS BY LASER EXCITED RAHAH SPECTROSCOPY"
Baldwin,
S. F., Broun, C. W., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 12, December 1972, PP l601-l6oU.
A study was conducted in order to determine the practical minimum
concentrations of inorganic anlons which can be detected and Identified by Raman
spectrosecpy, and to catalog spectra of pertinent pollutants for future identification
purposes. The Raman spectra of aqueous solutions were recorded on a Spex Model lUOl
mOBOChronator using a C.R.L. Model 52A argon ion cw laser and a photon counting
detection system. Emphasis was placed on the 3 anlons nitrate, sulfate, and phosphate.
The carbonate ion was used In several experiments to simulate actual situations. The
sodium salts of the anlons were dissolved In water to form 1 M solutions and their
Raman spectra recorded. The samples were then diluted to $0 percent of their original
concentration and their spectra recorded again. This process of dilution was continued
until the mlnln"! detectable concentration was reached. The minimi concentrations
detected using the described method were 2$, 50, 50, and 75 ppm, respectively, of
nitrate, phosphate, sulfate, and carbonate anlons. In order to determine the
feasibility of Raman scattering to detect Ionic pollutants In a real situation, mixtures
of anlons present in concentrations of 100 ppm were examined. The nitrate and sulfate
anlons gave stronger bands and they can be detected in even lower concentrations.
Since the phosphate and sulfate bands are relatively close In frequency, they would be
more difficult to distinguish. The Raman spectrum of a seawater sample taken from
Rarragansett Bay yielded a reading of approximately 2UOO ppm sulfate. This study showed
that Raman spectroscopy can be a valuable analytical tool in the detection of inorganic
water pollutants.
INDEX TERMS: Chemical analysis, Water analysis. Pollutant identification, Sulfates,
Hitratea, Carbonates. Phosphates. He«»viai»RY, n«-i«m arusetroaconv. Detection limits.
AMIC-6U20
"AUTOMATED FLUQROMETRIC METHOD FOR DETERMINATION OF BORON IN WATERS, DETERffiHTS
AHD SEWAJB EFFLUENTS", Afghan, B. K., Goulden, P. D., Ryan, J. ?., Water Research,
Vol. 6, Ho. 12, December 1972, pp ll^S-l'tBS.
An automated method for the determination of boron In natural waters,
detergents sad sevage effluents Is described. The method is based on the reaction of
U'-ehloro.2-hydroxy-U.fflethoxybenzophenone (CHMB) with boron to produce fluorescent
species, In a 90 percent sulfurlc acid medium. The method has been made specific to
remove any Interferences from-all major and minor ions and other organic compounds
normally present in water. The method is capable of measuring different chemical forms
of boron such as boric acid, borax, sodium perborate and tetraphenyl boron. The
method analyzes 10 samples per hour, la the 5-100 ppb boron range. The rate of sample
analysis can be Increased to 20 per hour at higher concentration ranges. The limit of
detection is 1 ppb boron.
INDEX TERMS: Boron, Pollutant identification, Water analysis, Chemical analysis,
Sevage effluents. Methodology, Detergents, Automation, chemical reactions.
Snow, Ions, Organic compounds, Chfmlml Interference, lt'.chloro-2-hydroxy-U"
methoxybenzophenone, Detection limits, Boric acid, Borax, Sodium perborate,
Tetraphenyl boron*
AKC.&22
"A REVIEW OF THE ARSENIC CYCLE IN NATURAL WATERS", Ferguson, J. F., Gavls, J.,
Water Research. Vol. 6, No. 11, November 1972, pp 1259-1271*.
The occurrence and cycling of arsenic in fresh waters Is reviewed. An
eHlpH diagram provides thexmodynamle information on a system which includes sulfur.
Arsenic may be removed from the solution phase to sediments by absorption on clays or
other compounds or by eepreelpltatlon Into metal Ion precipitation. Possible
mlcroblally-medlated reactions of arsenic, including oxidation of arsenic, methylatlon
of arsenic species, and reduction of arsenate, are discussed with reference to the
locale of the reaction in the water column or in the sediments and to the toxlcologlcal
significance of the reaction products and the rates of reaction. A cycle of reactions
for arsenic In a stratified lake Is proposed, and evidence is summarized relating to
the occurrence and Importance of particular reactions. The potential pollution
hazard of arsenic la from ingestlon of drinking water with high concentrations of
arsenic, rather than consuming arsenic containing aquatic organisms. Although arsenic
is greatly concentrated In aquatic organisms, it Is evidently not progressively
concentrated along a food chain. In addition, arsenic when consumed as an
organically-bound species in flesh evidently has low toxiclty. Investigation of the
global cycle of arsenic shows that volcanic activity is the original source of much of
the arsenic in sedimentary rocks. In addition, human activities Including the use of
arsenic, the burning of fossil fuels, erosion of land, and the mining and processing
of sulflde minerals have increased the amount of arsenic entering the oceans by at
least a factor of 3. This will have no effect on the concentrations for many hundreds
of years. However, cultural contributions cause high localized concentrations In many
fresh waters, and careful surveillance and Increased knowledge of the fate of arsenic
In the aquatic environment are needed to Insure that no public health hazard occurs.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMC-6^28
'"EHVIRONMBNTAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR ESTUAR1HE BENTHAL SYSTEMS", Bella, D. A., Water
Research. Vol. 6, Ro. 11, November 1972, PP itOg-lMB.
A model of estuarlne benthal systems was developed to describe the major chemi-
cal Interactions and the effect of nan's activities on them. Discussion Is Included on
the effects of variation in DO and the presence of sulfates, free sulflde, heavy metals,
and other constituents on the nature of the bentfalc deposits. Benthlc samples from
Toledo, Oregon; Sally's Bend, Yaqulna Bay, Oregon, and Isthmus Slough, Coos Bay, Oregon
were analyzed and shown to be typical of three of the five types of estuarlne benthal
aystems. The types are characterized by variations in the amount of aerobic
decomposition, sulfate reduction, Interstitial free sulflde, and methane fermentation or
accumulation of organlcs. Although benthic systems may be classed as a particular type,
seasonal variations may effect significant changes. The effects of man's activities
such as organic and inorganic deposition, reduction of seasonal variations,
channelization, dredging, spoil disposal, and particle size changes, and the effect of
transient conditions on the benthic type and the biological community are also con
considered.
INDEX TERMS: Environmental effects, Estuaries, Benthos, Dredging, Channeling, Seasonal,
Sulfates, Sulfldes, Heavy metals. Oxidation-reduction potential, Organic matter,
Model studies, Characterization, Species diversity.
AfflC-6422 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Arsenic compounds, Path of pollutants, Thenndynamlc behavior, Oxidation,
Reduction (chemical). Aquatic organisms, Adsorption, Toxlclty, Fossil fuels,
Soil erosion, Fish, Bacteria, Yeasts, Fungi, Fate of pollutants, Bioaccumulation,
Blotransformntlon, Copreclpltatlon.
"NEW METHOD OF DETECTION FOR THE COMPONENT OF LOW CONCENTRATION IN WATER BY
DETECTOR TUBES", Kbbayshl, Y., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 11, November 1972,
pp 1291-1299.
Five glass tubes, 2-3 mm In diameter, have been used for detecting minor
components In water by packing them with detector reagents and exposing them to the
substance to be analyzed. When the proper reagent is used, a color change occurs and
the length of the stain is proportional to the concentration of the contaminant. Using
the procedure. It was possible to detect sulflde at ranges of 1-100 ppm and hexavalent
Cr at ranges of 5-800 ppm using silica gel supplemented with lead acetate; chloride Ion
at ranges of 50-2000 ppm using silica gel and silver chrcmate; sulfate Ion at ranges of
100-3000 ppm with tetrahydroxy quinone and its barium salt with silica gel; cyanide Ion
at ranges of 1-50 ppm with orthotolldlne hydrochlorlde and copper sulfate with silica
gel; free chlorine at ranges of 1-fcO ppm with orthotolldlne sulfate and silica gel; and
nickel Ion at ranges of 100-3000 ppm with dlmethylglyoxlne and silica gel. The method
is rapid and simple and may be used satisfactorily for drinking, process, or waste water
examination, and air, blod, or urine examination. Results of analyses for chloride In
matter from deposit guages and for chromate in plating water are Included. Interfering
ions are listed for each of the components detected.
INDEX TERMS: Water analysis, Urine, Sulfldes, Chlorides, Sulfates, Chlorine, Nickel,
Colorlmetry, Chromium, Drinking water. Air, Rain, River water. Calibrations, Color
reactions, Blood, Detector tube, Cyanides, Detection limits, Chemical Interference.
"UHDEHGHOUND POLLUTION ANALYSIS AND CONTROL", Preul, H. C., Water Research. Vol. 6,
No. 10, October 1972, pp llM-1151*.
Criteria are presented for the evaluation of levels of underground pollution
along with practical methods for the analysis of the rate of travel of underground
pollution. Pollutants which may be of concern In groundwater have been categorized
Into 'reacting* and 'non-reacting* types for purposes of analysis in underground
movement. Limits for the specific forms of these types have also been proposed. These
limits are In general accord with the established requirements for drinking water
such as those of the World Health Orjpnizatlon. For a simulation of the rate of travel
of a pollutant In ground water, basic pollutant transport equations have been given.
In the past, these equations have been largely of academic Interest. However, these
equations have now been solved using numerical and computer techniques. These
techniques may be applied to practical problems such as the prediction of movement of a
pollutant of a certain concentration within the Influence cone of a pumping water well.
In general, the methods may be used to analyze existing pollution so that rehabilitative
measures may be applied or they may be used to analyze projected conditions of
pollution travel where prevention Is of concern.
INDEX TERMS: Underground, Pollution abatement, Water pollution, Groundwater movement.
Pollutants, Flow rates. Mathematical studies, Dissolved solids, Chlorinated
hydrocarbon pesticides. Conforms, Heavy metals. Salts, Alkali metals, Path of
pollutants, Enteric viruses, Fecal streptococci.
-------
i. PHYSICAL Am) CHEMICAL METOPES
'IRE USE OF HLTBA-VIOIET ABSORBAHCE FOR MONITORING THE TOTAL ORGANIC CARBON CONTENT
OF WATER ADD WASTEWATER", Dobbs, R. A., Wise, R. H., Dean, R. B., Water Research.
Vol. 6, No. 10, October 1972, pp 1173-1180.
The correlation between ultra-violet absorbance at 251* nm and total Organic
carbon (TDC) content has been determined for a variety of treated and untreated water
samples. These samples ranged from municipal secondary sewage effluent to raw and
processed river water. The river water samples were collected at 2 sites on the Great
Miami River using a Mega sampler which was designed to recover organic contaminants
from polluted water as a carbon chloroform extract (CCE). The effect of turbidity on
the correlation between A sub 251* nm and IOC was eliminated by making all measurements
on filtered samples. In order to estimate the interference caused by turbidity for
municipal wastevater, two different secondary sewage effluents were filtered through
five different pore-size millpore membranes In parallel filters (water-soluble
components were leached from the membranes with distilled water prior to use).
Absorbance and TOO values were measured for each filtrate, and corresponding turbidity
values were determined. The absorbanee equivalent to one Jackson Turbidity Unit (JTU)
was calculated from the data obtained. An 'overall effect1 was calculated by comparing
the unflltered values with those obtained for the 0.1 micron filtrates. An additional
test was conducted in an effort to obtain a 'model1 for the effect of turbidity on the
absorbanee measurement. A colloidal silica, stock solution was prepared by diluting
1.0 ml of duPont 'Ludox' to 100 ml with distilled water. A second stock solution
contained 225 mg of bentonlte powder in one liter of distilled water. Serial
dilutions were prepared from stock solution for measurements of turbidity and
absorbanee. Plots of the data were linear, up to approximately 7.0 JTU, for both
AMIC-6U38
"ADSORPTION OF PARATHION IN A MULTICOMPONENT SOLUTION", Wang, W.-C.; Lee, C. F.,
Spyrldakis, D., Water Research. Vol. 6, No. 10, October 1972, PP 1219-1228.
Parathlon adsorption was studied with emphasis on the effect of the presence
of a secondary adsorbste (rhodamlne B). The adsorbent materials used included kaolinlte
and montmorillonlte clay minerals and treated and untreated lake sediments. The
adsorption experiments were conducted In a system free of organic solvent. A desired
amount of clay mineral or sediment was placed in the 50 ml flask, which already contains
a given amount of parathlon. Thirty mllllllters of distilled water were added to the
flask, and the mixture was equilibrated by shaking. Depending on the experiment, an
organic compound was added to the flask to make a final volume of 30 ml. The mixture
was shaken in a water bath shaker at 200 strokes/min at 20 C, unless otherwise specified,
It was then centrlfuged at 1500 g for 1 h. The supernatant was poured out and extracted
three times with 8 ml hexane, and the combined extract was made to a final volume of 25
ml in a volumetric flask prior to analysis with gas chromatogr»phy. With rhodamlne B,
the quantity of parathlon adsorption on different clay minerals Increased two- to
four-fold, while methylene blue and phenol had little or no effect. Rhodamlne B was
readily sorted by clay minerals, and the formed organoclay complex also enhanced the
parathlon adsorption capacity when the organic matter was partially extracted from the
sediment particles
INDEX TERMS: Phosphothloate pesticides, Adsorption, Aqueous solutions, Pollutant
Identification, Separation techniques. Pesticide removal, Methodology, Lake
sediments, Organic compounds, Kaolinlte, Montmorillonlte, Organic matter, Chemical
analysis. Water analysis, Parathion, Rhodamlne B, Adsorbents, Electron capture gas
chromatography, Sample preparation.
AMIC-6U3U (Continued)
Card 2/2
sets of synthetic solutions. The absorbanee units which correspond to one JTU are
0.060 and 0.130 for silica and bentonlte, respectively. High correlation coefficients
were obtained for water samples which contained sufficient organic carbon to permit
accurate TOC determinations. High concentrations of inorganic ultraviolet absorbers
or high concentrations of organlcs which do not absorb in the ultraviolet will
adversely affect the correlation between absorbanee and TOC. Monitoring the
concentration of organlcs in water by UV absorbanee has many advantages over
alternate methods. Equipment design can be either simple or sophisticated. The
low-pressure mercury lamp provides a low cost monochromatic light source. Absorbance
values can be displayed on a meter, or they can be recorded to provide a permanent
record. Sensitivity can be adjusted to monitor a wide range of organic concentrations
by varying the length of the sample cell. Application of UV monitors is simple and
does not require the services of a skilled operator. The units can be completely
self-contained with their own power supply so that remote locations, which would
otherwise be difficult to survey, can be monitored.
INDEX TERMS: Waste water (pollution), Monitoring, Sewage effluents, Organic wastes.
Waste analysis, Municipal wastes. Water sampling. Turbidity, Pollutant
Identification, Absorbance, Ultraviolet absorption, Total organic carbon, Mega
sampler. Correlation coefficients, Great Miami River, Turbidlmeter.
"TOTAL AND ORGANIC MERCURY IN MARINE FISH", Rivers, J. B., Pearson, J. E., Schult,
C. D., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 8, No. 5, November
1972, pp 257-266.
Tissue from nine species of marine fish caught In Hawaiian waters were analyzed
for total and organic mercury by a flameless AA technique. Samples of muscle tissue were
homogenized, digested with cone. HK03 and oxidized with potassium permanganate. Excess
oxidising agents were reduced with hydroxylamine, and mercury ions were reduced to
elemental mercury with stannous sulfate for analysis by AA. Organic mercury was
determined by transferring the homogenate with distilled water to a separatory funnel
containing cone. HC1 and NaCl, adding benzene, shaking, and centrlfuglng. The benzene
layer was then transferred to a separatory funnel, a 1 percent cystelne solution added,
and the mixture shaken. Two ml of the aqueous layer were transferred to an
Erlenmeyer flask containing cone. HC1 and potassium permanganate. After standing, 5
percent sodium persulfate was added and the solution allowed to stand. The sample was
then diluted with an H2SOU-HN03-distilled water solution, hydroxylamine solution added,
and the flask swirled. Stannous chloride was added to volatilize the mercury for AA
analysis. Recovery for total Hg ranged from 97-106 percent; for organic Hg, the range
was 86-10U percent. Tissue content ranged from leas than 0.05 ppm to 1.79 ppm for
organic Hg and from less than 0.05 ppm to lU.O ppm total Hg. The blue marlin had the
highest content (0.35-1&.0 ppm) of total Hg. However, the ratio of organic Hg to total
Hg was much lower for this species than for others. Since these fish were caught from
one area, it is assumed that the mercury occurred from a natural source. It is further
hypothesized that at a certain mercury concentration in the tissue, muscle, or liver,
the toxic organic mercury is blotransformed to a more easily excreted Inorganic form.
10
-------
1, PHYSICAL AHD CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6UUS (Continued)
Card 8/2
INDEX TERMS: Mercury, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Marine fish. Separation
techniques, Biotranofonaatlon, Sample preparation, Organomercury compounds,
Chemical recovery. Biological samples.
AMXC-6V*
"TOTAL MEHCUHf-MDHOMSTffifLMEICUKf CONTENT OF SEVERAL SPECIES OF FISH", Kemps, L. R.,
Carr, R., Miller, H., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology.
Vol. 8, Ho. 5, November 1972» PP 873-279.
Samples of frozen svordflsh steaks, canned tuna, frozen northern pike from
Sweden, white teas, and perch were analyzed to determine the percentage of total
mercury and methylmercury. Total mercury was determined by the method of Munns and
Hni-io.ni and methylmercury by the procedure of Westoo as described by Kamps and
McMakon. Samples of edible tissue were chopped In a rotary food chopper and
thoroughly mixed before analysis. The results shoved that total mercury content of the
edible portions of five species of fish ranged from O.Ob to 2.60 ppm. The portion of
methylaercuryvaa essentially all moncmethylmercury, ranged from 67 to 125
percent. Sixteen laboratories also analysed samples of white bass and perch for total
mercury by cold vapor atomic absorption, the official ACAC procedure with colorlmetrlc
determination, and neutron activation analysis. The average contents compared
favorably with duplicate results for methylmercury.
INDEX TERMS: Fish, Mercury, Perches, White bass, Biological samples, Methylmercury,
Tuna, Swordflsh, Northern pike.
AMIC-6W»3
'TACTORS INFLUENCING TRAHSLCCATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF MERCURY IN RIVER SEDIMENT",
Mataumura, F., Gotoh, Y., Boush, G. M., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and
Toxicology. Vol. 8, No. 5, November 1972, pp 2O7-272.
Samples of sediment and vater were collected from several locations In
Wisconsin and subjected to several treatments to attempt to determine the factors
affecting the mobilization of mercury. Samples were spiked with Hg-203 by adding
HgC12 to a sample of sediment and water, shaking, and storing at l» C for 30 days.
The effects of pH were studied by adding HC1 or Na2C03 to the samples. After
Incubation, the water and sediment were separated." Water was extracted vith toluene
and sediment with acetone. After evaporation of the acetone, the residue was
partitioned between toluene and water. All toluene extracts were combined and
designated as the organic mercury fraction. The remaining sediment was resuspended
in distilled water and directly radio-essayed. The toluene extracts were examined for
alkylmercury content by thin layer chrcmatography. Samples were also prepared using
the same procedure under anaerobic conditions. In one sample In which profuse
microorganism growth occurred, analyses shoved that the available mercury was
absorbed by the organisms, but only small amounts of radioactivity were convertible to
alkyl or aryl forms and almost no methylatlon occurred.
INDEX TERMS: Mercury, Sediments, Hydrogen Ion concentration, Microorganisms, Absorption,
Sample preparation, Mobilization, Thin layer chrcmatography, Blotransformatlon.
11
AMIC-6UI*?
TEAS CHROMATCGRAPRIC DETERMINATION OF PENTACHLOROFHENOL IN HUMAN BLOOD AND URINE",
Rivers, J. B., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 8, No. 5,
November 1972, pp 29^-296.
A modified procedure for determining pentachlorophenol (PCP) in blood and
urine Involves combining the sample with benzene and H2SCA, rotating for two hours,
eentrifuglng, and removing a portion of the benzene layer. Diazamethane solution Is
then added to the benzene extract, dry nitrogen bubbled through the solution to
remove excess dlazomethane, and Isooctane added. A sample of this solution la then
Injected Into a gas chromtograph for analysis by comparison with a known standard.
The method gave recoveries of 89 to 96 percent for blood and 90 to 99 percent for
urine. No Interfering responses were encountered. The procedure has been found to
significantly reduce the time and equipment required to perform these analyses.
INDEX TERMS: Gas chromatography, Chemical recovery, Sample preparation, Urine, Blood,
Biological samples.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AHP f!HTVTCAT. MBTHO1B
AMC-6U53
"AH IMPROVED'METHOD FOR DETERMINING ORSANICS BY ACTIVA1ED CARBON ADSORPTION AND
SOLVENT EXTRACTION - PART I", Buelow, R. W., Carswell, J. K., Symona, J. M., Journal
American Water Worka Aasociatlon. Vol. 65, No. 1, January 1973, pp 57-72
Details are given of research conducted to develop an Inexpensive means for
determining dissolved organlcs In water. The result of toe research was the
development of a small, reliable, slmple-to-operate sampler that passes about 60 1 of
water (2-day sampling period) through 70.0 g of granular, coal-abased activated carbon
at a sampling rate of 20 ml/mln. As a companion to the sampler, a small extraction
apparatus Is used to extract the dried activated carbon with about 1*50 cycles of
chloroform followed by about 1*50 cycles of 95 percent ethyl alcohol. Time requirements
are two days for sampling, one day for adsorbent drying, five days for solvent
extraction, and two to three days for extract drying; however, manhour requirements
are less than six. After desorptlon from the activated carbon, the organles can be
quantified by gravlnetry or analyzed by gas chronatography, infrared spectroscopy, or
mass spectroscopy. The equipment was designed primarily for sampling drinking water,
but field tests in raw river water and settled water containing carryover flox showed
satisfactory performance. Sampling of various waters showed that the technique can
determine extract concentrations within a tenfold range in organic content between
clean water and surface water polluted with wastes. The cost for materials to build
the samplers is about $1004200.
INDEX TERG: Sampling, Separation techniques, Water analysis. Research equipment,
Drinking water, Dissolved organles.
AffiC-6456 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Chemical analysis, Snow, Methodology, Pollutant identification, Neutron
activation analysis, Heavy metals. Sampling, Silver, Trace levels, Furnace atomic
absorption spectrophotometry, Detection limits, Reproduclblllty, Sensitivity,
Mlcrosampllng boat. Flame atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Sample preparation.
AMK-6^56
"DETERMINATION OF SUB-NAHOGRAM QUANTITIES OF SILVER IN SNOW BY FURNACE ATONIC
ABSORPTION SPECTROMBTRY", Woodrlff, R., Culver, B. R., Shrader. D., Super, A. B.,
Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, No. 2, February 1973, PP 230-23».
An analytical method for determining mlcrotrace concentrations of Ag in
snow is discussed. The method involves preconcentratlon of the Ag by solvent
extraction and its subsequent determination by furnace atomic absorption (FAA).
The extraetant Is a dithizone-CClU solution. Snow samples were collected by (l)
exposing plastic garbage cans containing new plastic liners to snowfall In several
locations In the Brldger Mountain Range where orographlc cloud-seeding experiments were
conducted, and (2) digging pits through the entire snow pack at the end of seasonal
seeding operations. The samples were kept frozen until Just prior to extraction. Snow
placed in a Uoo^nl beaker was melted on a hot plate and 0.1 N BN03 was added, decreasing
the pH to 3. The sample was poured Into a separately funnel, a 0.00001 M dlthlzone-CClU
solution added, and the funnel shaken for l»5 seconds. A quantity of the organic
phases was placed onto a graphite cup and evaporated under an infrared lamp. For
determination, the cup was screwed onto a 1/8-lnch graphite rod and Inserted Into the
furnace. Over 22$ samples were analyzed, and a comparison among mlcrosampllng boat
flame AA, NAA, and furnace A shows that the FAA method gives results comparable with
those obtained by neutron activation analysis. FAA's reproduclblllty is much better
than neutron activation analysis In the concentration ranges involved, and determinations
can be performed for a fraction of the cost. The results obtained by the boat neutron
activation analysis is plus or minus 15-UO percent reproducible, FAA's reproduelblllty
Is plus or minus 5 percent. The concentration ranges Involved are on the order of
0.5 pg/ml. The sensitivity for the FAA method Is 50 pg/ml.
12
AMC-6I*57
"ATOMIC ABSORPTION DETERMINATION OF NANOGRAM QUANTITIES OF TELLURIUM USING THE
SAMPLING BOAT TECHNIQUE", Beaty, R. D., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 2,
February 1973, PP 23U-238.
A method for the determination of ultra-trace quantities of tellurium has
been developed, utilizing the sampling boat technique of atomic absorption. Two
procedures were developed for the chemlcol separation of tellurium. In some types of
samples, the tellurium can be directly extracted from UM HC1 solution Into methyl
Isobutyl ketone. The relative standard deviation obtained for a typical sample treated
In this manner and analyzed by atomic absorption was 5.0 percent. In samples where
other constituents cause chemical Interference with the extraction, a preliminary
separation of tellurium by copreeipitatlon with selenium was employed. The relative
standard deviation using this procedure increased to 6.6 percent, but few Interferences
are observed. Linear response occurs for a range of 5-100 ng tellurium. (Reprinted
from Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U5, No. 2, February 1973, PP 23>*-238. Copyright 1972
by the American Chemical Society. Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERIG: Methodology, Chemical analysis. Aqueous solutions, Heavy metals,
Separation techniques. Pollutant Identification, Anlons, Tellurium, Trace levels.
Sampling boat method. Atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Chemical Interference,
Precision, Recovery, Sensitivity.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6U62
"DETERMINATIOM OF ARSENIC(III) AT THE PARTS-PER-BILLION LEVEL BY DIFFERENTIAL
PULSE POLARCCRAPHY", Myers, D. J., Osteryoung, J., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U5,
Ho. 2, February 1973, PP 267-271.
The determination of As(lll) by differential pulse polarography has been
investigated. A number of supporting electrolytes were studied, and 1M HC1 was found
to give the greatest sensitivity. The detection was about 0.3 mlcrogram per liter
(U nancmoles) and the response was linear up to 60 ng/1. The inorganic ions which
seriously Interfered with the analytical procedure were Pb(II), Sn(II) and (IV), and
Tl(l) and (ill). A procedure was developed to remove the Interferences, and it has
proved to be satisfactory for all but the lowest concentrations of As(lll). After the
arsenic polarogram is recorded, Ce(IV) is added to the solution. The As(III) is
oxidised to the polarographlcally Inactive As(V), and the excess Ce(IV) is reduced by
the mercury metal which has collected (from the DUE) at the bottom of the cell. A
second polarogram is then recorded, giving the base line. The residual current, caused
by capacitance and by the reduction of Pb, Sn, or Tl, Is substrated from the first
polarogram to give the arsenic signal. This procedure is satisfactory at arsenic
concentrations of 20 mlcrograma per liter and higher, but it significantly raises the
position of the base line at an arsenic concentration of 2 mlcrograms per liter. As(v)
could be determined by this method if it were reduced to Aa(lII) and determined
according to the proposed procedure.
INDEX TERMS: Chemical analysis, Aqueous solutions, Pollutant identification,
Methodology, Polarographlc analysis, Lead, Electrolytes, Cations, Differential
pulse polarography, Arsenic, Arsenlte, Chemical Interference, Ionic Interference,
Tin, Sensitivity, Detection limits, Sulfur acid, Thallium.
AMK-6U66 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Automatic control. Pollutant identification, Ions, Computers, Chemical
analysis, Organic compounds, Data collections, Stable Isotopes, Isotope studies,
GC-Mass spectrometry, On-line systems, Accelerating voltage alternation,
Precision.
AMIC-61466
"ON-LINE COMPUTER CONTROLLED MULTIPLE ION DETECTION IK COMBINED GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY -
MASS SPECTROMSTRY", Holland. J. R., Sweeley, C. C., Thrush, R. E., et al.,
Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U5, No. 2, February 1973, PP 308-31b.
A system is described for on-line data collection and automated ion focusing
of a single focusing magnetic deflection mass spectrometer equipped with gas
chrcmatographle inlet and accelerating voltage alternator. A special Interface
consisting of an Ion current amplifier, analog-to-dlgital converter, computer,
digital-to-analog converter, and dipolar power supply permits an offset voltage to be
added to or subtracted from the accelerating voltage under computer control. These
units, together with two status registers, provide a control loop for continuous fine
adjustment of the accelerating voltage in order to maintain optimal focusing on each of
several ions selected by coarse sequential switching of the accelerating voltage. Tests
of the system were performed In a static mode with perfluorofcerosene and in a dynamic
mode with several compounds introduced by the gas chromatographic inlet, including mix-
tures of fatty acid methyl esters, the tetra-0-acetyl methyl glycosides of glucose and
(6,6-2 sub 2)-glueose, and the 0-acetyl methyl esters of prostaglandln PDF sub 2 alpha
and (3,3,>»,l»-22-H sub U)PGF sub 2 alpha. The additional capabilities of continuous ion
focusing during the gas chromatographic run and precise selection of Integration
parameters in the computer-assisted data reduction process enabled stable isotoplc
abundance measurements to be made with a precision of less than 1 percent on samples as
email as 100 ng. (Reprinted from Analytical Chemistry. Vol. >*5, No. 2, February 1973,
pp 308-31U. Copyright 1972 by the American Chemical Society.
of the copyright owner.)
Reprinted by permission
AMIC-6U68
'DIRECT CAS CHROMATOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF AQUEOUS SOLUTIONS OF ALIPHATIC
N-NITROSAMDffiS", Hosier, A. R., Andre, C. E., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U5,
Ho. 2, February 1973, pp 372-373.
An analytical procedure has been developed which allows for the direct gas
chromatographic analysis of aqueous solutions containing small amounts of aliphatic
N-nltrosamlnes. Standard solutions of dimethyl, diethyl. dlpropyl, and dlbutyl
nltrosamlne and algal suspensions (Chlorella pyrenoldosa) spiked with those standard
solutions were used to evaluate direct GC as applied to an aqueous biological system.
Ascarite precolumns were used, and they served as a cleanup step, thus allowing for
relatively interference - free chromatograms except for water. The GC system employed
readily separates, DMH, DEH, DPN, and DBN when injected as an aqueous algal suspension
containing 0.2 mlcrogram/ml of each of the four compounds. The sensitivity of the
direct analysis of aqueous algal suspensions is much greater than the solvent extract
analysis by GC. Direct analysis of aqueous algal suspensions spiked with DMN allows the
quantitative determination of DMN down to 10 ng/ml. In order that DPN and DBN can be
quantitatively analyzed by this system, the carrier gas flow and column temperature
must be Increased over the usual operating conditions. With this modification, DPN
and DBN can be recovered with about the accuracy of 10 ng/ml. The combination of the
Chromosorb 103 column system, the Ascarite precolumn In the injection port, and the
FID results in a sensitive qualitative and quantitative method for the direct analysis
of aqueous biological systems for aliphatic N-nltrosamlnes. The system is about 100
times more sensitive than methods of N-nitrosamine analysis previously reported.
INDEX TERMS: Methodology, Aqueous solutions, Pollutant identification, Chemical analysl
Biological systems, Chlorella pyrenoldosa, N-nltrosamines, Aliphatic hydrocarbons
Flame lonlzatlon gas chromtography. Detection limits, Precision Quantitative
13
-------
1. PHVSICAL AMD CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6U70
"CHROMMOGRAPHIC AND SPECTRAL ANALYSIS OF TERPENE AND N-ALKYL ALCOHOL CARBAMATES",
Gueldner, R. C., Hutto, F. Y., Thompson, et al., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. Uj,
Bo. 2, February 1973, PP 376-378.
A description Is given for the preparation of the earbamates of several
terpene alcohols and other alcohols by the method of Hedln, Gueldner, and Thompson
(1970) and their spectral characterization and the conditions for the separation of the
carbonates by TLC and GLC. The carbonates were prepared by dissolving the alcohol In
CClb, adding a molar excess of triehloroacetyl isocyanate (TCAIC), allowing the mixture
to stand In an Ice bath for 5-10 min, and extracting It with KCH In aqueous MeOH. The
MeOH phase was removed and evaporated In vacuo to an aqueous residue which was extracted
with CClU until TLC showed the removal of all carbonate. The CClU phase was evaporated
to leave the crude carbonate residue, which was crystallzed from cydohexane or
cyclohexane-benzene mixtures. Samples were recrystalllzed to obtain a constant melting
point and submitted for elemental (C,N,H) analysis. The carbsnates of cltronellol and
linalool, which could not be crystallized, were collected for elemental and spectral
analysis from column A of the gas chromatograph. The method proved to be an easy way to
prepare carbamntes and gave essentially quantitative yields for recrystalllzatlon.
Except for the carbamates of cltronellol and linalool, all the compounds were white
crystalline solids that were stable for extended periods at room temperature. All the
elemental analyses checked to within 0.30 percent. The melting points, TLC values,
GLC values, and the IR spectra and PMR data for the CClU solutions of the carbamates
are tabulated.
INDEX TERMS: Separation techniques, Solvent extractions, Chemical analysis. Pollutant
identification, Carbamates, Terpene alcohols, Gas-liquid chromatography, Thin
layer chromatography, n-Alkyl alcohols. Sample preparation, Infrared spectra.
leal
AMIC-6W1
'ISOTOPE EXCITED X-RAY FLUORESCENCE", Khelp, T. J., Laurer, G. R., Analyt
Chemistry, Vol. W», No. lU, December 1972, PP 57A-58A, 60A-62A, 66A, oUA.
The continuing development of Isotope excited applications of X-ray
fluorescence analysis has been stimulated by (1) the ability to make a determination
without tine-consuming chemical manipulations In preparing a sample for analysis, and
(2) Instrument portability through the use of a radlolsotoplc source for excitation.
This discussion Is concerned with the Interaction of certain fundamental factors in
Isotope source X-ray fluorescence and their exploitation in describing three recently
developed systems (central source system, annular source, concentric source-sample
system) with capabilities exceeding those of currently available commercial equipment.
The major parameters to be considered In the development of Isotope source-X-ray
fluorescence systems are the following! Chemical and physical properties of the
sample; Isotopic source characteristics; Detector resolution and efficiency; and
Source-sample-detector geometry. Poaslbllties for application of the new geometrical
or concentric source-sample system to sub-ppm simultaneous multielement (K, Cl, Fe,
Cu, Zn, Ca, Mg, Na, Mi, Ru, and Dr) analysis of blood appear promising.
IHDEX TERMS: X-ray fluorescence. Chemical analysis, Instrumentation, Chemical
properties, Physical properties, Aqueous solutions, Laboratory equipment,
Research equipment. Isotope source, Detectors, Sample properties. Detection
limits. Resolution, Biological samples, Multielement*! analysis.
AKBC-6WM
"APPLICATIONS OF MASS SPECTROMETRY TO TRACE DETERMINATIONS OF ENVIRONM3NTAL TOXIC
MATERIALS", Abramson, F. P., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. kk, No. Ifc, December 1978,
PP 28A-33A. 35A.
Descriptions have been given of the applications of a variety of experimental
approaches based on a mass spectrometer to model problems of environmental
contamination. Mass spectrometry combined with gas chromatography and/or data
acquisition and processing and specific Ion detection can be used advantageously to
determine various adulterants of Interest, such as DBS, chlorinated pesticides, PCB's,
and organomercury In the low nanogram or even in the plcogram range. Of particular
Importance Is the flexibility In the type of analysis which the rather excellent
sensitivity and selectivity of a mass spectrometer afford. In addition, the use of
Isotopic carrier techniques to Improve quantitative accuracy where extraction
efficiency Is a problem or where adsorption or decomposition accompanies the
analytical methodology is readily accomplished with a mass spectrometer by use of
relatively inexpensive deuterium derivatives as carriers. Although the Initial
Investment In mass spectrometry is considerable, the number of different analyses which
can be performed often with less sample preparation and with higher Information content
than other methods provide an overall economy for laboratories which carry out such a
diverse analytical function.
INDEX TERMS: Mass spectrometry, Gas chromatography. Pollutant identification.
Methodology, Chemical analysis, Selectivity, Polychlorinated biphenyls, Data
processing, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides. Trace levels, Dlethylstllbestrol,
Detection limits, Sensitivity, Organomercury compounds, N-Nitrosodlmethylamlne,
Data acquisition. Specific ion detection.
_
AMTC-6U82
"SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC DETERMINATION OF COBALT WITH 2,U,6-TRIS(2l-PlfRIDYL)-S-STRIAZINE'1,
Janmohamed, M. J., Ayree, 0. H., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. W», No. ll», December
1972, PP 2263-2266.
Cobalt(ll) reacts rapidly with 2,l»,6-trls(2>-pyridyl)-s-trlaeine (TPTZ) In
water-alcohol solution at pH 8.5 to give a red-orange solution having absorption peaks
at W35 and kok nro. The color Is stable for at least an hour. The system conforms to
Beer's law. Optimum range for 1.00-cm optical path Is 1* to 20 ppm of cobalt,
determined with a relative standard deviation of about 1 percent. The molar
absorptivity at U85 nm Is 2800. Ions of several transition elements Interfere. Cobalt
is separated from Iron and nickel by an extraction procedure using tri-n-butyl
phosphate. A reaction ratio of 1 to 2 for cobalt to TPTZ has been deduced from
spectrophotcmetrlc data, and the perchlorate salt of the complex has been Isolated and
analyzed. The lonlzatlon constant of the reagent and the formation constant of the
cobalt-TFTZ complex have been evaluated. (Reprinted from Analytical Chemistry, Vol.
W», No. lU, December 1972, pp 2263-2268. Copyright 1972 by the American Chemical
Society. Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS: Color reactions, Cobalt, Spectrophotometry, Pollutant Identification,
Heavy metals. Methodology, Aqueous solutions, Separation techniques, Chemical
analysis, 2 « 6-trls(2'-pyrldyl)J-s-trlazlne, Absorbance, Ionic Interference,
Precision, Sensitivity, Detection limits.
-------
1. pfivsTCAl. Am CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6U83
"FLUOROMETRIC METHOD FOR DETERMINING NANOGRAM QUANTITIES OF NITRITE ION", Dombrowakl,
L. J., Pratt, E. J., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. W», Ho. lU, December 1972, PP 2268-
2272.
A sensitive fluorcmetrle method has been developed for measuring the nitrite
Ion. The procedure Involves dlazotlzatlon of p-chloroanlline (PCA) and coupling with
2,6-dlaminopyridlne (DAP). The resulting azo product then is further derlvatlzed with
ammonlacal cuprlc sulfate to produce a highly fluorescent triazole compound (exclt.
max. 360 nm; fl. max. (130 nm). The Intensity of the fluorescence Is linearly
dependent upon the nitrite concentration. The procedure penults detection of 2
nanograms nitrite ion per ml utilizing a 10-ml sample. The precision at this level is
7 percent. The trlaeole exhibits strong fluorescence in acid media and shows
fluorescence quenching by hydroxide ion suggesting radiationless deactlvatlon of the
excited triazole Inline anlon. The coupling reaction between DAP and PCA was examined
and found to be strongly pH dependent. Greatest reaction velocity was observed near
neutral pH. The determined second-order rate constant at pH 5 and temperature of 22 C
was 85 plus or minus 5 liter mole/sec. Optimum conditions are presented for obtaining
maximum nitrite detection sensitivity. (Reprinted from Analytical Chemistry, Vol. UU,
Ro. I1*, December 1972, pp 2266-2272. Copyright 1972 by the American Chemistry Society.
Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS: Nitrites, Ions, Fluoranetry, Methodology, Aqueous solutions. Chemical
analysis, Chemical reactions, Fluorescence, Hydrogen Ion concentration,
p-ehloroaniline, 2 6-dlamlnopyridlne, Precision, Sensitivity, Dlazotizatlon,
Detection limits, Triazole, Fluorescent spectra.
AMIC-6U85
"SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT IN REAL-TIME FOR HIGH-RESOLimON MASS SPECTRA", McLafferty,
F. W.. Michnovlcz, J. />., Venkataraghavan, R., et al.f Analytical Chemistry,
Vol. W», No. lU, December 1972, pp 2282-2267.
An on-line, real-time computerised method for effectively increasing the
sensitivity, resolution, and mass measuring precision of a high-resolution mass
spectrometer has been developed. This method for Signal Enhancement In Real Time
(SERT) utilizes the relatively large vacant areas between peaks to rescan peaks In
real-time under direct computer feedback control. The ensemble-averaged rescans have
an Increased signal/noise ratio when compared to the signal scans and significantly
Increase the effective sensitivity, resolution, and mass measuring precision of the
Instrument without increasing the scanning time. In contrast to most methods for
ensemble-averaging of spectral data. ( Reprinted from Analytical Chemistry, Vol. W»,
Ho. I1*, December 1972, pp 2882-2287. Copyright 1972 by the American Chemic
Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner. )
ical Society.
INDEX TERMS: Mass spectrometry. Automation, Computers, Methodology, Automatic control,
Electronic equipment, On-line systems, Signal enhancement, Mass spectra,
Resolution, Sensitivity, Precision.
AMIC-oW
"DESIGN AND OPERATION OF TEMPERATURE-CONTROLLED MULTIPLE ELEMENT ELECTRODELESS
DISCHARGE LAMPS FOR ATOMIC FLUORESCENCE SPECTROMETRY", Patel, B. M., Browner,
R. F., Winefordner, J. D., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. W», No. lU, December 1972,
pp 2272-2277.
The preparation of multiple-element electrodeless discharge lamps for Hg,
Cd, In, Ga, Tl, Zn, Cu, Fe, Kg, Ag, Ce, Sn, Pb, In, U, and Zr is described. The lamps
are excited using a temperature-controlled antenna system. The spectral radiant output
from each Individual element in a multiple-element lamp is very temperature sensitive,
but largely uninfluenced by the presence of the other elements (or compounds). Plots
of the variation of spectral radiant output with temperature allow the rational choice
of a compromise operating temperature for several elements in each lamp. Alternatively,
the optimum temperature for each element present may be selected In turn. A comparison
Is made between the output stability of the multiple-element lamps and the corresponding
single-element lamps. Atomic fluorescence detection limits are given, using both
multiple-element and single-element lamp sources. (Reprinted from Analytical Chemistry.
Vol. Vt, No. 1U, December 1972, pp 2272-2277. Copyright 1972 by the American Chemical"
Society. Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS: Laboratory equipment, Instrumentation, Design, Operations, Mercury,
Cadmium, Zinc, Copper, Iron, Magnesium, Germanium, Lead, Temperature, Heavy metals
Atomic fluorescence spectroscopy, Electrodeless discharge lamps, Multlelemental
analysis, Indium, Gallium, Thallium, Silver, Tin, Thorium, Uranium, Zirconium,
Detection limits, Fluorescent spectra, Chemical Interference.
15
AMIC-61(86
"SIMULTANEOUS MEASUREMENT OF PLASMA CONCENTRATIONS OF LUMCAIHE AND ITS
BESETHYIATED METABOLITE BY MASS FRAGMENTCGRAPKY", Strong, J. M., Atkinson, A. J.,
Jr., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U», No. lU, December 1972, pp 2287-2290.
Lldocalne and Its pharmacologically active metabolite,
monoethylglyclnexylldide (MEGX), have been measured in samples of blood plasma by toe
technique of quadrupole mass fragaentogrephy. The standard deviation of the method vas
3.1 percent for lldocalne and 7.b percent for MEGX over the range of concentrations
usually encountered in clinical practice. The technique of mass fraamentography was
extended to Include rigorous criteria for compound identification based on statistical
analysis of the ratio of two fragment Ions present In each of these compounds and in
the trlmecaine added to the plasma samples as an Internal standard. These ratios were
reproducible with a standard deviation of less than 10 percent. The quadrupole mass
spectrometer was found to be a suitable instrument for quantitative mass
fragmentography, and offered an Important advantage over presently available magnetic
instruments with respect to the range of m/e of the f racmient ions that could be
recorded. (Reprinted from Analytical Chemistry. Vol. W», No. lb, December 1972,
pp 22B7-2290. Copyright 1972 by the American Chemical Society. Reprinted by permission
of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS: Methodology, Chemical analysis. Measurement, Pollutant identification,
Biological fluids, Lldocalne, Monoethylglyclnexylldide, Quadrupole mass
frasgentography, Reproduclbllity, Metabolites, Body fluids, Precision, Drugs,
Mass spectra, Blood plasma.
-------
1. PHYSICAL Aim cmanTfiAr
AMC-6U88
'TOTAL-EFFLUENT GAS CHROMATOCRAPHY - MASS SPECTROMETTO", Henderson, «., Steel, C.,
Analytical Chemistry. Vol.
A GC-M5 system vhlch allows Introduction Of a total GC effluent of up to 20
ml/mln directly Into the Ion source of a mass spectrometer Is described. The effect of
flow rate on Ion source and analyzer pressures, overall sensitivity, and resolving power
of the system was evaluated as follows: Source and analyzer pressures were determined
as a function of the chroratographic helium flow rate directly Introduced to the Ion
source. The sensitivity of the GC-MS system was determined as a function of
chrcoatographlc flow rate In terns of the minimum detectable chromatographic peak volume
as detected by the TIC beam monitor, rather than as a function of the base peak In the
mass spectra. Hie sensitivity of the mass spectrometer alone was determined using
xylene and Its base peak at m/e 106 by conventional methods of determining signal/noise
ratio, peak width, and nass flow rates. Minimum detectablllty as a function of both
total ion current and evaluable spectra for cholesterol TMS ether was determined, viz.,
all peaks greater than 10 percent of base peak discernible. Analyses of a variety of
organic compounds as mixtures were carried out to Illustrate the advantages of the sys-
tem. It has been shown that 0.1 ng-1.0 pg per second sample flow rates are obtained for
cholesterol trimethylsilyl ether at helium flow rates of 1-7 ml/mln. Within that flow
rate range, only a 12 percent reduction In mass spectrometer resolving power was noted.
The system has been shown to be suitable for a wide range of molecules from low molecu-
lar weight gases to high molecular weight steroid and carbohydrate derivatives.
INDEX TERMS: Gas chromatography, Mass spectrometry, Carbohydrates, Steroids,
Sensitivity, Resolution.
AMIC-6U89 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Separation techniques, Methodology, Pollutant identification.
Petroleum reslduco. Gradient elutlon chronatography. Oil characterization,
Petroleum distillates, Aromatic hydrocarbons, Petroleum products. Crude oil.
AMIC-6U89
"SYSTEMATIC APPROACH TO THE STUDY OF AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS IN HEAVY DISTILLATES AND
RESIDUES BY EU/TION ADSORPTION CHROMATOGRAPHY", Jewell, D. M., Rubexto, R. G., Davis,
B. £., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U», No. Ik, December 1972, PP 2316-2321.
More significant approaches to isolating aromatic hydrocarbons from heavy
distillates (greater than UOO F) and residuals are being devised as a result of recently
established pretreatment methods which remove the major nonhydrocarbon impurities and
saturates. Exponential gradient elutlon absorption chromatography (GEC) coupled with
multiple on-line detectors (e.g., dual-channel ultraviolet) can then be used for a rapid
classification Into mono-, dl-, trl-, and polyaromatic subfractlons. The separation
procedure involves the use of 2 columns which are rapidly dry-packed with zero percent
H20J11203 and sealed. Traces of water are moved by in situ heating at 200 C under a
nitrogen purge and pure n-hexane is pumped throughout the system in order to equilibrate
each detector. The aromatic coneentrate-hexane mixture is injected onto the sample
column and the absorbance Is read by ultraviolet monitors using spectral grade solvents
(cyclohexane, chloroform, and methanol). Using the above method, (1) any overlap of
saturates In the aromatic concentrates can be determined; and (2) the presence of the
heteroatcm does not affect the monoaromatic-diaromatlc separation when high sulfur
aromatic concentrates are separated. The GEC has been found satisfactory for aromatic
concentrates from kerosene, cracked or virgin gas oils, FCC feedstocks, and residuals.
The only limitation Is volatility since chloroform and methanol must be removed from the
polyaromatlcs. The method Is rapid, flexible, and can be made analytical with
appropriate micro columns and detectors. The total sequence of steps described provides
an analytical and quantitative approach to the following major classes of compounds:
acids, bases, neutral nitrogen compounds, total saturates, total aronatlcs,
BOncaronatlcs, dl plus trlaromatlcs, and polyaromatics.
IT
AMK-6U90
"DETECTION AND VARIABLE TIME KINETIC DETERMINATION OF MICRO AND SUBMICROGRAM AMOUNTS
OF NITRILOTRIACETIC ACID", Mottola, H. A., Health, G. L., Analytical Chemistry.
Vol. UU, No. Ik, December 1972, pp 2322-232U.
The analytical use of the modifying effect of nitrllotrlacetlc acid (NTA) on
the oxidation of MUachlte Green cation by periodate ion, catalyzed by low concentra-
tions of manganese(II) ions has been extended to the detection and determination of NTA
A variable time kinetic method of analysis has been developed which allows detection ant
determination of ppm and fractions of ppm of NTA. This method uses photometric
monitoring and digital electronic collection of the time elapsed as the system evolves
between two preestablished chemical compositions. The effect of some metal ions, other
amlnopolycarboxyllc acids, some products of degradation of NTA, and some other species
expected to be present In detergent formulations, natural water, and industrial waters
was also evaluated. Imlnodlacetlc acid, glycollc acid, glyclne, dodecylbenzene sodium
sulfonate, sodium trlpolyphosphate, and calcium Ion did not Interfere at least In molar
concentrations 100 times that of NTA. Ortho- and m-cresol, and iron(III) Ion did not
Interfere if present at the same molar level of NTA. Aluminum ion and sodium lauryl
sulfate can be tolerated In molar concentrations 10 times that of NTA. Dissolved
chlorine proved to be the only serious Interference of all species considered. The
procedure compares well in detectablllty, sensitivity, and selectivity with those
previously published and Is easily amenable to monitoring and repetitive analysis.
INDEX TERMS: Nitrllotrlacetlc acid, Chemical analysis, Chemical reactions, Pollutant
identification, Organic acids, Industrial water. Metals, Oxidation, Detergents,
Detection limits, Natural waters, Chemical Interference, Sensitivity, Malachite
green.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6U91
'ANALYSIS OF MIXTURES OF AMUiOPOLYCARBOXYLIC ACIDS BY CHEMICAL KINETICS. PARIS PER
BILLION OF NITRILOTRIACETIC ACID IN WATER", Coombs, L. C., Vaalllades, J., Mirgenra,
D. W.f Analytical Chemistry. Vol. W», No. lU, December 1972, pp 2325-2331.
Amlnopolycarboxylic aclda are detected and determined, Individually or In
mixtures, by the reaction of cyanide Ion with their nickel(ll) complexes in basic
solution. The procedure is based on the large differences In the rate of formation of
tetracyanonlckelate Ion. Simultaneous kinetic determinations of two-component (NTA and
EDDA) and three-component (NTA, EDDA, and EGTA) mixtures are accomplished by on-line
regression analysis of stopped-flcv spectrophotooetrlc data. As little as 10 ppb of NTA
in natural water samples can be detected. Any possible Interference by metals can be
eliminated by precipitating then as hydroxide or by running the solution to be determined
through a cation-exchange column to remove the metals. However, the formation of mixed
cyano complexes can be a source of Interference. Trace amounts of NTA in EOTA and a
four-component (EGTA, HFDTA, HEEDTA, and EDTA) mixture also are determined off-line.
INDEX TERMS: Chemical reactions, Nltrllotrlacetlc acid. Water analysis. Chemical
analysis, Methodology, Spectrophotometry, Computers, Amlnopolycarboxylic acids.
Detection limits, Precision, Chemical Interference, Reaction kinetics.
AMIC-6U93
'DIRECT DETERMINATION OF SULFUR IN OILS BY ATOMIC ABSORPTION SfGCTROKSTRT USING AN
INERT GAS SHIELDED NITROUS OXIIE-ACETYLENE FLAME". Klrkbrlgflt, G. F., Marshall, M.
West, T. S., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. W*, No. Ik, December 1972, pp 2379-2332.
An experimental atomic absorption spectrometer has been used for the direct
determination of total sulfur in crude and fuel oils. A sulfur microwave-excited
electrodeless discharge lamp source and an Inert gas separated nitrous oxide-acetylene
flame were used in conjunction with a vacuum monochronator equipped with a
photcnultlpller and digital frequency meter to permit detection by photon counting.
Oil samples (0.2-l.Og) were dissolved in Isobutyl methyl ketone, diluted to volume in a
lOOnml flask, nebulized in the separated nitrous oxide-acetylene flame, and the
absorbance measured at 180.7 nin. Known quantities of sulfur were added to some of the
samples being analyzed. Calibration curves to be used In calculations were obtained by
analyzing standard solutions prepared by dissolving dlbenzyl dlsulflde In isobutyl
methyl ketone. The values obtained by AAS for the oil samples whose sulfur contents
were determined by reference to the calibration curve for dlbenzyl dlsulflde in MBK
show a small systematic negative error compared to the mean values obtained by X-ray
fluorescence. No significant systematic error was observed In the values for sulfur
content obtained for the oils treated by the standard additions technique. This
suggests that the assumption that a mismatch between sample and standard viscosity
characteristics is responsible for the error observed in the conventional calibration
technique is correct. The direct nebullzatlon of diluted oil samples Into the inert
gas separated nitrous oxide-acetylene flame permits the rapid direct determination of
their sulfur content by AAS at 180.7 nm with acceptable accuracy and precision. The
attainable sensitivity should be sufficient for the determination of sulfur In most
refined oils (except motor gasoline). Dlbenzyl dlsulflde Is suitable for use in the
AMIC-6U92
"POTENTIOM5TRIC TITRATION OF SULFATE USING AN ION-SELECTIVE IRON ELECTRODE", Jaslnski,
P., Tnchtenberg, I., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U», No. lU, December 1972, pp 2373-
2376.
A description Is given by an Indirect sulfate electrode which is based on the
ferric lon/suLfate complex Ion equilibria and Is free of many of the restrictions common
to other ion 'selective electrodes that have been used for the potentlometrlc tltratlon
of sulfate. The electrode used in this study was constructed by cementing slices of
Fe-1173 glass (Ge28Sbl2Se6o) to the end of an acrylic tube. After mechanical polishing,
the electrode was activated by rinsing with IN NaOH, wiping, rinsing with distilled water
and finally exposing it to 0.1 M ferric nitrate solution at pH 1.6 for 30 minutes. Since
the Fe-1173 glass does respond selectively to uncomplexed ferric ion in sulfate solutions
an evaluation was made of the electrode as a monitor for eulfate ion tltratlon.
Calculations indicate that the sulfate-Fe complexes are too weak to yield a well-defined
end point from titrating sulfate directly with iron. If, however, a tltrant Is so chosen
to remove sulfate from the complexes, thus releasing ferric ion, a satisfactory tltratlon
curve is generated. The following conclusions were drawn based on the above: (l) At
constant pH and total sulfate concentration, the primary effect of changing total soluble
Fe Is Hemstlan. (2) A second-order change in sensitivity also results from changing
iron content. (3) The optimum operational region for sulfate monitoring is pH 1.7-2.0
and 0.1 nM Fe. (b) The accessible sulfate concentration range is greater than about 200
ppm. (5) This electrode system will yield distinct tltratlon end points If the tltrant
is chosen so as to remove sulfate ion from solution, liberating uncomplexed iron.
INDEX TERMS: Sulfates, Hydrogen ion concentration, Equipment, Selectivity, Iron, Ion
selective electrodes, Potentlometrlc tltratlon, Iron electrode, Sensitivity, Glass
electrodes. Precision. Reproducibllity, Detection limits, Metal complexes.
17
AMIC-6U93 (Continued)
Card 2/2
preparation of standard solutions, and no errors due to the presence of different
sulfur compounds in the oils are observed when this standard compound is employed.
The standard additions technique provides freedom from the need to match the standard
and sample compositions accurately via use of a sulfur-free base oil. The authors
indicate that in spite of the efficiency of the monochromator, an AAS to permit
nitrogen or argon purge might more conveniently be used.
INDEX TERMS: Oil, Chemical analysis, Sulfur, Pollutant Identification, Research
equipment, Laboratory equipment. Atomic absorption spectrophotonetry, Fuel oil.
Crude oil, Absorbance, Precision, Sample preparation.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AHD CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6U95
"MULTICOMPONENT PATTERN RECOGNITION AMD DIFFERENTIAL METHOD", LysyJ, Ihor.NewtOn,
Peter R., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. W», Ho lU, December 1972, pp 2385-2387.
Based on the theory of multicomponent pattern recognition and differentiation,
a study was conducted to characterize pyrographically complex organic composition, such
as found In a petroleum product and algae as separate entitles, and to determine the
quantity of each In a nixed solution. Dried algae and outboard motor oil were used as
test material and a specific pattern, or numerical fingerprint, was obtained for each
pyrographically. The algal pattern consisted of three specific and seven common (with
oil pattern) peaks. The oil pattern consisted of two specific and seven common (with
algal pattern) peaks. Numerical values for each peak of each substance were different
and formed a specific identifiable pattern or fingerprint. Mixtures of oil and algal
suspensions in water were prepared in various proportions and analyzed pyrographically.
The composite pyrograms were then analyzed mathematically by a computer. The results of
the completed experiments Indicate that complex organic compositions can be defined In
terms of pyrographlc patterns, as separate entitles with Identities of their own, I.e.,
algae, motor oil. When a number of such complex organic compositions are present in an
admixture, they can be differentiated qualitatively and quantitatively by solving a
number of simultaneous equations in least squares mode. This technique also has a
potential for identifying sources of oil spills in aquatic environment. To achieve
differentiation between various sources of crude oils, far more complex pyrograms must
be developed. This can be accomplished by performing pyrolysis at lower temperatures
and increasing GC separation of produced derivative composition. The practical use of
this method for oil spill surveillance and source identification is further compounded
by the fact that the composition of spilled oil is unstable in aquatic environments.
"GkS CHROMhTCGRAPKIC ANALYSIS OF AQUEOUS PHOSPHATE Iff REACTION GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY",
Wlese, P. M., Hanson, H. H., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. UU, Ho. lU, December 1972,
PP 2393-2391*.
A reaction gas chromatographlc method is described for the analysis of
aqueous phosphate solutions. This method Involves injecting the phospate solution
Into a heated precolumn where the water is vaporized and swept away leaving the salt
deposited in the reaction precolumn. N,0.bls(trimethylsllyl)trifluoroacetamlde (BSTFA)
containing one percent trlmethylchorosllane (TMCS)ls then Injected into the heated
precolumn. In 2 minutes the gaseous sllylatlng reagent converts the nonvolatile
phosphate salt to the volatile compound(TMS)3POb. The excess reagent and (TMS)3POU
are then swept into an analytical column and separated. Total time for analysis is
less than 20 minutes per sample. Solubility considerations have been eliminated. The
ion exchange step was simplified by adding ammonium chloride to the sample before
injection. This method has proved useful for amounts of phosphate between 10 and 100
mlcrograms per Injection. Repetitive allquots of an ammonium phosphate solution gave
reproducible peak areas within an experimental error of plus or minus 2.7 percent.
When the sodium or potassium salt was used, greatly reduced peak areas were obtained.
Temperature programming Is necessary to separate (TM3)3POl* from the derivatives of
other contaminant anions such as sulfate, thlosulfate, oxalate, and pyrophosphate.
If these anions are not present, the chromatograms may be run 1sothermally.
INDEX TERMS: Phosphates, Aqueous solutions, Methodology, Chemical analysis, Pollutant
Identification, Anions, Reaction gas chromatography, Detection limits, Sensitivity,
Chemical Interference, Sllylation.
AMIC-6U95 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Oil, Chemical analysis, Water analysis, Separation, Pollutant
identification, Water pollution sources, Algae, Organic matter, Mixtures,
Pyrolysis, Pattern recognition, Gas-liquid chromatography, Motor oil,
Fingerprinting, Characterization.
AMIC-6503
'DUAL CHANNEL SYNCHRONOUS INTEGRATION MEASUREMENT SYSTEM FOR ATOMIC FLUORESCENCE
SPECTROMETRY", Cordos, E., Malmstadt, H. V., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. Wt, No. lU,
December 1972, pp 2277-2282.
A dual channel synchronous integration measurement system is described that is
easily assembled from standard circuit cards. It has been designed and optimized for
application In atomic fluorescence apectrometry, specifically where hollow cathode tubes
are used as excitation sources and are operated in an intermittent mode. The test
results are presented which show that the percent relative standard deviation for the
Instrument is less than 0.1 percent over a wide dynamic range, the linearity is better
than 0.1 percent, and the circuit can accurately subtract background that might exceed
the sample by an order of magnitude or more, and It also averages noise over a wide
frequency spectrum. The combination of the dual channel synchronous measurement system
with the intermittent operation of hollow-cathode tubes provides AF sensitivities that
are one to three orders of magnitude greater than by operation in the dc mode. Its
usefulness in AF spectrometry is verified by over 1 year of continuous use In an
automated Instrument.
INDEX TERMS: Spectrometers, Spectroscopy, Laboratory equipment, Automation, Measurement
Atomic fluorescence spectroscopy. Synchronous integration measurement system,
Sensitivity, Precision.
18
-------
1. PHYSICAL AMD CHEMICAL MbTHUDa
AMIC-650U
'^COMPUTER IDENTIFICATION OF MftSS SPECTRA USING HIGHLY COMPRESSED SffiCTRAL CODES",
Crotch, S. L., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1»5, No. 1, January 1973, PP 8-6.
In file search methods, storage Is often a significant problem, particularly
with mini-computers. Spectral abbreviation alleviates the proUem by coding only 2
peaks/lU ami. This concept may be further exploited by noting thit Lite mass position
of any peak in a lU-amu window nay be coded using only four bits. For nearly 7000
spectra in the Aldernwston collection, this code requires an average of U8
bits/spectrum. Tests indicate that this code Is highly specific, and with appropriate
matching algorithms will produce very effective identifications. Further Improvements
in identification accuracy are obtained when two bits of intensity Information are
added to the peak position. Using an IBM 360/W*, a 7000-spectra library can be
searched in less than 10 seconds. Since most computers now manufactured have word sizes
which are multiples of four bits, this technique should lend Itself well to most
machines.
INDEX TERMS: Pollutant identification, Computer programs, Data storage and retrieval,
Mass spectra. Minicomputers.
AMIC-6507
'X3AS CHHOMATOCRAFHIC STUDIES OF SORPTIVE INTERACTIONS OF NORMAL AND HALOGENATED
HYDROCARBONS WITH WATERJCDIFIED SOIL, SILICA, AND CHROMOSOHB V", Okamura, J. P.,
SavyeSavyer, D. T., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. ^5, Ho. 1, January 1973, PP BO-Sb.
To study the persistence and movement of pesticides in soils, gts
chromatography with vetted soil columns has been used to determine the retention
mechanisms of pesticides and halogenated methanes (used as soil fuinlgants). Die
principal modes of interaction with the vetted soils Include adsorption on the water
surface and absorption by the water layer. The equilibrium constants for adsorption and
absorption in model systems, water on Chrooosorb W and on porous silica beads, have been
evaluated and Interpreted in terms of molecular parameters. These models illustrate an
approach for ascertaining the state of water on soil and for the prediction of retention
volumes on this complex material. Data from the model systems allow calculation of both
the amount of water on the soil surface and the surface area of the aqueous layer.
INDEX TERMS: Soils, Model studies, Gas chromatography, Adsorption, Transport,
Persistence, Halogenated methanes.
AMIC-6505
"APPLICATION OF PATTERN SEPARATION TECHNIQUES TO MASS SFECTROHETRIC DATA.
DETERMINATION OF HYDROCARBON TYPES AND THE AVERAGE MOLECULAR STRUCTURE OF GASOLINE",
Tunnlcllff, D. D., Wadsworth, P. A., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, Ho. 1, January
1973, PP 12-20.
The mass spectra of a large group of pure compounds typical of those found in
gasoline have been used to derive a set of weight vectors which can be used to
determine the average properties of gasoline samples. The evaluation of the results
obtained on real samples is rather difficult since the true values for all the
calculated properties are not readily available. A comparison of the results obtained
for hydrocarbon types such as paraffins, naphthenes, and arooatlcs agree quite well
with the results obtained by conventional mass spectrometric analysis provided the
average carbon number does not exceed 8.0. This method has also been found useful
for the determination of the percent weight of carbon in hydrocarbon samples from the
values for numbers of carbon and hydrogen atoms obtained in the structural analyses.
The computed percentages of carbon for bl samples compared favorably with the results
as determined by combustion analysis. It must be emphasized that the present work
represents principally an investigation of a new approach to the analysis of very
complex mixtures. This same approach may be applied to the interpretation of many
other kinds of analytical data. Its principal advantage is In the analysis of very
complex mixtures where the number of components exceed the number of analytical
measurements. Another advantage of this method is the simplicity of Its application
to actual samples.
INDEX TERMS: Molecular structure. Mass spectra, Gasoline.
*
—
AMIC-6508
"EXTRACTION AND CONCENTRATION OF ORGANIC SOLUTES FROM WATER", Goldberg, M. C.,
DeLong, L., Sinclair, M., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 1»5, No. 1, January 1973,
PP 89-93.
An organic extraction and concentration apparatus la described that will
separate and concentrate organic materials from water. It employs any given organic
solvent as long as that solvent is immiscible in water, and it will concentrate a given
aqueous organic solute up to a factor of 100,000 with the stipulation that the solute
partitions between water and the organic solvent. The differential In vapor pressure
between solute and solvent does not seem to be a factor that regulates concentration
efficiency. The dipole moment difference between solute and solvent will indicate the
extraction efficiency and can be used as an Index to select the extraction solvent.
For broad spectrum extraction, several solvents can be used either In a series or
parallel extractor trains; and with adequate dipole moment differences between solvents,
the extractor train will selectively concentrate on the basis of solute-solvent dipole
moment match.
INDEX TERMS: Separation techniques. Laboratory equipment, Distillation, Dissolved
organics, Preconcentratlon, Liquid-liquid extraction.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL MEJHOEg
AMIC-6510
"NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE STUDIES OF THE SOLUTION CHEMISTRY OF METAL COMPLEXES",
Llblch, S., Rabenateln, D. L., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, No. 1, January 1973,
pp 118-12U.
Because of the importance of methylmercury In the environment, investigations
were undertaken to study its coordination chemistry In aqueous solutions. Specifically,
the aqueous solution chemistry of methylmercury and of the methylmercury complexes of
eight carboxyllc acids of pK sub A values ranging from 1.00 to U.95 was Investigated by
proton magnetic resonance spectroscopy. Equilibrium constants for the reaction of
CH3Hg(plus) with hydroxide ion to form CH3HgOH and with CH3HgOH to form (CH3Hg)20H(plus)
were determined from the pH dependence of the chemical shin of the methyl group of
methyLnercury. The formation constants of the methylmercury complexes of the carboxyllc
acids were determined from the pH dependence of the chemical shift of the methyl group
of methylmercury, from the pH dependence of the mercury-proton spin-spin coupling
constant of methylmercury, and from the pH dependence of the chemical shift of the
llgand protons in solutions containing equlmolar concentrations of methylmercury and
carboxyllc acid. The formation constants of the methylmercury complexes are found to
increase linearly as the acid lonizatlon constants decrease.
INDEX TERMS: Aqueous solutions, Proton magnetic resonance, Methylmercury, Carboxyllc
acid. Equilibrium constants, Formation constants, lonizatlon constants.
AMC.6512
"ON THE SPECTHOPHOTOKSTRIC DETERMINATION OF DISSOLVED SILICA IN NATURAL WATERS",
Fanning, K. A., Pllson, M. E. Q., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, No. 1, January 1973,
pp 136-lUO.
The precision and accuracy of methods for the determination of dissolved
silica in natural waters can be greatly Improved by taking account of the time courses
of some of the reactions involved. The kinetics of these reactions are dependent on
the concentrations of electrolytes present in the samples. Based on results from a
metol-aulflte reduction method, the molar absorptivity of a reduced mixture of the
alpha- and beta-lsomers of molybdoslllclc acid in sea water Is apparently affected only
by the ionic strength but not by the nature of the component salts of the solution.
(Reprinted from Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 1, January 1973, PP 136-lUo.
Copyright 1972 by the American Chftmlcnl Society-.- Reprinted by permission of the
copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS: Spectrophotometry, Sea water, Silica, Absorption, Salinity, Precision.
AHIC-O511
"SIMULTANEOUS SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC DETERMINATION OF BARIUM AND STRONTIUM USING
SULFOHAZO III", Kemp, P. J., Williams, M. B., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, No. 1,
January 1973, PP 12U-129.
Sulfonazo III (2,7-bi8(81-sulfonophenylazo)-l>6-dlhydroxy-3,6-naphthalene-- .
dlauLfonlc acid), a promising reagent for barium and strontium determination,
was studied for direct simultaneous determinations In the presence of diverse
metal Ions Basked by chelons EGTA and CDTA. An absorbance study revealed that
there is no pH sensitivity of the complexes of the pH range 2.6 to 7.7. The addition
of the chelons EGTA and CDTA at pH 6 eliminates the Interference of most cations
except copper which has a light blue chelon complex. The use of EGTA at pH 6.1 and
CDTA at pH 6.8 permits the determination of barium and strontium. Simultaneous
equations derived from Beer's law facilitate the analysis. The working range of the
method is from l.k to U.l ppm for barium and from 1.6 to 7.0 ppm for strontium. An
aqueous solution of sulfonazo III shows less than 1 percent decomposition in seven
days, with periodic calibration, the analytical reagent can be considered stable for
several months. Under these conditions, the determination is accurate to within 2
percent of the actual concentrations. The properties of the free reagent were also
Investigated.
INDEX TERMS: Strontium, Aqueous solutions, Colorlmetry, Absorption, Barium, Sulfonazo
III, Chemical interference.
AfflC-6513
"PHENOL BLUE AS A SOLVENT POLARITY INDICATOR FOR BINARY APROTIC SOLVENTS",
tolling, 0. W., Goodnight, J. L., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U5, No. 1, January 1973,
pp 160-161*.
Solvent-induced shifts in the positions of electronic absorption bands for
reference indicators have become the basis for empirical scales measuring solvent
polarity in one-component media. Recent investigations on Phenol Blue as a model
solvatochrcnic dye have caused the generality 'of this approach to solvent polarity
ranking to be doubted when applied to solvent mixtures containing hydrogen bonding
donors and acceptors. Since binary solvents have widespread use in analytical methods
requiring nonaqueoua solvents, the present study was undertaken to examine
solvatochromism in purely aprotlc solvent pairs. The solvents investigated were
acetone, acetonltrlle, benzene, carbon tetrachloride, chlorobenzene, chloroform,
cyclohexane dicloromethane, dimethyl sulfoxlde, p-dloxane, ethyl acetate,
nitromethane, isoctane, methanol, petroleum ether, n-propanol, and mixtures of benzene
with n-butanol, benzene with Isopropanol, benzene with chloroform, propanol, and
acetone, methyl ethyl ketone with acetic acid and Isopropanol and toluene with acetic
acid. From a qualitative point of view, it is possible to distinguish two classes of
aprotlc binary solvents: those exhibiting a regular change in polarity with changing
solvent composition; and those giving evidence of specific interactions. One- and
two-parameter equations relating macroscopic properties of the solvent to the
transition energy of Phenol Blue were tested with the two-component solvents. The McRae
equation adequately predicts the general trend in transition energy over vide ethyl
acetate mole fraction Intervals in regular solvent systems.
INDEX TERMS: Absorption, Polarity, Organic solvents, Dielectric constant. Refractive
index, Thin layer chromatography, Phenol blue.
20
-------
1. PHYSICAL ADD CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6515
"USER EXC1TKD ATOMIC AND IONIC FLUORESCENCE OF 1HE RARE EARTHS IN THE NITROUS
OXIDE-ACETYLENE FLAME", Omenetto, N.f Hatch, N. N., Fraser, N. N., Wlnefordner,
J. D., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. l»5, No. 1, January 1973, PP 195-197.
Detection Units are reported for rare earths In aqueous solutions analyzed
by laser excited atomic and Ionic fluorescence. Stock solutions of Ce, Dy, Er, Eu,
Gd, Ho, Lu, Nd, Pr, Sm, Tb, Tm, and Yb were prepared from reagent grade chemicals.
The laser beam vas focused on the nitrous oxide-acetylene flame supported by a
capillary burner and located 8 cm from the entrance silt of a single-pass monochrcnator
equipped with 1180 lines/mm grating and a photomiltlplier. A boxcar Integrator was
the sampling detector. The atonic and Ionic fluorescence transitions are listed, and
detection limits are compared with those obtained by atomic absorption and flame
emission In the nitrous oxide-acetylene flame. It appears that atomic emission
spectrometry with the nitrous oxide-acetylene flame is preferable to atomic absorption
or atonic fluorescence. However, In some cases atomic fluorescence will be adequate
and simpler than other methods.
INDEX 1EFJE: Aqueous solutions, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry. Rare earth
elements. Detection limits. Atomic emission flame spectrometry, Atomic
fluorescence flame spectrometry, Ionic fluorescence flame spectrometry. Lasers.
AMIC-O521
"NATURAL PHOSPHATE SOURCES IN RELATION TO PHOSPHATE BUDGETS: A CONTRIBUTION TO OMB
UNDERSTANDING OF EUTHOPHICATION", Golterman, H. L., Water Research, Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2,
January/February 1973, PP 3-17.
The author suggests that studying the problems of eutrophlcation reuniting
primarily from the presence of phosphates must Include consideration of the natural
resources. Natural levels of phosphates occur as a result of the presence of
phosphorus In rocks which Is mobilized by weathering, including leaching and erosion.
Phosphorus may be transported by adsorption on clay as shown by studies of
unpolluted lakes in Africa. Although these Lakes contain high levels of phosphates,
algal growths are not a problem either because the phosphorus Is not In a form
available to the algae or because some other factor Is limiting. Phosphates may also
originate from peat areas; however, these also may not be available to algae.
Phosphates adsorbed on sediment particles may be available for algal utilisation
through enzyme or bacterial action. This phosphate, however, may be readsorbed and
consequently be available for only a brief period of time. Recycling of phosphate
by biochemical action must also be considered as a means of its being made
available for algal utllizalon. It is concluded that the process of eutrophlcation
is only understandable after measuring not only the P-input, but also the primary
production, including its mineralization, and estimating the natural P-losses during
the recycling.
INDEX TERMS: Eutrophicatlon, Phosphates, Water pollution sources, Lakes, Cycling
nutrients, Path of pollutants. Weathering, Leaching, Erosion, Adsorption,
Sediments, Silt, Peat, Clays, Mobilization.
AMIC-6520
."AUTOMATIC GAP CONTROL UNIT FOR SPARK SOURCE MASS SPECTROMETFOf", Magee, C. W.,
Harrison, W. W., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U?, No. 1, January 1973, PP 220-22U.
An Automatic Gap Unit (AGU) has been designed to automatically control
electrode gap width on spark source mass spectrometers for the purpose of providing
more accurate analyses. The unit monitors the RF voltage developed between the
electrodes, which is proportional to gap width, and adjusts one of the electrodes in
order to maintain the preset voltage between the electrodes. The unit has proved to
be extremely useful for a broad range of sample types. A schematic of the unit is
included.
INDEX TERMS: Automatic control. Electrodes, Electronic equipment, Spark source mass
spectrometry.
AMIC-6522
"SIGNIFICANCE OF MAN-MATE SOURCES OF PHOSPHORUS: FERTILIZERS AND FARMING",
Cooke, G. W., Williams, P. J. B., Water Research, Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2, January/February
1973, pp 19-33-
There are three ways which phosphorus from agricultural areas can enter
natural water supplies: in drainage water; In eroded soil; or from animal excreta.
Study of these sources showed that in most cases runoff from agricultural lands
contained less P than the receiving waters. However, where erosion occurs, P levels
In water nay be Increased since fertilizers tend to fix themselves to topsoil which is
lost first, the P in muds Is solublllzed in anaerobic reducing conditions and becomes
available to rooted plants and microorganisms. Most animal excreta Is reapplied to
land as fertilizer and may occasionally pollute streams If It is improperly applied or
if heavy rains occur. In addition, new methods of handling excreta as slurries
Increase the potential of pollution by over application or leakage of storage tanks.
One source of phosphorus in natural waters which Is often not considered is wild birds.
These may add significantly to P levels In water. At present, it appears that
agricultural sources add little P to natural waters. However, steps must be taken to
assure that the three potential sources are adequately controlled.
INDEX TERMS: Phosphates, Water pollution sources, Agricultural runoff. Fertilizers,
Livestock, Erosion, Leaching, Animal wastes (wildlife). Path of pollutants.
21
-------
1. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHOE8
AMIC-6523
"THE SIGNIFICANCE OP MAN-MADE SOUHCKf OF PHU&J1IORUS: DEIEKJENTS AND SEWAGE",
Devey, D. G., Harkness, H., Water Research. Vol. 7, Nos. 1/S, January/Febnnry 1973,
pp 35-5«».
Ttae alma of this paper are to establish the significance of detergents and
sewage as sources of phosphorus to the aquatic environment. Information has been
obtained as to the composition of washing powders and liquids containing phosphates
and the reasons for the use of phosphates. Current and past consumption data show that
the trends for detergent use are still very much upward, with a consequent Increasing
load of phosphates Into the aquatic environment based on present formulation. Indeed
In the United Kingdom It nay be that the consumption of detergents will not level off
for 10 yr or more If American trends are followed. The section of the paper on
sewage gives details of the varying levels of phosphates that are found at differing
works and the various sources from which these arose. Variations over the day of
phosphorus and detergent In sewage show the expected usage pattern for households.
Some data have been obtained on the phosphorus content of Industrial effluents, but at
present these do not appear to be a major source overall, although particular processes,
e.g. anodizing, may waste appreciable concentrations of phosphates. Discussion of the
total phosphorus contribution to the aquatic environment per annum shows the
tremendous amount of nutrient phosphorus which Is discharged to the river system from
sewage, even when detergent phosphate Is not taken Into consideration. It appears at
present that there Is little or no pr-blem due to phosphates In the aquatic
environment In the United Kingdom but this Is not to say It will not arise.
INDEX TERMS: Phosphates, Detergents, Sewage, Industrial wastes, Domestic wastes, Water
pollution sources.
AMIC-6529
'SIGNIFICANCE OF PHOSPHORUS IV LAKES AND COASTAL WATEH SEDIMENTS AND BENraOS", Stunm,
W., Water Research. Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2, January/February 1973, p 129.
The dynamics of availability of sediment phosphorus to the overlying water
depends on P concentration of Interstitial water which in turn depends on the redox
Intensity and the affinity of the solid sediment phases for P, In lakes and coastal
waters substantial fractions of P become irretrievably deposited into the sediments, but
in lakes the seasonal sequence of P release to the water from the sediments tends to
facilitate algal blooms in shallow waters. With Increasing depth of the lake the net
removal of P from the water by the sediments becomes preponderant and the quantity of P
released from the sediments to the eplllnmlon becomes small relative to other fluxes.
There are essentially the following ways for P to be deposited: (1) adsorption of P
on clays; (2) burying of detrltal P; (3) chemical precipitation of apatite; and
(U) dlagenetlc replacement of calclte (e.g. skeletal carbonate) by substitution of
carbonate by phosphate. Accumulation of P, regenerated from detritus as it occurs most
extensively in shallow waters and under conditions of counter-current systems (estuaries}
does not In Itself lead to an Increase in the relative apatite saturation because the
regeneration of one P atom Is accompanied by an Increase In acidity caused by the
formation of ca. 106 COS molecules. In order to exceed the critical ion product, the
excess of COS must be lost or neutralized. Such conditions are encountered in areas of
upwelllng, where excess COS is lost to the atmosphere and under reducing conditions
where denltriflcatlon and SOU(2-)-reduction consume hydrogen ions.
INDEX TERMS: Phosphorus, Sediments, Lakes, Turnovers, Adsorption, Estuaries, Removal.
"PHOSPHATES IN SEWAGE AND SEWAGE TREATMENT", Levin, V. H., Water Research. Vol. 7,
Nos. 1/2, January/February 1973, PP 55-67.
The concentration of reactive phosphate present in sewage fluctuates
markedly from hour to hour; much of It is associated with partlculate matter. The
soluble reactive phosphate can be separated Into Individual moieties by an automated
anlon exchange elutlon technique Involving the use of a 1.3-cm l.d. column containing
de-acldlte FF anlon exchange resin, chloride form SRA 71 ICO/200 mesh. The phosphate
content Is deaorbed from the column by gradient elutlon with KC1. The phosphates are
eolorimetrlcally determined as orthcphosphate by reacting with ammonium molybdate in
sulfurlc acid and hydrazine solution. The natural hydrolysis of higher forms of
phosphate to the ortho state can be arrested In samples by the addition of formalin.
Molybdenuu-hydrazlne colorimetrlc determination appears superior to the
molybdenum-vanadate method particularly on the chromatographlcally separated samples
but may need confirmation of reliability for untreated samples for Interference from
silicates or other substances. Alternatively an automated method for the total
phosphorus content capable of handling homogenized samples of sewage Is essential.
The phosphate load and fate during sewage treatment will require monitoring over a
protracted period because of hourly and seasonal fluctuations which may be substantial.
The greater proportion is, however, removed during treatment In association with
partlculate matter, albeit a fairly constant concentration In the order of 5-8 mg/1 Is
discharged with the effluent.
INDEX TERMS: Colorlmetry, Separation techniques, Phosphates, Sewage, Anlon exchange,
Chemical Interference, Fate of pollutants, Orthophosphates, Pyrophosphates,
Polyphosphates.
_-
AMIC-6530
'THE ACCELERATION OF THE HYDHOGEOCHEMICAL CYCLING OF PHOSPHORUS", Stunm, W., Water
Research. Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2, January/February 1973, PP 131-lM*.
By mining phosphorus In progressively increasing quantities, man disturbs the
ecological balance and creates undesirable conditions In inland waters, estuaries and
coastal marine waters. The clvlllzatozy Increase in phosphorus supply to the oceans,
although of little consequence to the oxygen reserves of the deep sea, augments
markedly the marine environments with Intermittent or permanent oxygen deficient
conditions. Because most aquatic food resources are produced in estuaries and coastal
areas, the deterioration in water quality of these regions decreases the potential
harvest of marine animal protein. Our present agricultural practice of excessively
fertilizing land needs to be reexamlned; our present agricultural technology must not
without modification be exported to tropical areas. Our present drainage systems for
sewage, industrial wastes and storm water runoff accelerate the transport of nutrients
and other pollutants to the rivers and the sea; waste treatment plants are remarkably
inefficient In mitigating this elvlllzatory flux.
INDEX TERMS: Water pollution sources, Phosphorus, Cycling nutrients, Fertilizers,
Oxygen demand, Limiting factors. Sediments, Fate of pollutants.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AHD CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-653U
"SOIL AND FERTI117.ER PHOSPHORUS IN TOE IRISH ECOSYSTEM", Hanley, P. K., Murphy, M. D.,
Water Research. Vol. 7, Roe. 1/2, January/February 1973, pp 197-210.
An attempt, was trade to define the sources of phosphorus In water eutrcphication
in Ireland, from an agricultural viewpoint. The place of soils, fertilizers, •»*••»'»
wastes, precipitation, crops, run-off and erosion in the overall phosphorus budget was
outlined, using local data and extrapolation from findings elsewhere. It would appear
that fertilizers at present play a minor part in eutrophlcation. Hie role of
sediments is largely unknown because little data are available. Animal wastes, if not
handled correctly, could pose problems, particularly If future plans for increasing
livestock numbers ore carried through. The solutions to water eutrophlcation Involve
other Interests, apart from agriculture, the island aspect of the ecosystem should be
helpful in defining and solving the problems of eutrophicatlon.
INDEX TERMS: Phosphorus, Fertilizers, Eutrophlcation, Water pollution sources,
Agricultural runoff. Farm wastes, Feedlot wastes. Erosion, Rain, Ireland.
AMIC.6536~(Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Phosphorus, Eutrophicatlon, Detergents, California, Water pollution
sources. Nitrogen, Limiting factors, Industrial wastes. Municipal wastes,
Agricultural runoff. Urban runoff. Fertilizers, Lake Tahoe, Clear Lake, San
Francisco Bay.
AMC-6536
"ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT OF DETERGENT BUILDERS IN CALIFORNIA WATERS", Jenkins, D.,
Kaufman, V. J., McGauhey, P. H., et al, Water Research. Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2, January/
February 1973, PP 265-281.
Most nationwide estimates In the United States place the point source
phosphorus contributions to surface waters between 70-90 percent (in California this
is between about 60-90 percent) and the point source nitrogen input to something less
than 50 percent of the total nitrogen load (in California this is about Uo percent).
Detergents appear to represent somewhere on the order of 20-1*0 percent of the total
phosphorus released to waters. On an overall basis, if control of both nitrogen and
phosphorus were to be necessary It would be feasible to control phosphorus because seme
60-90 percent of It arises from point sources, but It would be virtually impossible to
control nitrogen as well or as completely because of the high percentage contributed
from diffuse sources, and because nitrogen can be fixed from the atmosphere by many
algae and bacteria. Control of phosphorus input to surface waters by eliminating
phosphates from detergents Is not of consequence because this phosphate contribution Is
only some 35 percent of the total phosphate input. Mast of the total phosphorus
reaching the surface waters of California la contributed by two regions - the South
Coastal contributing about 50 percent and the San Francisco Bay Region producing seme
15 percent of the total. Of the total phosphorus reaching the waters of the State of
California it is estimated that through municipal discharges alone, some Uo percent Is
directly to the ocean and an additional 17 percent reaches the ocean through municipal
discharge to bays and estuaries. Approximately 20 percent of the nitrogen is discharged
In municipal wastes directly to the ocean. Discharge from municipal wastes to bays and
estuaries accounts for about 10 percent of the total discharge of nitrogen.
_
AMIC.6537
"AN IMPROVED METHOD OF PHOSPHORUS ANALYSIS IN SEA WATER", Hosokawa, I., Ohshima, F.,
Water Research, Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2, January /February 1973, PP 283-289.
The method of Lucena-Conde and Prat (1957) which employs a reagent of Mo(VI)
and Mo(V) for analysis of phosphorus in seawater has been Improved by the use of zinc
Instead of mercury as the reductant of the Mo(VI). The reagent Is prepared by adding
10 ml of cone. HC1 to 10 ml of 2 M Mo(Vl) solution and about 0.3 g of pure metallic
zinc. After the zinc has dissolved, 28 ml of cone. HC1, Uo ml of cone. HSSOb and
enough water to make 100 ml of solution are added. The reaction is carried out by
boiling for 20 minutes. Toe presence of phosphorus produces a heteropoly blue color
with an absorption iBMrtmn» at 830 ran wavelength. No interference occurs if
concentrations of inferlng ions are less than 100 ppm for S1-S03, 0.01 ppm for
As-AsOlt, 10 ppm for WJJOU, and 100 ppm for Ge-Ce03. Nitrate Ion reduces sensitivity
and must be reduced to nitrite ion if more than 1 ppm Is present. Salt error was
about -5 percent with ehlorlnlty of 190 percent.
INDEX TERMS: Chemical analysis, Sea water. Phosphorus, Water analysis, Chemical
interference. Sample preparation, Reagents.
-------
1. PHYSICAL ADD CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6538
"PROBLEMS IN niF ANALYSTS OF PHOSPHORUS COMPOUNDS", Burton, J. D.( Water Research.
Vol. 7, Nor. l/f>, January/February 1973, PP 291-307.
Water Is most usually analyzed for phosphorus by converting tbe phosphorus
to orUiophosphates and using an absorptlometrlc method in vhlch 12-molybdophoBphorlc
acid is formed and reduced to phosphcmolybdenum blue. Review of results from
inter-laboratory analyses have shown that ascorbic acid In the presence of antimony!
Ions is an attractive reductant for this purpose. In conditions where other Ions do
not Interfere, It 10 possible to measure accurately the free orthophosphate,
organically combined phosphorus, and total condensed phsophates by a photo-oxidation
procedure using ultraviolet radiation in which hydrolysis can be minimized. For
measurement of total dissolved phosphorus, oxldatlve digestion with potassium
persulfate or photo-oxidation followed by hydrolysis has proved suitable for a wide
range of samples. Improvement In analysis must also be accompanied by Improvements in
filtration and sample preservation. Freezing has been found to be effective for
preservation. However, in samples of high biological activity additional preservatives
may be needed. Alternative methods for analysis of phosphorus In water are unlikely to
compete with the phosphomolybdenum blue procedure for sane tine.
INDEX TERMS: Phosphorus, Chemical analysis. Water analysis, Arsenic, Filtration,
Freezing, Sampling, Chemical interference, Sample preservation, Reductants,
Orthophosphates, Absorptiometric methods, Detection limits.
AMIC-6541
THE PRECISE DETERMINATION OF LEAD IN WHOLE BLOD BY SOLVENT EXTRACTION - ATOMIC
ABSORPTION SPECTROKETKY", Mitchell, D. G., Ryan, F. J., Aldous, X. M., Atomic
Absorption Newsletter, Vol. 11, No. 6, Novsmtcr-Dccemter 1972, pp 120-121.
A solvent extraction - atomic absorption procedure Is described for the
determination of lead in whole blood. The sample Is pipetted Into a lead-free glass
tube, the Triton X-APDC reagent added, and the solution mechanically mixed for 30 sec.
A 10-mln period Is allowed to Insure complete hemolysls after which methyl Isobutyl
ketone (MIBK) is added. The mixture Is vigorously shaken for one minute and
centrifuged at ca. 2000 rpm for 10 rain. The organic phase is removed, and Its lead
content determined by atomic absorption spectrometry against blank readings of MIBK
saturated with delonized water. The standards and samples are analyzed in duplicate
and triplicate, respectively. The digital unit Integrates the absorbance signal over
U see and then prints out Integrated absorbance values. Results are obtained by
manually keying absorbance data Into the Wang calculator, which computes the net
signal by averaging the background readings before and after sample aspiration and
subtracting this value from the sample signal. Net signals are plotted against lead
concentrations, and from the equation of the line of least squares, the concentrations
corresponding to the net sample signals are calculated and printed out. The procedure
routinely gives relative standard deviations of ca 5 percent at the 1*5 mlcrograms/100 ml
level, corresponding to confidence limits of plus or minus 3 mlcrograms/100 ml for
triplicate analyses. The effects of sample age, EDTA In blood, and added phosphate on
analytical results are also reported.
INDEX TERMS: Solvent extractions, Lead, Heavy metals, Pollutant Identification,
Chemical analysis. Blood, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Biological samples,
Precision. Sample preparation.
AMIC-651*0
"THE APPLICATION OF THE LEIPERT AMPLIFICATION TO INCREASE SENSITIVITY IN THE DIRECT
DETERMINATION OF IODINE BY ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROMETRY", Klrkbrlght, G. F.,
West, T. S., Wilson, P. J., Atomic Absorption Newsletter. Vol. 11, No. 6, November-
December 1972, pp 113-llU.
The sensitivity attainable in the direct determination of Iodine by atomic
absorption at 183.0 ran In a nitrogen-separated nitrous oxide-acetylene flame may be
Increased by as much as 38-fold by application of the Lelpert amplification procedure.
In the method developed, Iodide In the sample solution is oxidized to lodate, each
equivalent of which liberates six equivalents of Iodine on treatment with excess Iodide
In weakly acidic solutions. The liberated iodine is extracted into methyl isobutyl
ketone and nebulized directly into the flame. The presence of fifty-fold excesses by
weight of Co, Nl, Mn, Cr, Zn, Mg, Na, K, Ca, Al, chloride, sulfate, phosphate and
nitrate was observed to give rise to negligible effect on the absorbance produced by a
5 ppm Iodide solution when present throughout the amplification and extraction
procedure. The presence of cations incompatible with iodide In acidic aqueous
solutions, for example Fe (III), Cu (II) or V (V), results In Interference due to llbera
tion of iodine by oxidation of the excess Iodide added to effect the amplification.
Under these conditions the interfering ions must be removed by preliminary treatment of
the neutral sample solution with cation exchange resin. The amplification-extraction
procedure Is shown to be selective for Iodide and to produce an effective sensitivity
(for 1 percent absorption) of 0.32 Iodide.
INDEX TERMS: Iodine, Aqueous solutions. Pollutant Identification, Methodology, Cations,
Heavy metals, Halldes. Anlons, Alkali metals, Lelpert amplification method.
Sensitivity, Atomic absorption speetrophotometry. Detection limits, Sample
2*»
AMIC -651*2
"DETERMIKmON OF ANTIMONY IN PETROLEUM ADDITIVES USING ATOMIC ABSORPTION
SPECTROPHOTOMETRY", Supp, G. H., Atomic Absorption Newsletter. Vol. 11, No. 6,
NovemberJJecember 1972, pp 122-12T
A fast, simple, and accurate method has been developed for the quality control
analysis of production samples of antimony in petroleum additives. The standards and
samples are dissolved In an organic solvent (MIBK) and analyzed directly by atomic
absorption spectrophotometry. The two types of antimony compounds used as petroleum
additives In this study were antimony dlalkyldlthlocarbamate and antimony
0,0-dlalkylphosphorodlthloate. They were analyzed by atomic absorption and by a wet
analytical method which Involved titrating a KJeldahl mixture with potassium
permanganate. Good agreement between the wet method and atomic absorption was attained.
The AA results were slightly higher than the wet method, although veil within
experimental error. Acid breakdown and digestion are eliminated using AA analysis and
sample handling is kept to a minimum.
INDEX TERMS: Methodology, Oil, Chemical analysis, Pollutant identification, Additives,
Petroleum additives. Antimony, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Absorbance,
Sample preparation, Antimony dialkyldithiocarbamnte, Antimony 0 0-dlalkylphosvhoro-
dlthloate.
-------
i. PHYSICAL Aim CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-651*3
"ACCESSORY 'GROOVED1 TUBES FOR THE GRAPHITE FURNACE", Fernandez, F. J., Atomic
Absorption Newsletter. Vol. 11, Ho. 6, November-December 1978, PP 123-12T
Grooved graphite tubes have been shown to Improve the performance of the
Graphite Furnace for a number of special applications, particularly those using
organic solvents. Hie new tube that has been designed has a shallow groove In the
center of the Inner tube surface. The grooved section Is designed to contain the
sample and prevent It from spreading along the tube. In addition, the wall thickness
of the center section (o.7-mm) is larger than that of the outer sections (0.5-mm),
resulting In a more even temperature distribution along the tube. With the grooved
tube It Is possible to utilise up to 50 microllter sample volumes of organic solvents
with no loss of precision due to sample spreading. Preliminary experiments have shown
that the more uniform temperature profile of the grooved tube provides more efficient
charring of concentrated solutions such as whole blood and serum, as well as various
types of solid samples. Additional differences between the standard and groved tube
such as different electrical resistance, attaining a different maximum temperature and
poorer sensitivities make the standard tube preferable for general use with the
Graphite Furnace.
INDEX TERMS: Performance, Instrumentation, Laboratory equipment. Temperature,
Resitivlty, Chemical analysis, Graphite Furnace, Grooved tubes, Tubes,
Sensitivity, Biological samples, Blood, Serum.
"MULTIJILEMBNT MICROANALYSES BY. DELVES CUP.ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTHOPHOTOMETRlf OH
CHEIATE/SOLVENT EXTRACTS", Joselow, M. M., Bogden, J. D., Atomic Absorption Newsletter. I
Vol. 11, No. 6, NovemberJtecember 1972, PP 127-188.
The recent development of atomic absorption procedures that permit analyses
with high sensitivity of microllter specimen quantities, together with the use of ,
solvent-extraction techniques, constitute, in effect, a 2-stage system with the .
capability for the sequential micro determination of a wide range of metallic elements. ,
The validity and value of this approach is demonstrated with lead and cadmium.
Analyses for Pb and Cd were made using (1) an accepted nacre-procedure, aspiration of I
the extract of concern through the nebulizer-burner and (2) the micro-sampling cup
adaptation of atomic absorption spectrophotometry. For the micro analyses, the
technique essentially as described by.Fernandez and Kahn (1971), was followed, except
that 0.02 ml of KtBK extract, Instead of aqueous standards, was delivered into
pre-conditioned, matched Delves sampling cups, and dried at 70 C for 5 minutes. The
cups were then Inserted Into the flame of an atonic absorption spectrophotometer
equipped with a 3-slot burner. The lead analyses were done at 283.3 nm, and the
cadmium at 228.8 nm. The data indicate that the micro-sampling cup techniques are as
valid as the aspiration technique, yielding quite comparable results. The aspiration
technique consumed at least 0.? ml of the specimen and the micro-sampling technique only
0.02 ml, a reflection of the considerably lower detection limits obtainable with the
cup. By applying micro-atomic absorption techniques for the specific metals, '
sequentially, to the solvent extracts obtained from larger size samples, the
concentrations of a wide-range of trace metals can be determined In many matrices,
particularly where sample size may Impose limitations, as with blood, urine, and
tissues.
AMIC-65W*
"THE USE OF AN ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROPHOTOMETER FOR END-POINT DETERMINATION:
APPLICATION TO CHLORIDE IR WATERS", Cambrell, J. V., Atomic Absorption Newsletter,
Vol. 11, No. 6, November-December 1972, pp 125-127.
The method of using an atonic absorption spectrophotoneter for the end-point
determination of chloride with a silver nitrate tltrant allows for the assumption that
no Ag ions are in solution until all the chloride has been precipitated. The Ag ion
concentration, however, increases as further additions of the tltrant are made. The
linear relationship between the atomic absorbance and concentration of Ag is used in
calculating the equivalence point which is then used to calculate chloride ion
concentration. Synthetic and natural, treated, and waste water samples were
analyzed for chloride by the following method. Two identical aliquots of the water
sample are transferred to Individual 100-ml volumetric flasks. Different Increments
of AgN03 are added to each. The solutions are diluted, mixed, and filtered through
very retentive filter paper. The absorbance due to Ag Ion In each filtrate la
determined by atomic absorption and the chloride concentration calculated using
equations or by graphically determining the end-point and calculating the
concentration. The same samples were spiked with standard chloride solution to
confirm recovery (92-108 percent). With this method (1) it should be possible to
detect at least 0.5 ppm Cl using a 50-ml sample and O.OlUlN AgN03; (2) reliable
chloride assays can be performed; and (3) the end-point is ascertained with greater
ease, particularly at the low chloride levels and in the presence of color and
turbidity.
INDEX TERMS: Chlorides, Water analysis, Volumetric analysis, Methodology, Pollutant
identification. Atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Eng-polnt determination.
(Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Cadmium, Lead, Heavy metals. Methodology, Solvent extractions. Delves
cup method, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Mlcroanalysls, Precision,
Multlelemental analysis, Detection limits, Chelated metals.
25
-------
1. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-65146
"BOMB DECOMPOSITION OF BIOLOGICAL MATERIALS", Paus, P. E., Atomic Absorption
newsletter. Vol. 11, Bo. 6, November-December 1972, pp 129-T5T
The decomposition bomb has been used successfully In the determination of trace
elements In seaweed and fish samples. Approximately 0.5 g (dry weight) of seaweed and
pike fish and 0.8 g tuna fish samples were weighed and transferred to the Teflon vessel
In the bomb. Known quantities of concentrated H2SOU and HN03 were added to the bomb
which was then closed and heated to about 100 C. After cooling to room temperature,
distilled water was added and the solution diluted to volume In 50^nl volumetric flasks.
Those metals determined using the above procedure vere Hg, Cd, Zn, Cu, Fe, and
Pb. The results vere compared with those obtained by other workers using a hot, wet
ashing procedure and neutron activation analysis. For the mercury determination the
results are in good agreement with the other methods. For the other elements the
present method gives results of the same order of magnitude. Bomb decomposition seems to
hold promise for rapid dissolution of biological materials. One of the greatest
advantages Is the complete dissolution of fat.
INDEX TERMS: Chemical analysis, Trace elements. Methodology, Pollutant identification.
Heavy metals, Mercury, Cadmium, Zinc, Copper, Iron, Lead, Marine algae. Pikes,
Neutron activation analysis, Phaeophyta, Bomb decomposition, Biological materials,
Dissolution, Wet ashing, Ascophyllum nodosum, Tuna.
AMK-65'tB I
"STKEfJGITE DISSOLUTION ID FLOODED SOILS AND SEDIMENTS", Patrick, W. H Jr., Gotoh, S., {
Williams, B. G., Science, Vol. 179, «o. U073, February 9, 1973- PP 56U-565. '
To investigate the conditions under which phosphorus Is released from
strenglte In flooded soil and sediments, suspensions of a rice soil were Incubttted at
oxidation-reduction potentials of 300, 100, -100, and -250 mv and at pH values of
5.0, 6.0, 7.0, and 8.0. The strenglte (FePOU . H20) was synthesized with Fe-59.
After Incubation for 7-10 days, samples of the suspensions were removed without
contact with the air, and Iron and orthophosphate were extracted with ammonium acetate
solution. Iron was analyzed by the alpha-alpha prlme-dlpyrldyl method and phosphate by
the chlorostannous-reduced molybdophosphorlc blue color method. Fe-59 vas determined
with a deep well gamma counter. The results show that strenglte partially dissolves
under reducing conditions such as those that exist In flooded soils deprived of
oxygen. A close relationship existed between the amount of strenglte dissolved and
both the redox potential and the pH of the soil suspension. There Is a marked
Interaction between acidity and redox potential, with strenglte reduction and
solubllization being more pronounced under conditions of low pH combined with low
redox potential.
INDEX TERMS: Phosphorus, Oxidation-reduction potential. Hydrogen Ion concentration, ,
Sediments, Reduction (chemical), Strenglte, Dissolution. :
"MODIFICATION OF QUARTZ ABSORPTION TUBE FOR DELVES CUP-ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTRO-
PKOTOMETRY", Joselow, M. M., Atomic Absorption Newsletter. Vol. 11, No. 6, November-
December 1972, p 131.
Positioning the quartz absorption tube so that the entrance hole is exactly
over the micro-crucible can be considerably aided by a simple modification of this tube,
easily made with a file or grinding wheel. By making Indentations at both ends of this
tube so as to fit the attaching clips of the burner head tube supports, the absorption
tube can be clipped or recllpped readily Into a fixed position without need for further
rotational adjustment. These grooves can be made with any suitable file. It has been
found that a small dental grinding wheel, attached to a dental drill or chucked Into an
electric hand drill, provided a quite satisfactory tool for forming properly sized
grooves in the quartz tube.
INDEX TERMS: Laboratory equipment, Research equipment, Delves cup method, Atomic
absorption spectrophotometry. Quartz absorption tube.
AMIC-O555
"MERCURY METOTLATION IN AN AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT", Langley, D. G. ,
Pollution Control Federation. Vol. W», No. 1, January 1973, pp UUIJ
Journal Water
Samples of sediment and water from a mercury polluted river were collected with
a Jenkins sampler, a Phleger-type gravity core sampler, and a Kemmerer sampler and
returned to the laboratory for chemical characterization and study of mercury
methylation. Sediment vas analyzed for mercury by flameless AA and for organic sediment
Index by the Ballinger-McKee procedures. Each Jenkins tube was stocked with 10 goldfish [
In an experiment to concentrate methylmercury from the underlying mercury-contaminated
I sediments. DO, temperature, and pH vere regularly monitored. Fluorospar tailings vere
' added to four test cells to evaluate their effectiveness In inhibiting methylation.
At weekly Intervals, two fish from each cell were analyzed for methylmercury by GLC,
and the results compared with those from a control group. Results shoved that
methylation rates varied from 0.12 to l».83ng Hg/vk/sq cm. The cell with the highest
' methylation rate also had a large bacteria population which may have been responsible
for the methylation. Other factors affecting methylation Include temperature, pH,
redox potential, mercury concentration, and organic concentration. However, under
certain conditions, methylation can occur with low Hg concentrations. Methylation is
too slow a process to permit natural rehabilitation of contaminated sediments, but
sealing off the sediments appears to be a promising measure.
INDEX TERMS: Mercury, Bacteria, Sediments, Organic matter. Hydrogen Ion concentration.
Oxidation-reduction potential, Goldfish, Methylation, Bloaccunulatlon, Sediment
overlays, BiotransformatIon.
26
-------
1. PHYSICAL AHD CHEMICAL METHODS
A MIC-6563
"SOURCES OF NUTRIENTS IN CANADAKAGO LAKE". HetJlng, L. J., Sykes, R. J., Journal
Water Pollution Control Federation. Vol. &5, No. 1, January 1973, PP 1A5-T55I
A study of the nutrient balance of Canadarago Lake In east-central New York
State revealed that approximately 52 percent of the phosphorus Input came from land
runoff, U6 percent fran wastewater, and 2 percent from rainfall. Detergents,
represented approximately 56 percent of the wastevater phosphorus load. Approximately
23 percent of the total phosphorus was trapped In the lake. Of the soluble phosphorus,
72 percent came from vastewater. Of total nitrogen, 91 percent was from land runoff.
Wastevater loadings of chlorides, magnesium, and potassium were minor. Phosphorus and
nitrogen contributions were U.8 and 10.3 g/day/cap, respectively. Control measures
might reduce phosphorus load by two-thirds and improve the lake, perhaps even to the
mesotrophlc state, in 2 to 3 years.
INDEX TERMS: Nutrients, Water pollution sources. Detergents, Rain, Waste water
(pollution). Surface runoff.
AMIC-6566
"CONTROL OF MERCURY POLLUTION IN SEDIMENTS", Smith, I. C.f Midwest Research Institute,
Report Ro. EPAWI2-72-OU3, EPA Contract No. 68-01-0087, September 1972, 55 pp.
Results are reported of exploratory studies to develop methods for controlling
pollution from mercury-laden sediment deposits on the bottoms of streams and lakes.
Hie results of exploratory studies, to develop such methods are reported here. Five
sediment samples containing from 6 ppm to 500 ppm mercury were investigated. Two
samples were taken from the St. Clalr River below the outfall of a chloroalkall plant;
one sample from the Detroit River below a chloroalkall plant; one sample from a stream
which empties Into the San Francisco Biy; and one sample from an Industrial holding
pond used for disposing of waste from a chloroallcali plant. The geochemieal nature of
these sediments varied considerably from sample to sample. The major differences were
In organic content, sand or silicate content, carbonate content and particle size
distribution. Although no effort was specifically directed to determining the chemical
form of mercury in the sediment samples, the results of these studies Indicate that
mercury was present in a variety of chemical forms. The use of an iron overlay in the
form of crushed automobile bodies topped with sand should, on the basis of results
obtained in this program, be an inexpensive and effective method of isolating
mercury-containing sediments from a water overlayer. An important attraction of using
Iron as an overlay is its ability to reduce methylmercury ions as well as mercuric ions
to elemental mercury. A variety of methods for recovering the mercury values from
dredged sediments were explored. Density fractionation, particle size fractionatlon,
flotation, roasting and leaching were the methods studied. Roasting and chemical
leaching afford the greatest promise for Inexpensive removal and recovery of the
mercury. A possible method for in-place leach of sediment deposits Is presented.
Field tests of the Iron overlay and the chemical leach method are recommended.
AMIC-656U
"DEVELOPfEHT OF METHOD FOR NTA ANALYSIS IN RAW WATER", Taylor, J. K., Zielinskl,
W. L., Jr., Maienthal, E. J., Durst, R. A., Burke, R. W., National Bureau of
Standards, Washington, D.C., Report No. EPA-82-72-057, September 1972, 27 pp.
The free acid form of nltrllotrlacetlc acid is readily esterlfled by
N,0-bl8(trlmethylsllyl}acetamlde and gas chramtographlc analysis is directly
applicable to this derivative. The response characteristic of NTA-trlsilylester was
2,200 sq mm peak area per microgram of NTA at maximum sensitivity of the hydrogen
flame lonizatlon detector. Accordingly, gas chromatography has the potential for
detecting NTA concentrations of practical Interest providing that suitable NTA
isolation techniques can be developed. The cuprlc ion-selective electrode provides
the basis for a sensitive electrochemical detector for NTA. Apparatus for the
on-atream determination of uncomplexed NTA has been developed. This may be used for
determination of total NTA, after the latter is separated 'from bound metal ions and
other complexlng agents by a suitable means, such as Ion-exchange chromatography.
Polarographic studies have shown that the bismuth-NTA complex is a suitable method
for the "determination of NTA in most waters. While some metal ions may Interfere, a
pre-electrolysla step and/or a standard addition technique seems feasible to
eliminate this problem. Potentlometrlc titratlon with cuprlc ion should provide a
rapid and reliable referee method for the determination of NTA in detergent
formulations. Such a method would appear to be superior to the spectrophotometrlc
methods presently used, since the latter are affected by turbidities which are
encountered in many of the samples.
INDEX TERMS: Nltrllotrlacetlc acid, Water analysis, Polarographlc analysis, Pollutant
Identification, Ion selective electrodes, Potentiometric titratlon, Flame
lonlgatlon gas chronatOBraphy.
AMIC-6566 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Mercury, Pollution abatement. Bottom sediments, Chemical analysis,
Isolation, Separation techniques. Methodology, Pollutant Identification, Testing
procedures, Heiry metals, Methylmercury, Recovery, Dime thyImercury.
27
-------
1. PHYSICAL AHD CHEMICAL METHODS
"IDENTIFICATION OF POLYCHLORTNATED BIPHENYIS IN THE PRESENCE OF DDT-TYPE COMPOUNDS",
Brovnrlgg, J. T., Fir.twood, D., Hornig, A. W., Balrd-Atomlc, Incorporated, Bedford,
Massachusetts, Report Ho. EPA-R2-72-OOli. EPA Contract No. 68-01-0082, October 1972,
62pp.
Polychlorlnated blphenyls (PCB's) Interfere with gas chroma tograpfalc
analyses of DDT and related compounds, necessitating a simple Independent method for
PCB determination. The purpose of the present study was to determine the applicability
of low temperature (77 K) luminescence methods to this problem. Basic studies Included
documentation of excitation/emission spectra of 6 pesticides (p,p'- and o,p'J)DE, DDD,
and DDT), 7 PCB Iscmers, and 5 PCB mixtures (Aroclors). Although phosphorescence
spectra of the DDD and DDT compounds are very similar, possible differences in
lifetime and polarization measurements may aid In differentiation. Emission from DDE
Is at least 100X less Intense than that of DDD or DDT, and is therefore more difficult
to determine with adequate sensitivity. Spectral differences among various Aroclors
are sufficient to allow those studied to be differentiated. Emission from solvent
impurities presently limit detection sensitivities to about 1.0 ppm for DDT/EDD and
about .01 ppm for Aroclors. By removing interference, detection sensitivities should
be Improved by two orders of magnitude. Low temperature luminescence studies In
various binary mixtures of Aroelor 125U and p,p'-DDT Indicate Aroclor 125U may be
identified and quantltated in the presence of DDT concentrations 100X greater.
INDEX TERMS: Polychlorinated blphenyls. Pollutant identification, Chemical analysis,
Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Methodology, Separation techniques. Gas
chrcnatography. Water analysis, Phosphorescence, Luminescence, Detection limits,
Chemical interference, Sensitivity, Mixtures, Quantitative analysis, Emission
spectra, laomera.
KRIS-TICS OF RAINFALL RUNOFK FROM A BEEF CATTLE FEEDLOT", Krels, R, P.,
Scalf, M. R., McNabb, J., Environmental Protection Agency, Robert S. Kerr Water
Research Center, Ada, Oklahoma, Report No. EPA-R2-72-061, September 1972, 1>3 PP.
A study was conducted at a 12,000-head capacity beef cattle feedlot in order
to determine the characteristics of rainfall runoff and to evaluate the efficiency of
the treatment process In operation at the time of the Investigation. Sampling
equipment used In the study Included a recording rain guage, an automatic,
float-actuated, pump-type liquid sampler, a water level recorder, and a vacuum-type
refrigerated sequential sampler. Sample flow and composite and grab samples from ditch
Influent and effluent preserved In H2SOU were analyzed for COD, total organic C,
phosphate, organic N, ammonia, and chloride. Unpreserved samples were analyzed for
total solids, dissolved solids and suspended solids, volatile suspended solids, Ca, Mg,
Na, and K. Those unpreserved flow samples processed on the same day as collected were
analyzed for BODS; those from the farm pond effluent were analyzed for BOD5, nitrite,
orthophosphate, pH, conductivity, and total alkalinity. Microbiological grab samples
were collected from the direct feedpen runoff during three rainfall events, and from
the holding pond ditch Influent and effluent and the farm pond effluent during the
first two pumping periods to determine densities of collform, fecal collform, and fecal
streptococci. COD, TOC, BOD5 concentrations were high, averaging 7,210, 2,010, and
1,075 mg/1, in direct feedpen runoff. BODS concentrations were about four times the
concentration typical for raw domestic sewage. Direct feedlot runoff contained high
and variable concentrations of solids and nutrients. Total suspended solids and total
solids averaged 5,900 and 11,^29 mg/1, respectively. Total phosphate concentrations
ranged from 21 to 223 mg/1 which is 3 to 20 times concentrations normally found in
municipal wastes. Essentially all of the nitrogen was in the total organic and
AMIC-6569
"LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY OF CARBAMATE PESTICIDES", Thruston, A. D., Jr., Environmental
Protection Agency, Southeast Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, Georgia,
Report No. EPA-B2-72-079, October 1972, 19 pp.
Standard solutions of 23 carbonate pesticides prepared in Isopropanol were
analyzed using a DuPont Model 820 liquid chromatograph equipped with an ultraviolet
photometric detector. Stainless steel columns (1 m x 2 mm l.d.) packed with either
Permaphase ODS (octadecyl sllane) or Permaphase ETH (ether) were used with the following
mobile phases: 6 and 30 percent MeCH In water, hexane, one percent Isopropanol/hexane,
and l» percent Isopropanol/hexane. The retention tines of the pesticides are given.
The UV detector required 20-1900 ng for the pestlcidea studied to give a 25 percent
full-scale recorder response.
INDEX TERMS: Carbaoate pesticides, Pollutant identification, Liquid chronatography,
Retention time, Baygon, Furadan, Matacll, Mobam, Sevln, UC 1085*. UC Bb5
-------
1. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6573
^•VALUATION OF WASTE WATCRS FROM HETROLF.UM AMD COAL PROCESSING", Reid, G. W., Streebin,
L. E.f Rumfeld(, D. W., Sweazy, R.f Oklihoma University, Research Institute, Norman,
Oklahoma, Report He. EPA-R2-72-001, December 1972, 205 pp.
This report presents an evaluation on pollution problems, abatement procedures
and control techniques relevant to the petroleum and coal Industries. Petroleum wastes
are discussed under three broad sections: Drilling-Production, Transportation and
Storage, and Refining. Each section Is Introduced with background Information. Within
each section, petroleum wastes are Identified as to their source, volume, and
composition, and waste treatment methods are discussed. The results of a field study of
three small refineries are reported, providing additional information which delineates
the characteristics of waste streams from Individual processes within the refinery.
Coal mining, coal processing, and coal utilization, the wastes associated with each, and
the corresponding control measures are discussed. Acid mine drainage, the most
significant pollution problem from coal mining, and possible control measures are
presented. The major pollution problems associated with coal processing originate from
coal cleaning, the coking process, and refuse disposal. The principal pollutants in
water discharged from the processing of coal are suspended solids usually In the form of
fine clay, black shale, and other minerals commonly associated with coal. Coal and
coke are used as sources of carbon for technical reduction and energy sources in the
metallurgical and power Industries. The production of coke by carbonization of coal
produces a waste water that is high In phenols, ammonia, and dissolved organlcs.
Biological treatment processes appear to be very promising for the control of these
pollutants.
AMIC-6571*
'EFFECTS OF IMPOUNDMENT OH THE WATER QUALITY OF THE BIGHORN RIVER", Soltero, R. A.,
Wright, J. C., Horpestad, A. A., Water Research, Vol. 7, Ho. 3, March 1973, PP S^-SS1*.
Analyses of water samples from Bighorn Lake show that the water flowing
through this new impoundment on the Bighorn River has undergone certain physical and
chemical changes. Turbidity vas greatly reduced and most dissolved constituents lost
concentration. Potassium was unchanged over 2 yr, and magnesium, sodium and sulfate
diminished one year and Increased the next. Nitrate was augmented In the reservoir but
other nitrogen compounds suffered reduction. Photosynthetlc reduction of alkalinity
was not detected and the alkalinity decrease is assumed to reflect dilution. Passage
through the reservoir delayed conductivity changes evident In the river above, and the
mass of stored water was much more resistant to seasonal temperature changes.
INDEX TERMS: Multiple-purpose reservoirs, Water quality, Physicochemlcal properties,
Water properties, Chemical analysis, Montana, Heavy metals. Water chemistry,
Alkaline earth metals, Alkali metals, Bighorn Lake.
AMIC-6573 (Continued)
dard 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Oil, Oil wastes, Coal mine wastes, Water pollution effects, Water
analysis, Gas chromatography, Mass spectrometry, Acid mine water, Brines,
Waste disposal, Hydrogen sulflde, Phenols, Heavy metals. Characterization,
Crude oil. Absorption spectroseopy, Refrectometry, GC-nasa spectrometry,
Fingerprinting, Oil dispersants, Gasoline, Kerosene, Diesel fuel, Fuel
oil, Asphalt, Mercaptans.
AMIC-6576
"INVESTIGATION ON THE RIVER WATER POLLUTED WITH ACIDIC HOT SPRING WATER", Arilzumi, A.,
Water Research. Vol. 7, No. 3, March 1973, PP 385-391*.
Tamagawa hot spring in Akita Prefecture gushes hot wnter of 1 pH hydrochloric
acid at some Ifco 1/s. This quantity flows into the River Tama with the result that the
river has been denied use for any significant hydropower development thus far. For
the purpose of mitigating the acidity of the river water, the hot spring water is
carried away through channels and Infiltrated into the soil of a mountainside for
chemical neutralizing through seepage before flowing Into the river. The following
facts have been obtained by field geochemlcal investigation (1951-1963). The
neutralization effect following the injection of hot-spring rater into the soil Is
about 80 percent, the larger part of which effect Is due to the function of
dissolution of Al(3 plus); the pH values of the water in the reservoir of Yoroibata
dam to be constructed downstream of the river do not exceed 5; and even in the absence
of hot-spring water injection treatment there is acidity reduction due to the
alkalinity of the tributary waters as well as due to the dissolution of river-bed
components by the acid during seepage.
INDEX TERMS: Heated water, Thermal pollution, Hot springs. Acidic water, Water
analysis, Chemical analysis, Hydrogen ion concentration, Neutralization,
Geochemistry, Acidity, Calcium, Magnesium, Sodium, Potassium, Aluminum, Iron,
Chlorides, SuLfates, Silica, Efficiencies, Water sampling, Discharge (water).
Tana River, Tamagawa Hot Spring, Japan, Hydrochloric acid, Yoroibata Dam.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHOEB
AMIC-6580
"A TRAN&PORT MUCH AN ISM IH HOLLOW NYLON FIBER REVERSE OSMOSIS MEMBRANES FOR TOE REMOVAL
OF DOT AMD ALDRIH FHOM WATER", Abron, L. A., Osburn, J. 0., Water Research. Vol. 1,
Ho. 3, Jferch 1973, PP WlJ»77.
The DuPont hollow nylon fiber reverse osmosis membranes were investigated for
use In the removal of DOT and Aidrln from aqueous solution. Because these membranes
were developed for the demineralization of brackish waters the removal characteristics
for the pesticides were compared with the removal characteristics for the Ions
commonly found in brackish and hard waters. These membranes rejected 85.95 percent of
the brackish-producing Ions. Such Inorganic ions with respect to the membrane were
classified as membrane-non-Interacting solutes. DDT and Aidrln were classified as
membrane-interacting solutes, and thus the concept of solute rejection by the
membrane waa different from that which had been developed for the Inorganic Ions.
INDEX TERMS: DDT, Aidrln, Pesticide removal, Aqueous solutions, Semlpermeable
membranes. Reverse osmosis, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Membrane
processes, Separation techniques, Water quality control, Infiltration, Solubility,
Dlffuslvlty, Adsorption, Pollutant Identification, Physical properties.
'ttRIHOPHCSPHATE DETERMINATIONS USING PHEMEASURED REAGENTS", Baskett, R. C.,
Water and Sewage Works, Vol. 120, No. 1, January 1973. P •»?.
A simple and convenient method for determining orthophosphate In water
involves using a spectrophotometer, premeastired powder pillows of reagent (Murphy and
Rlley formula), and 5 ml water samples. The spectrophotometer Is operated at a
wavelength setting of 710 millimicrons. The percent transmlttance can be converted to
mg/1 phosphate by means of a standard curve. The test has proved to be rapid and well
within the established limits of accuracy for conventional orthophosphate measurements.
INDEX TERMS: Spectrophotometry, Water analysis, Accuracy, Orthophosphates.
AMIC-6583
'CONTROL OF MERCURY CONTAMINATION IV FRESHWATER SEDIMENTS", Felck, G., Johanson, E.
E., Yeaple, D. S., JBF Scientific Corporation, Report No. EPA-R2-72-077, October
1978, 156 pp.
Methods for controlling the release of mercury from sediments have been
developed, and the effects of dredging on the redistribution of mercury have been
evaluated. A program of laboratory studies was conducted concurrently with a field
survey where the extent of mercury contamination at a typical site was evaluated.
Laboratory studies consisted of both partitioning and aquarium experiments using
artificially contaminated sediments as veil as sediments from the polluted field site.
Inorganic sulfldes and long-chain alkyl thlols with suitable modifications were found
to be the most effective binding agents. A number of factors were identified which
affect the decision to decontaminate a polluted sediment Or to remove the material by
dredging. If the material is to be dredged, precautions must be taken when land
disposal methods are used. The field survey consisted of determining both the
horizontal and vertical extent of the mercury contamination as well as pertinent
hydraulic parameters. From results of the laboratory and field work, a pilot field
project Is described whereby techniques for controlling mercury contamination can be
evaluated at a site where the field conditions have been fully established.
INDEX TERMS: Mercury, Bottom sediments, On-slte investigations, Pollution abatement,
Water quality control, Laboratory tests, Freshwater, Sediment discharge, Sediment
control, Soil contamination, Chemical analysis, Soil analysis, Absorption, Fish,
Water analysis, Methodology, Sediment treatment, Complexing agents, Partition
coefficients.
AMIC-6588
"HYDROGEN PEROXIDE AIDS IN MEASURING SLUDGE OXYGEN UPfAKE RATES", Young, J. C.,
Baumann, E. R., Water Pollution Control Federation Highlights. Vol. 10, No. 1,
January 1973, PP "»-5.
The use of hydrogen peroxide to Increase DO in sludge samples allows for more
meaningful measurements of oxygen uptake rates. Activated sludge mixed liquor samples
were collected from an operating plant. Two to three drops of 10 percent H202 were
added to samples placed in 300-ml BOD bottles. A calibrated DO probe was Immediately
Inserted into the bottle and sealed. The DO indicated by the probe was allowed to
decrease to about 8 to 10 mg/1 before measurements were recorded. This was done so thi
the DO reading would be In the range used to calibrate the probe. This is also
approximately the range of DO's to which the organisms normally would be accustomed.
Also, the DO probe would stabilize during this initial period. Straight-line changes
In DO were measured in all cases. The slope of the DO versus time line represents the
rate of uptake of oxygen by the microorganisms in the sample. In all cases, the
straight-line relationship extended to below 0.5 mg/1. This test procedure requires
less time for analysis than does the measure of total and volatile suspended solids. I
is simple, and the amount of hydrogen peroxide added is not extremely critical, so that
the sources of error are minimized. Applications of this test are discussed.
INDEX TERMS: Dissolved oxygen, Activated sludge, Measurement, Methodology, Biochemical
oxygen demand, Sewage bacteria, Aquatic microorganisms. Sewage sludge.
Hydrogen peroxide, Absorption rates, Volatile suspended solids, Total suspended
° solids.
-------
1. PHYSICAL AHD CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-6591 '
"FLUORESCAMINE: A KFAGENT FOR ASSAY OF AMINO ACIDS, FEPTTDES, PROTEINS, AND
PRIMARY AMIDES IN '11IK PICOMOLE RANGE", Udenfrlend, S., Stein, S., Bohlen, P., et al,
Science. Vol. 178, No. U063, November 2lt, 1972, PP 871-872.
Fluorescamine Is a new reagent for the detection of primary amines In the
plccmole range. Its reaction with amines is almost instantaneous at room temperature
in aqueous media. The products are highly fluorescent, whereas the reagent and its
degradation products are nonfluorescent. An important application has been the assay
of proteins during protein purification procedures. Assays carried out imminlly
can be used to determine 0.5 mlcrogram of protein. With a semi-automated procedure
(similar to the one for amino acid assay) and a Bio-Gel column to separate nonprotein
material, as little as 0.05 mlcrogram of protein can be assayed. Fluorescamine can be
used as an amlne reagent not only In aqueous solution but also in organic solvents and
on solids. It has been used as a spray to detect amlno acids and peptldes on thin
layer chromatograms. As little as 20 pmole of each can be detected. Fluorescamine
yields intense fluorescence with other primary amines of biological Importance. Thus,
gamm-amlnc-butyric acid, beta-alanlne, histomine, catecholamlnes, amphetamine, amlno
sugars, spermlne, and spermldlne also yield the characteristic fluorophore. Procedures
for extracting and assaying the two polyamines In milligram quantities of tissue have
been found feasible.
INDEX TERMS: Amlno acids, Proteins, Peptides, Assay, Aqueous solutions, Fluorescence,
Pollutant identification, Hydrogen ion concentration, Primary amines,
Fluorescamlne, Reagents, Organic solvents.
AHIC-6612
"TURBULENT DIFFUSION OF OIL IN THE OCEAN", Murray, S. P., Limnology and Oceanography,
Vol. 17, No. 5, September 1978, PP 651-660.
On-slte observations of oil slick geometries and current speeds during the
Chevron spill of torch, 1970, In the Gulf of Mexico have allowed a comparative
evaluation of the role of large-scale turbulence (in the form of a horizontal eddy
diffuslvlty) and surface tension effects In the spreading of oil from a continuously
emitting well Into a steady current. The initial outline of the slick (roughly the
first 50 percent of slick length} follows the lavs of expansion as predicted by Taylor's
turbulent diffusion theory. The gross size and overall shape (neglecting details of
outline) of this type of slick are well represented by a solution of the Fleklan
diffusion equations which predict approximate slick geometry as a function of current
speed, horizontal eddy diffuslvlty, the oil discharge rate, and an empirically
determined constant (the boundary concentration). Under the conditions observed the
effect of surface tension seems confined to within the first few hundred meters dovnsllcl
and can probably be neglected for practical purposes under moderate oil discharge rates
and current speeds as low as even 5 cm/sec. (Reprinted from Limnology and Oceanography,
Vol. 17, Ho. 5, September 1972, pp 651-660. Copyright 1972 by the American Society or
Limnology and Oceanography, Inc. Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS: Oceans, Oil wells, Mathematical studies. Oil spills, Theoretical analysis,
Oceans, ferine environment. Oil wastes, Eddies. Diffuslvlty, Equations, Water
pollution sources, Dispersion, Currents (water), Turbulent diffusion, Petroleum
Oil, Diffusion coefficients, Surface tension theory, Taylor turbulent diffusion
theory, Fleklan diffusion theory.
AMIC-6592
"ANALYTICAL METHOD FOR DETERMINATION OF INORGANIC NITRATES IN NATURAL STREAM
WATER", Sam, D., Naval Ordnance Laboratory, Silver Spring, Maryland, Report No.
NOLTR 72-295, Contract No. ORD332005-201-23, December 26, 1972, 10 pp.
A sensitive and reliable procedure has been developed which Is applicable
for determination of inorganic nitrites In natural stream water in concentrations as
low as 0.1 mlcromoles/llter. Samples are concentrated by an Ion exchange procedure
prior to the spectrophotometric measurement of the nitrite In the form of an azo dye.
The spectrophotometric measurement of the azo dye is found to conform to Beer's law.
The nitrite sample is treated with sulfanllic acid and N-(l-Haphthyl)-ethylenedlamine
dlhydrochloride to form a red azo dye. The dye is passed through a column of Dowex
1-X8, 50-100 mesh, anlon exchange resin and then It Is eluted with 60 percent acetic
acid. The resulting effluent Is measured In a Cary 16 spectrophotometer at 550 nm In
a cell of 10 cm optical path. The application of this method to the determination of
natural stream water Is discussed.
INDEX TEW6: Nitrites, Methodology, Water analysis, Natural streams. Pollutant
Identification, Chemical analysis, Spectrophotometry, Anlon exchange. Reliability
Dlazotizatlon, Azo dyes, Ion exchange resins, Detection limits, Sample
preparation, Absorbance, Sensitivity, Preconcentratlon.
AMIC-6613
'A pH-DEPENDENT MODEL FOR THE CHEMICAL SPECIATION OF COPPER, ZINC, CADMIUM, AND
LEAD IN SEAWATER", Zlrlno, A., Yamamoto, S., Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 17,
No. 5, September 1972, pp 661-671.
A pH-dependent model for the speelatlon of divalent Cu, Zn, Cd, and Pb Ions in
seawater was constructed with available and estimated thermodynamlc stability constants
and Individual Ion activity coefficients. This model was used to calculite the degree
of Interaction between each of the metal ions and the anlons chloride, sulfate,
bicarbonate, carbonate, and hydroxyl as a function' of pH. Interactions between a cation
and an anlon were assumed to result only In the formation of complexes with coordination
numbers of 1 to Uj polynuclear and mlxed-llgand complexes were not Included in the model
The calculations showed the following: All four metals are complexed to a considerable
extent in seawater; with the exception of Cd, the distributions of chemical species of
the metals vary greatly with changes in pH; Cu interacts primarily with hydroxyl and
carbonate, Zn with hydroxyl, Pb with carbonate and chloride, and Cd with chloride;
complexes with high coordination numbers (i.e. 3 and U) are not formed to any
appreciable extent In seawater. (Reprinted from Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 17,
No. 5, September 1972, pp 661-671. Copyright 1972 by the American Society of
Limnology and Oceanography, Inc. Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS: Mathematical models, Citlons, Anlons, Heavy metals, Hydrogen ion concentra-
tion, Sea water, Model studies, Copper, Zinc, Cadmium, Lead, Chlorides, fclldes,
Sulfates, Bicarbonates, Carbonates, Trace elements, Distribution, Marine environ-
ment, Speelatlon (chemical), Complex*11.on, Hydroxyl, Metal complexes, Ion activity
Thermodynamlc stability constants.
31
-------
1. PHYSICAL AMD CHEMICAL lOTHODS
AMIC-6621
'DISSOLVED FREE AMItlC ACIDS IN SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA COASTAL WATERS", Clark, M. E.,
Jackson, G. A., North, W. J., Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 17, No. 5, September
197?, PP 7U9-758.
The dissolved free amlno acids (DFAA) in seavater samples from an Inshore area
near a large submarine sewage outfall and from an Inshore area relatively remote from
any major outfall were compared. Twenty samples were analyzed; all were collected from
a small boat and Immediately filtered on board using tUllipore HA (O.l»5-micron) membrane
filters to remove bacteria, plankton, and sediments. Precautions were taken to avoid
contamination by nlnhydrln-posltive materials. Samples were stored on dry ice for
transit to the laboratory, then frozen at minus 60 C to await analysis. Surface samples
were taken directly over the side of the boat. Bottom and interstitial waters were
collected by SCUBA divers using cylindrical Plexlglas containers of about 6 liters
capacity. The amlno acids were Initially separated from salts by llgand exchange on
Chelex-100 resin (BloRad) converted to the Cu-NH3 form, and analyzed by thin-layer
chromatography after complete desalting and elutlng with NHdOH, Individual amlno acids
were estimated by the method of Clark (1968). After two^iimensional separation and
color development with nlnhydrin, individual spots were identified, cut out, and eluted
in 2 ml of 50 percent aqueous n-propanol. Optical densities were determined at 570 ran
on a microsample speetrophotometer. Quantities of amlno acids were estimated from stan-
dard curves of chromatograms of a mixture of amino acids (Cal Biochem). Subsamples
(1 ml) were taken for scintillation counting at each step In the procedure, so that over-
all loss of amlno acids at each step was known. At both sites, surface waters contained
DFAA levels of about 115 micrograms/liter (ca. 1 micromole/llter), about twice the value
AM1C-6629
"DIRECTION OF DRIFT OF SURFACE OIL WITH WIND AND TIDF", Rldgway, S. W., Sew Zealand
Journal of ferine and Freshwater Research, Vol. 6, Nos. 1 and 2, June 1972, pp 178-18U.
The directions of surface oil slicks spreading from the wreck of t.e.v.
Wahlne during April 1968 are compared with predicted movements of surface water
obtained by the vectorlal addition of wind-Induced surface currents and tidal currents.
Wind factors of 1 percent, 2 percent, 3 percent, U percent, and 5 percent of recorded
surface wind speeds were used to calculate wind-induced currents which were assumed to
be In the same direction as the wind. The observed oil slick movements correspond beat
with the resultants obtained using a 3-5 percent wind factor, 60-6U percent of these
falling within plus or minus 20 degrees of the observed directions of the oil slicks.
Possible sources of error In the method are discussed and an example is given to
Illustrate how the method might be used to predict movements of surface Oil resulting
from an oil spillage.
INDEX TERMS: Oil spills, Movement. Wind velocity, Surface waters. Forecasting,
Methodology, Currents (water), Vectorial addition.
AMIC-6621 (Continued)
Card 2/2
found in surface waters at both sites, with significantly more (290 mlcrograms or ca.
2.U mlcromoles/llter) near an outfall than away from one (170 mlcrograms or ca. 1.6
mlcromolea/liter). Interstitial waters near the outfall contained about 350 mlcrognms
or 3.0 mlcromoles DFAA/liter. The composition of the DFAA in all samples was similar to
that obtained by other workers elsewhere.
INDEX TERMS: Amlno acids, Outlets, Sewage effluents, Water analysis, Sea water,
Pollutant Identification, Water sampling, Surface waters, Hypollmnlon, Scuba
diving. Separation techniques, Spectrophotometry, Chemical analysis, Connate water,
Coastal water, Sample preparation, Thin layer chromatography, Scintillation
counting.
AMIC-67U2
'MERCURY. REMOVAL FROM FISH PROTEIN CONCENTRATE", Regler, L. W., Journal of the
Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol. 29, No. 12, December 1972, pp 1777-1779-
The potential reclamation of mercury contaminated protelnaceous food by an
extraction procedure such as employed in marking fish protein concentrate was In-
vestigated. Pieces of frozen swordflsh (Xlphlas gladlus) known to contain high levels
of mercury were thawed In air at room temperature, chopped, and deboned. A portion of
the deboned meat was refrozen In polyethylene bags and kept at -18 C. The remainder of
the meat was used to make FFC in the pilot plant by the Halifax laopropanol (IPA)
extraction method (Power 1962). Samples were taken of the filter cake after each of the
three extractions and of the product after drying. These samples, together with a sampl
of the deboned meat, were analyzed for mercury by the atomic absorption method (Utne et
al., 1970). Since the regular process did not remove the Hg, the complete FPC was
re-extracted with alcohol acidified with HC1. The addition of hydrochloric acid to the
isopropanol extractant was found to give removals as high as 93 percent from dry
swordfish protein concentrate. Preliminary studies of the variables indicated acid
concentration, kind of alcohol (ethanol and Isopropanol), alcohol concentration,
extractant volume, and number of extractions were important In the extraction.
INDEX TERMS: Mercury, Solvent extractions, Separation techniques. Methodology, Heavy
metals, Alcohols, Fish, Marine fish, Fish protein concentrate, Swordflsh, Halifax
propanol extraction method, Organic solvents, Ethyl alcohol, Isopropyl alcohol,
Biological samples, Xlphlas gladius, Hydrochloric acid.
See also: Category 2, AMIC-6216, 6269, 6277, 61*36, 6556
Category 3, AMIC-651U
Category b, AMIC-6662, 6671, 6672, 6673
Category 5, AMIC-6519.
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6210
'EFFECTS OF HYDHOSTATIC PRESGUH-: ON PHOTOSYNTHESIS AIID GKOWTH OF UNICEUWLAR MARINE
ALGAE ADD DIATOMS", Berger, L. R., Hawaii University, Department of Microbiology,
Honolulu, Hawaii, Fiml Report, Contract No. NOOOlli-c^-A-0387-0008, June 1, 1972. >>1 PP.
HTIS Report No. AD 71»2 509.
Carbon dioxide assimilation and light-dependent oxygen evolution have been
measured at 25 C with a variety of algae under various conditions of light Intensity,
bicarbonate concentration, oxygen tension, and hydrostatic pressure. Unicellular green,
and blue-green algae, diatoms, and filamentous alpe have been studied. A nev device
which permits the measurement of oxygen evolution in closed culture at fixed oxygen
tension Is described. Hie apparatus nay also be used at hydrostatic pressures up to
1000 atmospheres. It permits growth of algae In closed containers without gas phase at
constant p02. A pressure vessel was also designed which permits enzyme kinetics to be
done rapidly at Increased hydrostatic pressures up to 1000 atmospheres and Uo C. The
system can be brought to the desired pressure and monitored spectrophotometrically about
10 seconds after reaction components are mixed. This permits studies of enzyme kinetics
at limited substrate concentrations, on a time scale commensurate with in vivo
reactions.
INDEX TERMS: Marine algae, Photosynthesis, Chrysophyta, Hydrostatic pressure,
Chlorophyta, Environmental effects. Growth rates, Cyanophyta, Diatoms, Water
pressure, Blcarbonates, Dissolved oxygen, Instrumentation, Spectrophotometry,
Kinetics, Enzymes, Chlorella, Light Intensity, Primary productivity. Carbon
dioxide, Absorption, Substrate concentration, Anacystis nldulans, Crlcosphera spp,
Oxygen tension, Axenlc cultures, Pure cultures.
cars z/z
| AfflC-6216 (Continued)
levels many times higher than its original concentration in the medium. None of the
species was found to metabolize dleldrln.
INDEX TERMS: DDT, Metabolism, Marine algae, Bioassay, Gas chronatography, Dleldrln,
Biological magnification, Bloacoumulatlon, Sample preparation.
AMIC-6216
"UPTAKE AND METABOLISM OF DDT AND DIELDRIK BY MARINE AU5AE", Slkka, R. C., Rice, C. P.,
Syracuse University Research Corporation, Life Sciences Division, Syracuse, Nev York,
Annual Report No. 1, Contract No. NOOOlU-72-C-OOlO, June 1972, 39 PP. NTIS Report No.
AD 7W* 03U.
The uptake and metabolism of DDT and dleldrln by six species of marine
phytoplankton was studied. Uptake of DDT by the various species Increased linearly
with an Increasing concentration of DDT but non-llnearly with an Increasing
concentration of cells. The species with higher numbers of cells per unit of mass
took up greater amounts of DDT per unit weight than species with lower numbers of
cells. All species concentration DDT to levels many times hlgier than the original
concentration In the medium. DDT was accumulated by the six species In the following
order: Skeletonema costatum greater than Cyelotella nana greater than Isochrysis
galbana greater than Ollsthodlacus luteus greater than Amphldlnlum carter! greater than
Tetraselmls chull. All the species converted email amounts of DDT to DDE. After 2b
days of treatment, the amount of DDE produced by different species ranged from 0.03-11
percent of the total DDT in the cells. Maximum conversion of DDT to DDE was observed
in cultures of Tetraselmia. In addition to DDE, Skeletonema also produced a small
amount of an unknown polar metabolite from DDT. Six marine algae were found to remove
dleldrln from the surrounding medium In the following order: Skeletonema coatatum
greater than Tetraaelais chull greater than Isochrysis gtlbana"greater than
Isochrysli
a greater
Ollsthodlscus luteus equal to Cyelotella nana greater than Amphldlnlum carterl. The
uptake of dleldrln increased linearly with an increasing concentration of the pesticide.
With an Increase In cell concentration, the amount of dleldrln accumulated by the
cells Increased linearly In Amphldlnlum but non-llnearly in Isochrysis. SkeletonenB.
Tetraselmls. OUsthodisc.ua, and Cyelotella. All species concentrated dleldrln to
AMIC-6269
"A PROXIMATE BIOLOGICAL SURVEY OF PEARL HARBOR, OAHU", Evans, E. C., II, Peeling, T. J.
Murchlson, A. E., Stephen-Hassard, Q. D., Naval Underse* Research and Development
Center, Ocean Sciences Department, San Diego,'California, Report Bo. NUC TP 290,
June 1972, 65 pp. HTIS Report No. AD 7W» 233.
During the months of May and June, 1971, a biological survey of Pearl
Harbor was conducted by members of the Ocean Sciences Department, NUC. The major
thrust of this effort was to determine the heavy-metal (Cd, Cu, Hg, Pb, and 2n)
body burdens for marine or^nlsms characteristic of the harbor. In addition, the
general aspect of piling communities In all major lochs Is described and [schematically
Illustrated, constituting the only such description for the region In nearly three
decades. It was found that the body burdens of toxic metals (Cd, Hg, and Pb) in
Pearl Harbor orgonslsn (fish: Kuhlla sandvleensls, Abudefduf abdomlnalls. and
Upeneus arge; crabs: Thalamlta crenata and Podoprithalmua ^B11) ^"3 *° ** higher
near known sources of Industrial effluent. Of these, two (Hg and Pb) slightly exceed
concentrations normally expected in marine animals; the burdens In swimming crabs
tend to be highest (0.395 ppm wet weight for Hg and 1.8 ppm wet weight for Pb). For
Cu and Zn, burdens tend to be greatest near Ford Island. Again, the Cu content of
some swimming crabs exceeded that normally expected In marine animals (highest burden
found was 2bl ppm wet weight). None of these burdens, however, Is considered cause
for concern. The distinct differences observed In the structure of piling
communities In the various lochs, and at nearby locations suggest that many complex
environmental factors are at work In Pearl Harbor. While the detrimental effects of
oil exposure are evident In the Intertldal communities In all lochs, the major
degrading factor to the marine environment as a whole appears to be silt. Curiously,
water clarity and relative marine community health are greatest In those parts of the
33
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL
AMTC-6P69 (Continued)
Card 2/2
harbor receiving more intensive utilization by the Navy. Thus, on the basis of this
proximate survey, it IB by no means obvious that the Navy is the principal polluter
Of Pearl Harbor.
INDEX TERMS: Cadmium, Copper, Mercury, Lead, Zinc, Fish, Crabs, Crustaceans,
Absorption, Industrial vastes, Biological ccnmunitles, MolLusks, Neutron activa-
tion analysis, Periphyton, Silting, Oil spills, Domestic wastes, Sediments,
Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides. Annelids, Isopods, Amphlpoda, Voltammetry,
Biological samples, Blcaccumulatlon, Sponges, Bryozoa, Kydrolds, Pelecypods,
Decapods, Chorda tea, Echinodermn.
AMIC-6277 (Continued)
Card 2/2
the biomass and the arsenic In the influent. The biota had the ability to assimilate
and adsorb arsenic species in proportion to the amount available in the influent.
INDEX TERMS: Activated sludge, Blomass, Arsenic compounds, Biota, Chemical oxygen
demand, Heavy metals. Adsorption, Neutron activation analysis. Chemical analysis.
Kinetics, Path of pollutants, Bioconcentraticn, Arsenic, Biological magnification.
Assimilation, Substrate utilization. Fate of pollutants.
AMIC-6277
"BICCONCEHTRATTON OF ARSENIC BY ACTIVATED SLUDGE BIOMASS", Johnson, W. F., Hlndln, E.,
Vfater and Sevage Worts. Vol. 119, Ho. 10, October 1972, PP 95-97.
A study was instituted at Washington State University to determine the
extent to which arsenic species are removed by the activated sludge process through
bioconcentration of arsenic compounds by the biota. The response of activated sludge
biota to three concentration levels was Investigated: (l) the background concentration
or that concentration of arsenic species present In the primary settled sevage feed;
(2) an arsenic fortified feed having a concentration of approximately Uo mlcrograms
As/1; and (3) a fortified feed having a concentration of approximately 130 mlcrograms
As/1. The influent to the aeration basin, effluent from the clarlfier and the return
activated sludge were sampled every other day. All samples were digested to liberate
arsenic from organically bound arsenic compounds using the method described in
Standard Methods. The total arsenic content of each sample was analyzed using the
silver dlethyldlthlocarbamate method. In order to check the validity of the data using
the acid digestion and silver dlethyldlthlocarbamate methods, a portion of every fourth
sample was analyzed by neutron activation. Only the blomass samples were acid-digested
prior to neutron activation analysis. The chemical oxygen demand was determined by
the Acld-Olchromate method. A decrease in the chemical oxygen demand (COD) of the
Influent occurred during the second concentration level period because of a modification
in the sevage treatment plant's operation. The activated sludge biota removed arsenic
species from the influent through assimilation and adsorption. As the total arsenic
concentration of the Influent Increased so did the quantity of arsenic in the biomass.
It can be concluded that for each mlcrogram of total arsenic per liter of influent,
approximately 0,7 to 2 mlcrograms of total arsenic vllj be found per gram of dried
weight blomass. A correlation exists between the concentration of total arsenic in
__
AMIC-g337
"EFFECTS OF AN ORGANOPHOSPHORUS INSECTICIDE ON THE PHYTOPLANKTOH, ZOOPLANKTON, AND INSECT
POPULATIONS OF FRESH -WATER PONDS", Hurlbert, S. H., Mulla, M. S., Willson, H. R.,
Ecological Monographs. Vol. U2, No. 3, Summer 1972, PP 269-299.
Dursban, an organophosphorus insecticide, was applied on June 3, June 18, and
July 1, to eight shallow (2U-cm) experimental ponds near Bakersfleld, California. Four
ponds were treated at 0.028 kg/ha, four were treated at 0.28 kg/ha, and four were kept
as controls. Phytoplankton, zooplankton, and insect populations were sampled on 21
dates. Insect larvae and nymphs were more reduced in numbers than were Insect adults.
Twenty-four-hour posttreatment samples for the second and third, but not first,
treatments showed greater reductions of predaceous (Notonectldae, Dytlscldae,
Coenagrlonldae, larval Hydrophllldae) and much slower recovery to control -pond levels
than of 'herbivorous' (Corlxldae, Baetldae, adult Hydrophilldae) Insect populations.
Initially, Cyclops vernalis and Moina mlcrura were the only crustacean zooplanktcn
both e
present, and
experienced high mortality due to treatments. Recovery in low dose
ponds waa variable, requiring 1-3 weeks, and in high dose ponds occurred only 3-6 week
after the final treatment. Populations of Diaptomus pallidus seemed unaffected by the
lower rate of treatment, but became large only after Cyclops populations had been reduced
by the Insecticide or other factors. Cerlodaphnla sp. became abundant In late July or
early August In all four control ponds but not in any treated ponds. Herbivorous
rotifers, principally In the genera Brachlonus. Polyarthra. Hexarthra. Fllinla and
TylpleuchlanlB. increased dramatically, often five- to twenty fold, within 1-3 days after
Moina and Cyclops populations were decimated by Dursban, but became abundant In control
ponds only during the brief absence of Moina In early July. All planktonlc rotifers,
except Polyarthra. were more abundant in treated than In control ponds; all
-------
2. BTniflflTCAL METHODS
AMIC-6337 (Continued)
Card 2/2
Platylas, Lepadella,
benthlc-littoral rotifers (e.g., Leetne. Monostyla, Trlpleuchlanls
Testudlnella) were nore abundant In control than In treated porulsT The predaceous
rotifer Asplanchna brightweLll vas 35 times more abundant In treated than In control
ponds, feeding primarily on herbivorous rotifers, sometimes on
_ _ DiaptomuB, Molna
and large algae, and rarely on small mayfly (Baetldae) nymphs ami chlronomla larvae.
Asplanchna populations were composed of three morphotypes, anpulllform, cruciform, and
campanulifonn, the last of which tended to be highly cannibalistic. The reduction of
herbivorous crustaceans by Oursban and the restraint of herbivorous rotifers by
Asplanehana predatlon permitted the rapid increase of phytoplankton populations in
treated ponds and, even 6 weeks after the last treatment, the phytoplankton vas two and
16 times more abundant In low dose and high dose ponds, respectively, than In control
ponds. Blooms of blue-green algie (Anabaena, Anabaenopsls) developed In three high dose
and one low dose pond, and a bloom of the diatom Synedra developed in one low dose pond,
The long-splned alga Schroederla setigera seemed favored by high Molna and Dlaptomis
populations and low Cyclops populations. The significance of these results for
Insect-control programs Is discussed.
*.
INDEX TERMS: Phytoplankton, Zoopl&nkton, Aquatic Insects, Ponds, Water pollution
effects, Phosphothlate pesticides, Pesticide toxiclty, Rotifers, Crustaceans,
Herbivores, Predation, Eutrophlcatlon, Benthlc fauna, Sediments, Animal
populations, Plant populations, Animal physiology, Mortality, Resistance, Aquatic
algae. Plant physiology, Dursban, Recovery, Macrolnvertebrates.
AtdC-6338 (Continued)
Card 2/2
Adult 0. slgma (but not B. bicaudatus) undertook a definite upstream mlcmtlon
estimated at 2-3 km. ThTs flight of adults resulted In a concentrated depos5tion of
eggs In the upper reaches of the stream. The advantage of the upstream flight may be
that it stores reproductive products In areas where they are relatively safe from
effects of anchor ice during winter and of floods in late winter and early spring.
INDEX TERMS: Aquatic Insects, Secondary productivity, Environmental effects, Aquatic
drift. Life history studies, Limiting factors, Growth rates, Spatial distribution,
Migration, Mayflies, Caddlsflies, Animal populations, Ollgophlebodes slgma,
Baetls bicaudatus. Drift organisms.
AMIC-6338
"DRIFT AND PRODUCTION OF WO AQUATIC INSECTS IN A MOUNTAIN STREAM", Pearson. W. D.,
Kramer, R. H., Ecological Monographs, Vol. 1*2, No. 3, Summer 1972, pp 365-385.
The relationships between drift rates, population density, production rates,
key environmental factors, and movements of adults were studied in two populations of
stream Insects, the caddlsfly 0]Igpphle'bodes sign* and the mayfly Baetls bicaudatus.
Samples of benthle invertebrates (U2U total) were collected every 20 days at four
stations on Temple Fork of the Logan River, Utah, from October 1967 to September 1969.
Samples of drift Invertebrates (181 total) were collected every 1U days at three station;
on Temple Fork during the same period. During June-September a day and a night drift
sample (681 total) were collected every other day. Drift rates of 0. slgma larvae were
greatest (5,987 g/year) when blomass in the benthos (2.56 g/sq m) and production (U.30
g/sq m per year) were greatest. Total production (dry weight) of 0. Sigma larvae in the
stream (bottom area equals 29,1)87 sq m) was 89.0 kg In 1968 and 6oTB itgin 1969. Total
production of B. bieaudatus nymphs was 1*1.3 kg in 1968 and 39-8 kg in 1969. Drift rates
of 0. sigma larvae were related directly to blomass In the benthos over an entire year.
DriTt rates of 0. slgca and B. bicaudatus were not related directly to density expressed
as numbers/area'ln the benthos. Drift rates were correlated positively and significantly
(r equals 0.78 and 0.55 for day drift of 0. sigaa and B. bicaudatus. respectively) with
density during the months of June-September for both 0? signa larvae and B. bicaudatus
nymphs. Discharge, distance below the spring source of Temple Fork, and densities of
competing aquatic Insects were other factors of significance in the multiple-regression
analyses of factors affecting drift rates of two Insects. The 17 or 18 Independent
variables used In the multiple-regression analyses accounted for 65 percent and 55 per-
cent of the variability In dny drift rates of 0. slgaa and B. biceudqtus, respectively.
_
AMIC-6362
"ANALYSIS OF INSECT TROPHIC DIVERSITY IN WO SALT MARSH COMMUNITIES", Cameron, C. N.,
Ecology. Vol. 53i No. 1, Winter 1972, pp 58-73-
This study analyzes trophic relationships of the Insect component of two
Intertldal salt marsh communities dominated by Salleomla paclflca and Spartlna
folloaa, respectively. Seasonallty of that component Is determined and influence of
physical mlcroenvlronmental factors on trophic diversity Is assessed. Adult insect
populations were monitored weekly, trophic diversity was computed, and relationships
with primary production and litter accumulation were quantified. Temporal diversity
trends were similar in both communities although the amplitude was sllgitly greater
in Sallcornia. In both communities, herbivore diversity was highest during the
spring months while saprovore diversity was highest during midwinter. Predator
diversity responded to both herbivore and saprovore diversity, although It was more
closely tied to herbivore fluctuations in Sallcornia. Standing crop blomass was
maximum during October and litter accumulation was highest during January.
Two classes of adult Insects occurred: persistent species, representing a low
percentage of the total species compliment, were present as adults throughout the
year in both marsh communities; seasonal species, on the other hand, were present as
adults only during the growing season. Seasonal succession in species of herbivores
and saprovores reflected productlonal and transformational changes In plant matter;
predators responded likewise, but more impressive was the numerical response to prey
populations by particular predators. Correlations were.- high between each trophic
group and its respective resource. Physical mlcroenvlronmental factors, especially
temperature and vapor pressure deficit, seemed to be Important In cuing larval
development, but did not exert a dramatic effect on adult diversity trends. Several
strategies of habitat utilization are considered. It is hypothesized that the
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6362 (Continued)
Card 8/8
persistent and seasonal species hive evolved as specialists to avoid competitive
interactions and maximize resource utilization. During annual expansion of resource
states, the salt marsh Insect component undergoes 'species packing* wherein additional
species enter the system temporarily to utilize the expanded resource base.
INDEX TERMS: Insects, Trophic level, Salt marshes, Food habits. Tidal marshes,
Biological communities, Primary productivity, Blomass, Predatlon, Blolndlcators,
Intertidal areas. Herbivores, Standing crops, Systematlcs, Secondary productivity,
Species diversity, Saprovores, Sallcornla paciflca, Spartlna follosa. Seasonal
variations, Hacrophytes.
"FCB RESIDUES IN ATLANTIC ZOOPLANXTON", Rlsebrough, R. W., Vreeland, V.,
Harvey, G. R., Mlklas, H. P., Carmlgnanl, G. M., Bulletin of Environmental
Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 8, No. 6, pp 3"»5-355, December 1972.
The results of measurements of FCB and other chloilrmted hydrocw'• •••»• BI\
presented for zooplankton samples from the Atlantic Ocean. The samples woe
during 3 cruises of the R/V Atlantis II of the Woods Hole Oceanographlc Institution
with a No. 6 mesh plankton net. Immediately after collection, the plankton was
transferred to polycarbonate or glass Jars and frozen. Samples were prepared for gas
chromatographic analysis by extraction In hexane. Dry and lipid weight determinations
were also made. FCB In the zooplanKton from the stations on the continental shelf and
slope ranged from 2.U to 260 ppra, with a median value of approximately Uo ppm. Median
percent llpld weight of dry weight was 3-6 percent. On a dry and wet weight basis,
representative concentrations In zooplankton from the shelf and slope areas would be In
the order of 1.3 ppm and 0.13 ppm, respectively. Collections from the North Atlantic
contained high concentrations of FCB, ranging from 0.007 to O.U5 ppm on a wet weight
basis. Residues of p,p'J)DT and p,p'-DDE were found to be in the range of less than
0.00001-0.08 ppm and 0.00007-7.0 ppm, respectively.
INDEX TERMS: Polychlorlnated blphenyls. Pesticide residues, Zooplankton, Atlantic
Ocean, Pollutant identification. Chemical analysis, DDT, Chlorinated hydrocarbon
pesticides, Absorption, Marine animals. Insecticides, Gas chromatography,
Sampling, Solvent extractions, p p'DDT, p p'DDE, Isomers, Sample preparation.
AMIC-6393
"INSECTICIDE TOLERANCES OF TWO CRAYFISH POPULATIONS (PROCAMBARUS ACUTUS)
IN SOUTH-CENTRAL TEXAS", Albaugh, D. W., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination
and Toxicology. Vol. 8, No. 6, p 33^-338, December 1972.
Five consecutive bloassays were carried out on Procambarus acutus to
determine levels of tolerance to DDT, toxaphene, and methyl parathion, and to compare
the tolerance of specimens from an area of Intensive insecticide use with that of
specimens from an area where use wae minimal. Equal numbers of male and female
specimens were subjected to each insecticide treatment and crayfish from both areas
were tested at 3.5 concentrations of each pesticide in each bloasaay. The WJ-hr
LC50 values for DDT, methyl parathion, and toxaphene were 2.1*, l.U, and 1.5 times
greater, respectively, for animals from the area of high use than for those from the
area of low insecticide use. For crayfish from the clean area, DDT and methyl
parathion had similar toxiclty, but the LC50 for toxaphene was more than 20 times
greater.
INDEX TERMS: Bioassay, Crayfish, DDT, Resistance, Pesticide toxiclty, Water pollution
effects. Crustaceans, Invertebrates, Insecticides, Chlorinated hydrocarbon
pesticides, Organophosphorus pesticides, Phosphothloate pesticides. Aquatic
animals, Texas, Toxaphene, Methyl parathion, Procambarus acutus, Macrolnverte-
hrates. Decapods, Arthropods.
AMIC-6396
"MIREX RESIDUES IN WILD POPULATIONS OF TOE EDIBLE RED CRAWFISH (PROCAMBARUS CLARK1)",
Markln, G. P., Ford, J. H., Hawthorne, J. C., Bulletin of Envlronmental Contamination
and Toxicology. Vol. 8, Ho. 6, December 1972, PP 3&9-371*.
Red crawfish from southcentral Louisiana were analyzed In order to determine
If ralrex residues In specimens from treated areas are beginning to reach those levels
found to affect crawfish under laboratory conditions. Crawfish samples were washed to
remove adhering materials, ground and mixed In a blender, a 50-gram subsample extracted
In organic solvents, and analyzed by electron capture gas chroma tography. Samples were
also analyzed for DDT and Its metabolites (TEE, DDE), ehlordnne, Toxaphene, and
Aroclor 1260. The level of detection was 0.01 ppm. DDT residues ranged from
0.02-O.W* ppm while mlrex residues were barely detectable. PCB residues were detected
in few Instances and 0.11 ppm chlordane was detected In one sample. No results are
given for TEE, DDE, toxaphene or Aroclor 1260. There is no real evidence that the
Insecticide mlrex has any significant effect on crawfish populations.
INDEX TERMS: Crawfish, Pesticide residues, Crustaceans, Invertebrates, Insecticides,
DDT, Gas chromatography. Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Polychlorlnated
blphenyls. Solvent extractions. Chemical analysis, Pesticide toxiclty, Water
pollution effects, TDE, DDE, Mlrex, Procambarus clarkl, Aroclor 1260, Sample
preparation, Chlordane, Toxaphene, Detection limits, Arthropods, Nbcrolnvertebratos
Decapods, Electron capture gas chromatography, Metabolites.
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6U01
"HETEROTHOHIJC NITRIFICATION IN SAMPLES OF NATURAL ECOSYSTEMS", Verstraete, Willy,
Alexander, Martin, Environmental Science and Technology, Vol. 7, No. 1, January
1973. PP 39-1*.
Since studies of axenic cultures of a nitrifying stain of Arthrobacter
revealed that hydroxylamJne, hydroxalc acid, 1-nltrosoethanol, nitrate, and nitrite
were excreted, an investigation was begun to determine whether this or physiologically
related species could bring about the same type of nitrification in natural
environments. Products of the reaction and their persistence in samples taken from
several different ecosystems were also determined. Samples (200 ml) of different
aquatic environments (sewage, river water, lake water, soil) were enriched with sodium
acetate and ammonium sulfate to concentrations of 3.0 mg C/ml and 1.0 N/ml and
Incubated on a rotary shaker (120 rpm). Hydroxylamlne, 1-nitrosethanol, nitrite, and
nitrate were formed in samples of sewage, river water, lake water, and soils amended
with ammonium and acetate. A- carbon source was needed for the occurrence of this
pattern of nitrification, which is apparently heterotrophlc. Of the carbon sources
tested, only acetate and succlnate supported this newly described kind of
nitrification. The data suggest that the active microorganisms nitrify at neutral
pH values under conditions which do not promote abundant growth of other heterotrophs,
but in environments that allowed luxuriant mlcroblal proliferation, these
microorganisms competed successfully and nitrified only at ilkaline pH values.
Hydroxylamlne was rapidly inactivated in sewage ind In soil, whereas 1-nltrosoethanol
was quite persistent In aqueous solutions but disappeared rapidly from soil.
INDEX TERMS: Nitrification, Ecosystems, Aquatic bacteria, Aquatic environment. Nitrogen
compounds, Sewage sludge, Freshwater, Enrichment, Arthrobucter, Heterotrophlc
AMIC-6U08
"TEnECTAHCE AND TRAHSMHTAHCE CHARACTERISTICS OP SELECTED GHEEN AK1> BLUE-CKlTEN
UHIAICAE'l Gramma, L. C., Boyle, W. C., Water Research, Vol. 6, Ho. 12, December 1972,
pp 1I>33-1W*.
An evaluation was made at the reflectance and tranemlttance characteristics
of Selenastrum. Chlorella, Mlcrocyatla. and Anabaena in the spectral region between
0.375 and O.tt micron. Specifically, the reflectance properties were elvaluated to
determine the feasibility of using selected wavelengths for differentiation between
the selected green and blue-green algae. In addition, efforts were made to establish
selected wavelength s and ratios which would delineate relative concentrations of the
algal suspensions. Attenuation coefficients were calculated at selected wavelengths
under conditions of the experiment. The effects of nutrient stress and suspended silica
dioxide (S102) particles on the reflectance and transmittance properties were also
examined. Three of the unlalgal cultures were suspended In Corham's media and placed
in front of two *tOW-120V daylight fluorescent lamps; Allen's media was used for
Chlorella. The two spectral properties were measured using a Gamma Scientific 2020 SR
spectrophotometer system. Suspended solids were obtained by volumetrlcally filtering
the algal suspensions through tared pre-dried Mllllpore filters and prefliter pads.
Turbidity was measured and chlorophyll a and phosphorus analysis were made. It was
possible to qualitatively differentlate~blue-green unlalgae from green unialgae by using
the ratio of the reflectance at 625 and £50 nm. The vnlue of this ratio was less than
1.0 for the blue-green algae and greater than 1.0 for the green algae. The quantitative
assessment of algal concentration, based on the spectral reflectance characteristics,
requires that specific calibration curves be developed In the normal range of
concentration expected for each species, because of the unique spectral reflectance
AMIC-6U03
'GROWTH RATE DETERMINATIONS OF THE M/VCROPHYTE ULVA IN COHTIHUOUS CULTURE", Walte,
T. D., Splelman, L. A., Mitchell, R., Environmental Science and Technology, Vol. 6,
No. 13, December 1972, PP 1096-1100.
Continuous culture experiments were run with the benthic macrophyte Ulva
lactuea. Using oxygen evolution as a monitor of photosynthesis and dry weight
determinations for bionass synthesis, growth rates and stoichlometrlc growth constants
were evaluated. The data showed that the ratio of oxygen production to algal mass
synthesis is relatively Independent of nutrient concentration and growth rate, but Is
affected by light Intensity. The data also showed that the amount of oxygen evolved
per unit of algal material was almost a factor of 10 higher than is predicted from
carbohydrate synthesis. It appears that Ulva is capable of synthesizing compounds with
carbon oxidation states of plus 1 or plus 2, thus estimates of bionass synthesis may be
In error when the average algal material is assumed to be carbohydrate.
INDEX TERMS: (ferine algae, Chlorophyta, Growth rates. Cultures, Plant growth,
Photosynthesis, Bionass, Growth kinetics, Ulva lactuea. Continuous cultures.
Microphytes.
AMIC-6U08 (Continued)
Card 2/2
properties exhibited by each alga. The addition of S102 resulted in false reflectance
readings. Removal of phosphorus from the growth media resulted In a loss of chlorophyll
fi in the test algae. It was not possible to differentiate between the phosphorus-poor
blue-green and green algae by using the ratio, 625:650 nm.
INDEX TERMS: Chlorella, Anabaena, Physical properties, Aquatic algae, Chlorophyta,
Cyanophyta, Cultures, Spectrophotometry, Turbidity, Suspended solids. Chlorophyll,
Phosphorus, Nutrient removal, Selenastrum, Mlcrocystls, Reflectance,
Transmittance, Culture media. Chlorophyll a, Spectral reflectance, Interference.
37
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMXC-ftll
"REEK CONTROL EUTROPHICATION OF BALATOH LAKE", Toth, L., Water Research. Vol. 6,
Ho. 12, December 1972, pp 1533-1539-
As part of a study on the eutrophlcatlon of Lake Balaton, information is
presented on the sewage discharged from the sewage purification plants at Tlhany,
Balatonfuered, and Keszthely into lake Balaton directly and through stands of reed.
Samples of effluent were filtered through Sartorlus membrane with a pore size of 0.1*5
micron, and determinations were made of organic nitrogen and phosphorus. The measure-
ments performed at Balatonfuered and Tlhany show that In July, i.e. in the period of
small load (Balatonfuered: total P equals 5.28 ppm, total H equals 30.'t ppm, Tlhany:
total P equals U.50 ppm, total N equals 19.97 ppm) and In August, In the period of maxi-
mum load (Balatonfuered: total P equals 6,25 ppm, total N equals 1*5.U ppm) the phospho-
rus and nitrogen content of the sewage effluent which flows through the reeds Is consume
by the organisms living there (the living coating of reed stalks, -Igae, bacteria, etc.)
and only small amounts of it get Into the lake from the side of the reeds bordering on
open water (Tlhany: total P equals 0.081 and 0.01 ppm, total N equals 0.8l and 0.78 ppm)
With regard to lake protection two conflicting observations were made. The H"kr is
said to be protected by the reeds only during one season, as In the autumn when the
reeds die down. The materials retained by them are mixed with lake water by waveactlon.
On the other hand, the food materials discharged into the reeds and stabilized in the
bodies of the living organisms there which are either eaten by fish or leave the water
for dry land, might decrease the trophic grade of the lake. The optimal quantity of
reedy areas in Lake Balaton should be determined because the reeds are Important in
protecting the water quality of the lake.
AMIC-6U16
"TOXICm OF CHEMICALS IN PAPER FACTORY EFFLUENTS"
Vol. 6, Ho. 12, December 1972, pp 1585-1568.
Norup, B., Water Research,
Pentachlorophenol (PCP), a comnon toxic substance discharged from pulp and
paper factories, was compared with mercuric compounds, and Its effect on fish resistance
was investigated at sublethal PCP-levels. Female guppies (Leblstes retlculatus).
acclimated for at least 5 days at 2b plus or minus 0.5 C, were placed in aerated glass
tanks in groups of 5-10 per mg Na-PCP. The resistance of the guppy to the sodium salt,
Ha-PCP, has been shown to increase after acclimation to sublethal levels (1 ppm). The
mean survival time of the guppy placed in 5 ppm Na-PCP after accllmitlon changed
significantly from 65 mln to 10U mln. Such resistance may lead to Increased tolerance
of accumulated PCP In the organism where severe metabolic distortions, delayed sexual
maturity and Increased mortality may result. The guppy has been shown to have the
fastest reaction and the greatest tolerance among fish. It has been demonstrated by
this research that PCP is as toxic to fish as the dangerous, previously used sllmlcldes
containing mercury, and less efficient as a controllant of slime organisms and that the
use of PCP should be restricted in a manner similar to mercuric compounds to ensure
the survival of fish life downstream from paper manufacturing processes.
INDEX TERMS: Effluents, Pulp and paper industry, Vater pollution effects. Industrial
wastes, Toxiclty, Fish, Freshwater fish. Resistance, Bloassay, Laboratory tests,
Mercury, Fish physiology, Pentachlorophenol, Leblstes reticulatus, Sodium
pentachlorophenolate, Guppy, Sllmicldes, Phenols, Chlorinated hydrocarbons.
Sodium pentachlorophenate. Mercury compounds, Hedian survival time.
AMIC-6UU (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Sewage treatment. Effluents, Water pollution control, Aquatic plants, Water
pollution sources. Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Eutrophlcatlon, Water quality control,
Reeds, Balaton Lake, Hungary, Microphytes.
AMIC-6U18
"A NEW SIMPLE WATER FLOW SYSTEM FOR ACCURATE CONTINUOUS FLOW TESTS", Granmo, A.,
Kollberg, S. 0., Water Research. Vol. 6, No. 12, December 1972, pp 1597-1599.
A new simple water flow system is described for use in tests on living organisms
In which a continuous controlled flow of water must be utilized. The entire system is
made of Perspex plastic. A constant water level Is maintained via an overflow and the
outlets consist of nozzles screwed onto threaded tubes. By screwing a tube up or down
the distance changes and also the velocity of discharge. By this method it Is possible
to make an adjustment of up to approximately 10 per cent In the rate of flow. Other
rates of flow can be obtained simply by replacing the nozzles by others with q
cross-section area corresponding to the desired rate. The system can be used for rate
of flow ranging from mlllltres to litres, and has proved to be accurate and easy to
handle. A diagram and description of construction of the water flow system are
provided.
INDEX TERMS: Bloassay, Laboratory equipment, Design, Construction, Flow, Research
equipment, Flow rates, Continuous flow system, Accuracy.
38
-------
AMIC-61*23
'^QUANTIFICATION OF THE EFFECTS OF RATE OF TEMPERATURE CHANCE ON AQUATIC BIOTA",
Speaknan, J. N., Krenkel, P. A., Water Research. Vol. 6, No. 11, November 1972,
pp 1283-1290.
Tests were conducted with bluegllls to determine the effect of various rates of
temperature change such is might result from heated vater discharges. After
acclimatization to temperatures ranging from 5-30 C, groups of ten fish were subjected
to various rates of temperature rise. The test chamber consisted of a shell and tank
arrangement which kept the heat transfer medium Isolated from the test medium to avoid
heavy metal contamination. A heat pump cooler and an immersion heater positioned Inside
a 3-lnch pipe discharging into the shell and controlled by a propartlonal-lntegral-
derlvative controller provided the proper temperatures. The controller was also
equipped with a cam-type programmer which allowed the programming of any rate of
temperature change. The rate of temperature change at which 50 percent of the fish
survived, for a given combination of acclimation and final temperatures, was defined as
the median rate limit, KL sub m. Values were also obtained for 99 percent survival.
The results show that rate of temperature IB an Important factor in the survival of
bluegllls subjected to rises from 5-30 C, 10-30 C, and 5-25 C and decreases from 30-5 C,
30-10 C, and 25-5 C. Lethal rates of temperature increase were at least 20 tines the
corresponding lethal rates for decreases, thus corroborating prior conclusions that
rapidly onaettlng low temperatures constitute an Important threat to fish survival.
The results of these tests were combined with shock and chronic data to produce a
three-dimensional representation of the temperature tolerance of bluegills. The figure
can be used to determine situations In which fish may encounter lethal rates of
temperature change.
"THE EFFECTS OF FLUORIDE ON ESTUARINE ORGANISMS", Hemens, J., Warwick, R.
Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 11, November 1972, pp 1301-1308.
J.,
Experiments to determine the possible effects of fluoride discharged In the
effluent from an «i"min»m smelter on the fauna and flora of the receiving estuary in
ytmHij South Africa shoved no toxic effects on three species of fish (Juvenile
mullet, Ambassls safgha, and Therapon Jarbua) and two species of penaeld prawns
[Penaeus Indlcus and Penaeus monodon) during 96 h exposure at concentrations up to 100
mg F per liter. The brown mussel Perna perna showed evidence of toxic effects after 5
days exposure at a concentration of 7.2 mg per liter. Long-term (72 days) exposure In
reclrculated outdoor laboratory estuary models without external food supply and with
2.0 percent salinity and 52 mg F per liter shoved physical deterioration and Increased
mortality in the millet Mugtl cephalus and the crab Tylodlplax blepharlakloa and the
reproductive processes of the shrimp Palaemon paclflcus appeared to be adversely
affected. Bel grass and algae grown In the models shoved no evidence of fluoride
accumulation but all the introduced animals accumulated fluoride, the highest
concentration of 77^3 microns F per g ash being reached in the mullet compared to
1U8.1 In the control system. It was concluded that fluoride was accumulated mainly
from the vater and not via the food materials.
INDEX TERMS: Bloassay, Toxicity, Fluorides, Industrial wastes. Crabs, Mullets, Mussels,
Algae, Eel grass, Prawns, Bioaccumulatlon.
AMIC-6U23 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Bloassay, Thermal pollution, Sunflanes. Thermal powerplants. Laboratory
equipment, Lethal limit, Control systems. Rate of temperature change, Lepomis
maerochlruB.
AMC-6U26
"BACTERIAL AND ALGAL CHLOROPHYLL IN TWO SALT LAKES m VICTORIA, AUSTRALIA",
Hussalny, S. [}., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 11, November 1972, PP 1361-1365.
Water samples vere collected at depths of 1, 2, 3, 5» 10, and 20 a from
Lake Cnotuk and at 10 m from Lake Kellambete (Australia) and analyzed for total
dissolved solids, algal chlorophyll, and bacterial chlorophyll. Solids vere estimated
gramnetrlcally; algal chlorophyll was determined by filtering the sample, extracting
with acetone, and recording the optical density; bacterial chlorophyll was estimated
by applying a provisional equation derived by Takahashi and Ichinura to the optical
density data. Total dissolved solids concentrations vere 59.3 and 60.2 g per 1 for
Lakes Kellambete and Gnotuk, respectively. The standing crops of autotrophlc sulphur
bacteria In terms of bacterial chlorophyll vere found to be In larger quantities than
algal chlorophyll a. Both at the surface and at the bottom, bacterial chlorophyll was
about ten tines as much as algal chlorphyll a. Their population in smaller quantities
at other depths may be due to the heavy grazing by the zooplankton. It is suggested
that the bacteria may be a good food source for the zooplankton. It is also suggested
that the deep orange pigmentation in the Copepoda may be due to their grazing on the
pink bacteria.
INDEX TERMS: Water analysis. Chlorophyll, Algae, Bacteria, Dissolved solids.
Distribution patterns, Optical density, Graanetrlc analysis.
39
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC- 6*33
"EFFECT OF INDUSTRIAL WASTES ON OXIDATION POND PERFORMANCE", Moshe, M., Betzer, N.,
Kbtt, Y., Hater Research. Vol. 6, No. 10, October 1972, pp 1165-1171.
Cadmium, copper, nickel, zinc, and hexavalent chromium Ions were tested In a
bench-bloassay experiment for toxlcity limits and possible application to experimental
oxidation ponds. Domestic sewage was placed Into test tubes where predetermined
concentrations of metal Ions were added together with known Initial concentrations of
Chlorella aoroklnlana. The test tubes were Incubated under controlled Illumination
(1500 IxJ at 29 C.Before and after Incubation conform counts (MPN) were carried out
according to Standard Methods (1965). Algal counts vere performed using a haenocytonet&ts
Experimental ponds of 50-70 1 volume vere fed with diluted domestic sewage (BOD equal
200 mg/1). Predetermined quantities of metal salts had been previously added to give
the desired concentration of metal Ions In the inflowing sewage. At the final stage of
the study, an aquarium of 80 1 capacity was operated as experimental pond. To this
pond a mixture of metal ions (Cr, Cd, Cu, Ni, and Zn) was Introduced, beginning with
3 og/1 and Increasing to 12 mg/1 of each Ion. Samples taken from the ponds were
subjected to the following testa: pH, dissolved oxygen, BOD, MPN, algal count and
determination of metal Ion concentration. The samples were taken from the influent,
effluent and bottom sludge. It was found that the metal ions are toxic. Inhibiting
Chlorella growth. However, when added at concentrations of 0.5-1.5 mg/1 to Influent
of oxidation ponds, the ponds continued to operate normally. Higher concentrations of
3 and 6 mg/1 did not affect adversely pond performance - not even a concentration of
6 gm/i of each Ion (a total metal Ion concentration of 30 mg/1). A mixture of 60
mg/1 metal Ions brought about a decrease in algal numbers and caused a sharp drop in
dissolved oxygen concentration. It is believed that since high pH causes metal ions
AMIC-6U35
"BIOLOGICAL EFFECTS AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES IN THE MARINE ENVIRONMENT OF ALIPHATIC
CHLORINATED BY-PRODUCTS FROM Vim. CHLORIDE PRODUCTION", Jernelov, A., Rosenberg, R.,
Jensen, S., Water Research. Vol. 6, No. 10, October 1972, pp llBl-1191.
EDC-tar, a mixture of short-chained aliphatic hydrocarbons formed as a
byproduct of vinyl chloride production, has been dumped into the North and Norwegian
Seas. A study was conducted to determine the behavior of some components of the
EDC-tar In the marine environment. Results are presented for physical properties,
biological accumulation from water and food and excretion In fish, as well as some
biological effects (e.g. genetic effects and sensitivity of some organisms during
different stages of their life cycle). Dumped into the sea, EDC-tar has a tendency to
disperse and to adhere to particles. The accumulation In marine animals via
EDC-contaminated seawater Is rapid and an accumulation factor of 2900 was estimated for
shrimps (Leander adapersus) exposed to 0.01 ppm EDC-tar for U8 h. Accumulation via
water has been found to be higher than vie a food chain. On the other hand,
accumulation of the low molecular compounds of the EDC-tar is highest via water,
whereas the high molecular compounds show the highest accumulation via a food chain.
Accumulation in cod fed with EDC-contaminated shrimp was higher in liver than in muscle.
Excretion was rapid When feeding was discontinued.
INDEX TERMS: Physical properties, Bloassay, Food chains. Marine environment, Water
pollution effects. Animal physiology, Cytologlcal studies, Shrimp, Mussels,
Absorption, Adsorption, Animal behavior, Dispersion, Hatching, Bioaccumulation,
Pollutant effects, EDC-tar, Biological effects, Excretion, Aliphatic hydrocarbons,
Plaice, Cod (fish), Half life, Barnacles, Starfish, Polychaetes.
AMIC-6U33 (Continued)
Card 2/2
to precipitate, oxidation ponds operating normally above pH 3.0 will tolerate metal
ions In sewage containing Industrial wastes for a long time before sludge accumulation
will effect pond performance.
INDEX TERMS: Bloassay, Heavy metals. Oxidation lagoons, Toxicity, Industrial wastes,
Cadmium, Copper, Nickel, Zinc, Chromium, Aquatic algae, Laboratory tests, Mater
pollution effects. Inhibition, Growth rates, Chlorella soroklnlana. Pollutant
effects.
AMIC-6^36
"SOME ASPECTS OF THE QUANTITATIVE ECOLOGY OF MERCURY", Farfsrstrom, T., Jernelov, A.,
Water Research. Vol. 6, No. JO, October 1972, pp 1193-1202.
The principal ways of transformation of mercury in aquatic ecosystem are
discussed. The mercury transformations include: (1) formation of HgS, (2) conversion
of HgS, (3) formation and oxidation of elementary Hg, (It) formation of complexes
between divalent mercury and organic substances and the release of Hg therefrom,
(5) formation of mercury-Inorganic material complexes of the silica- and
ferro-manganese-type, (6) release of soluble mercury from complexes, and (7) formation
and degradation of methylmereury and dlmethylmercury. The quantitative influences on
these processes of some physico-chemical and biological factors are demonstrated from
field Investigations and laboratory experiments. A dynamic model for the transport of
methylmercury In a simplified llmnlc food-chain is outlined.
INDEX TERMS: Mercury, Path of pollutants. Ecosystems, Aquatic environment, Model studies,
Heavy metals, Chelatlon, Organic matter. Oxidation, Oxidation-reduction potential,
Clay minerals, Physicochemieal properties, Environmental effects. Reduction
(chemical). Transformation, Organonercury compounds, Mercury compounds. Mercuric
sulflde, Metal complexes, Methylmercury, Dime thyImercury, Fate of pollutants,
Bio-transformation, Transport.
-------
2. BIOLOQICAL METHODS
AMIC-6U39
"DIVERSITY IN-SOME SOUTH AFRICAN DIATOM'ASSOCIATIONS AND ITS RELATION TO WATER
QUALITY", Archibald, R. E. H., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 10, October 1978,
pp 1229-1238.
Diversity In diatom associations from some South African rivers vas examined
in relation to water quality. Samples of diatom populations were collected by
scraping the diatom film from the mud surface, rocks, and submerged vegetation. These
samples were preserved in U percent formalin and prepared for analysis by cleaning using
an acid technique described by Hustedt (1930). After cleaning, the diatom sample was
spread evenly on a cover slip, dried at room temperature, and finally mounted on a
slide in hyrax. The sample was then examined under oil inmerslon and approximately
bOO diatom individuals counted, recording the species and number of Individuals per
species for each sample. The following diversity Indices were compared: Simpson's
Index, Menhlnlck's Index, and Margalef's Index. Diversity per Individual in the sample
and redunancy, as a measure of the degree of dominance of one or more species In the
populations, were calculated. The simplest index in application, which was as effective
as the others, was the sequential comparison Index. Diversity in the diatom
associations did not consistently follow water quality, and was therefore regarded as a
dubious and sometimes misleading parameter of water quality. The specific composition
of the communities and the autecology of the component species, particularly the
dominants, still remain as the most Important criteria In assessing water quality from
the diatom associations.
INDEX TERMS: Diatoms, Chrysophyta, Biological comnunitles, Plant populations, Water
quality, Aquatic algae, Dominant organisms, Aquatic plants, Chemical properties.
AMC-6U40
'RIFFLE ZOOBENTHOS IN STREAMS RECEIVING ACID MINE DRAINAGE", Koryak, M., Shapiro,
K. A., Sykora, J. L., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 10, October 1972, pp 1239-12U7.
The bottom fauna of a stream polluted by acid mine drainage was studied
using the standard methods of sample collecting. In localities Immediately Influenced
by mine drainage where very low pH values and high acidities prevail, the effect of
acid mine wastes on the ecology and composition of the benthlc fauna Is, In general,
similar to the effect of organic pollution. In these areas high numbers of individuals
comprised of a few species were found. In the zones of active neutralization where iron
hydroxides are deposited, species diversity slightly Increases but the biomass is very
lov. The most, numerous invertebrates in the stream sections exhibiting high acidity
and lov pH are midge larvae, especially Tendlpea gr. rlparius. The number of Insect
groups present increases steadily with progressive neutralization until Crustacea
[Amphipoda) and Ollgochaeta appear, indicating considerable improvement in water quality,
The supply of desirable benthic fish food (Tendlpes ssp.) Is very high in the parts of
the stream where lov pH, high acidity, and high ferrous iron concentrations prevail.
Unfortunately, fish cannot survive under these conditions to utilize this abundant food
supply. On the other hand, in the less acidic zones where fish could possibly survive,
the deposition of ferric Iron drastically diminishes the total biomass of benthlc
organisms and therefore severely limits fish populations.
INDEX TERMS: Benthlc fauna, Mine drainage, Acid streams, Invertebrates, Aquatic
animals. Coals, Water pollution effects, Amphipoda, Ollgochaetes, Blomass,
Blolndicators, Aquatic insects, Larvae, Bottom sampling, Chemical analysis,
Water analysis. Receiving waters, Macrolnvertebrates.
AMIC-6U39 (Continued)
Card 2/2
Species diversity, Species diversity index, Sequential comparison Index, Simpson's
index, Menhlnlek's index, Margalef's index. Redundancy, Autecology.
AMC-6W»6
"EFFECTS OP OXATHIIN SYSTEMIC FUNGICIDES ON VARIOUS BIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS", Mathre, D. S.,
Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 8, No. 5, November 1972,
pp
Several bacteria, a slime mold, and Chlorella pyrenoidosa were exposed to
carboxln (5,6-dlhydro-2-methyl-l,U-oxathiln-3-carboxanlllde) and its oxidized products
to determine their toxic effects. In the presence of .0001 M carboxln, the following
bacteria were Inhibited In growth from 0.10 percent: Proteus vulgarls. Bacillus cereus,
Pseudomonaa aeruglnosa. Soeardla rubra, Lactobaelllus eaael, and Azotobaeter ehrooeoeeum.
Streptomyces sp
Sarcina lutea, and Myeobacterium phlei were Inhibited from 10-20
metabolism of C-li-acetate was somewhat more sensitive to .0001 M
percent.
carboxln in that the release of C-1U02 was Inhibited by Jk percent in P. vulgaris
and 37 percent In S. leutea. The development of sporangia-by the slime* mold D.
discoideum was- not~affected by .0001 M carboxln, F&31, or oxycarboxln. Metabolism of
J-ldcetate by Chlorella cells was not inhibited by .0001 M carboxln, F631, or
oxycarboxln. However, photosynthesis was inhibited by 52 percent with .0001 M
carboxln but not with .0001 M FB31 or oxycarboxln.
INDEX TERMS: Toxlclty, Enteric bacteria, Fungicides, Chlorella, Growth rates,
Metabolism, Molds, Photosynthesis, Carboxln, Oxycarboxin, Proteus vulgarls,
Bacillus cereus, Pseudomonaa aeruglnosa, Nocardla rubra, Lactobaelllus easel,
Azotobaeter chroococcum, Streptomyces, Sarcina lutea, Myeobacterium phlei.
-------
BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6526
"PHOSPHORUS IN PRIMARY AQUATIC PLANTS", Fogg, G. E., Water Research. Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2,
January/February 1973, pp 77-91-
A review of the relationships betvucn algae and phosphorus shows that may
species can absorb orthophosphate from solutions containing less than 1 ppm F and, when
phosphorus-deficient, most species arc capable of producing powerful surface or
extracellular phosphatases which enable them to obtain phosphate from a great variety
of inorganic and organic phosphorus compounds, Including synthetic detergents. In the
presence of sufficient phosphate algal cells are able to accumulate a store of
polyphosphate which suffices for several cycles of cell division in the absence of a
further supply. As a result of excretion of phosphates at certain stages of the life
cycle and extracellular phosphatase activity there Is rapid recycling of phosphorus
so that algal activity may be high even when the concentration of free phosphate In
the water is low. Nor must It be forgotten that behavioral patterns may Impose further
complexity. There is evidence that planktonlc blue-green algae possess a buoyance
control mechanism operating via their gas vacuoles that nay enable them to descend at
night to phosphate-rich water at the bottom of the photic zone and rise nearer the
surface in the morning. Because of these complications no clear relationships
between the amount of algal growth and the concentration of phosphate In an aquatic
environment Is to be expected. Because different species have different requirements
for and tolerances towards phosphate, the prevailing concentration of this ion In a
vater body may play an Important part in determining the composition of the flora It
contains. Various simple methods for determining whether phosphate is limiting the
growth of algae are now available and results obtained with these, together with
knowledge of the minimum phosphorus requirements of algae and estimates of the
AMC-6527
"PHOSPHORUS IN MARINE ZOQPLANKEON", Corner, E.
January/February 1973, PP 93-110.
D. S., Water Research, Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2,
In the euphotlc zone, phosphorus compounds dissolved in sea water are
utilized by growing plants, many of which are subsequently eaten by herbivorous
zooplankton and the dietary phosphorus Invested partly In growth and egg production,
partly released in Insoluble form as faecal pellets and partly metabolized. The
fraction metabolized is excreted back into the sea water mainly aa inorganic
phosphate, which is again available as a nutrient for the plants. Quantitative
aspects of this cyclic process are reviewed with particular reference to the Calanold
copepods, animals of central Importance to the marine food web in several sea areas.
The review shows that most of the studies made so far have been concerned with animals
feeding on algal diets. However, it is necessary to know more about the nutrition and
metabolism of carnivorous zooplankton; and there is also a need for further work on
the nutritive value of detritus. Much work has been done on the percentage
assimilation of dietary phosphorus by zooplankton, and the values obtained are generally
high. However, there is a need for further assimilation studies using particularly
large algal cells, as wall as microzooplankton, as the diets; and more information is
needed concerning the assimilation of different phosphorus fractions and individual
phosphorus compounds present in the food. There have been several investigations of
the levels of soluble phosphorus compounds excreted by zooplankton. However, the
precise way in which these substances, particularly 'organic' phosphorus compounds, are
released by the animals deserves more detailed investigation as does the chemical
nature of these 'organic1 phosphorus compounds and their possible use aa nutrients by
phytoplanlrton. The successful culturing of several species of zooplankton In the
AMIC-6526 (Continued)
Card 2/2
AMIC-6527 (Continued)
Card 2/2
phosphorus budget, may enable predictions to be made of »0p>l crops In a given water
body.
INDEX TERMS: Algae, Phosphates, Limiting factors. Growth rates. Absorption,
Orthophosphate s.
laboratory will doubtless pave the way for further studies of the factors affecting
the gross growth efficiency of these animals in terms of phosphorus; and the data
obtained could be useful in the formulation of mathematical models related to the
production of zooplankton in the .sea. -However, there is'also a need for work of a
more biochemical nature, particularly the use of artificial diets In detailed
investigations of zooplankton nutrition and the development of suitable methods for
studying phosphorus metabolism at the tissue and cellular level.
INDEX TERMS: Copepods, Food habits. Food chains. Phosphorus, Absorption, Metabolism,
Excretion, Calanis, Macrolnvertebrates.
1(8
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AJOC-6528
"ROLE OF PHOSPHORUS IN O/TRCmCATIOtf AND DIFFUSE SOURCE CONTROL", Lee, C. F., Water
Research, Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2, January/February 1973, pp 111-128.
Many lakes and some streams and estuaries are showing signs of excessive
fertilization due to the Input of aquatic plant nutrients from man-associated sources.
The key element often found limiting aquatic plant populations Is phosphorus. The
attempt to control phosphorus Input to natural waters as the overall approach for
controlling excessive fertilisation Is technically sound and economically feasible
for many natural raters. However, a much better understanding of the relationship
between the phosphorus Input to a lake and the excessive growths of aquatic plants
within the lake must be developed. This development will require a combined
biological and chemical approach toward assessing the role of phosphorus In
eutrophlcatlon for a specific water body. The biological approach will use tissue
content, enzymatic and kinetic uptake analysis of phosphorus limitations as well as
bloassays of phosphorus availability in order to determine the limiting nutrient for a
body of water. The chemical approach will utilize amounts of each of the forms of
phosphorus present In the lake and the rates of Interchange of phosphorus between
these various forms. There will be some waters where control of phosphorus from
treatment of domestic waste water input and removal of phosphorus from detergents will
not result In significant improvement In water quality* This la because these waters
derive their phosphorus from diffuse sources, such as urban and rural atormwater
drainage, the atmosphere and ground waters. In these Instances, it nay be necessary to
initiate In-lake control of phosphorus by the addition of alum or Iron salts.
AfflC-6531
"THE ROLE OP PHOSPHORUS IN THE GROWTH OF CLADOPHORA", Pltcalrn, C. E. R., Hawkes, H. A.,
Hater Research, Vol. 7, Nos. 1/2, January/February 1973, PP 159-171-
An examination of river survey data showed standing crops of Cladophora to
be correlated with phosphorus concentration. In general, river water containing less
than 1.0 mg/1 total Inorganic P produced only modest growths of Cladophora. Culture
experiments with supplemented river water confirmed the importance of phosphorus by
shoving that growth of Cladophora in waters upstream of sewage discharges, could be
Increased to downstream levels by addition of phosphorus. Growth experiments in
synthetic media containing Levels of phosphorus from 1 to 7 mg/1 indicated no
significant growth Increase above 1 mg P/l but a significant reduction below 1 mg P/l.
In natural water, the mayinnim level of phosphorus for growth was found to vary, being
2.5 mg P/l at 3-2 mg N/l H03 and 0.9? og P/l at 5-25 mg N/l H03. A 3 x U factorial
experiment utilizing synthetic media, confirmed an interaction between nitrogen and
phosphorus. The highest level of N03 (7.7 mg N/l) enhanced growth at the lowest
phosphorus level (0.5 mg P/l) but at higher levels of phosphorus, growth was reduced.
The Importance of such Interactions is discussed briefly in connection with
eutrophlcatlon and nutrient stripping.
INDEX TERMS: Phosphorus, Growth rates, Bioassay, Eutrophlcatlon, Limiting factors.
Water pollution effects, Nitrogen, Standing crops, Cladophora, Culture media.
AMIC-6528 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Eutrophlcation, Phosphates, Lakes, Limiting factors, Water pollution
control, Bioassay, Cycling nutrients. Detergents, Algae, Arsenic, Sediments.
AMIC-6532
EUTROPHICATION AND LOUGH NEAGH", Wood, R. B., Gibson, C. E., Water Research, Vol. 7.
Nos. 1/2, January/February 1973, PP 173-107.
Comparison of biological and chemical characteristics of Lough Heagh
(Ireland) with those of other lakes shows that Lough Neagh is among the most
eutrcphlc of the world's major lakes. Phosphorus appears to be the key factor which
limits the growth of algae. It is estimated that Lough Neagh receives 300 tons of P
per year, 70-80 percent of which is probably from urban and industrial sewage. It IB
concluded that reduction of P content of effluents from sewage works could have a
beneficial effect on the eutrophlc condition of the lake.
INDEX TERMS: Eutrophlcatlon, Water quality, Phosphorus, Limiting factors, Diatoms,
Primary productivity. Industrial wastes, Municipal wastes, Cyanophyta, Lough
Neagh, Chlorophyll a, Macrolnvertebrates.
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL
AMIC-6533
"STIMULATION OF PHTIOPLANKION GROWTH BY MIXTURES OF PHOSPHATE, NITRATE, AND ORGANIC
CHELATOR5", Jordan, R. A., Bender, H. E., Water Research, Vol. 1, Nos. 1/2, January/
February 1973, PP 109-195.
An In situ nutrient enrichment experiment was conducted In vhlch nixed
treatments of nitrate, phosphate, and EDTA vere applied to natural lake phytoplankton
coonunltlcs. Changes In community productivity and species composition la response to
the treatments revealed strong Interactions among the components of the treatment
mixture. On the community level, phosphate exerted a stimulatory effect that was
reduced by EDTA, enhanced by nitrate, and enhanced even more by nitrate and EDTA
together. Examination of 15 Individual species revealed that the treatment effects
uere highly variable from species to species. Seven of the 1$ species vere stimulated
by the nutrient treatments, and the growth patterns of 5 of these accounted for
essentially all of the features of the productivity response patterns. The eight
other species either failed to respond to any treatment or declined In response to
containment or treatments. Phosphate was the key substance in all of the positive
treatment effects, and its omission from the treatment mixture essentially eliminated
all growth responses.
INDEX. TERMS: Nitrates, Phosphates, Growth rates, Bloassay, Primary productivity.
Algae, Diatoms, Crystal Lake, Synedra nana, Fragllerla crotonensls, Synedra
radians, Achnanthes, Synechocystls aquatilus, Rhodomonas minute, Cyclotella
oeellata, Cryptomonas ovata, Cyclotella stelllgera, Pedlastrum boryanum.
"LOWER pH LIMIT FOR THE EXISTENCE OF BLUE-CREEB AICAE: EVOLUTIONARY AND ECOLOGICAL
IMPLICATIOHS", Brock, T. D., Science. Vol. 179, Ho. 1*078, February 2, 1973, PP "»80-U83.
Observations on a vide variety of acidic environments, both natural and
, reveal that blue-green algae (Cyanophyta) are completely absent from
By
habitats In vhlch the pH Is less than U or 5, vhereaa eukaryotlc algae flourlab.
using enrichment cultures with inocula from habitats of various pH values, the
absence of blue-green algae at low pH was confirmed. The ecological Implications of
the conclusions are clear. Blue-green algal blooms should never occur In acid lakes,
and the pollution of lakes and streams with acid mine drainage should eliminate
blue-green algae from these waters. Since even In mildly acidic waters (pH 5 to 6)
blue-green algae are uncommon, mild acidification of lakes may control
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6552
"DEEP-SEA BEHTHIC COMMUNITY RESPIRATION: AN IN SITU STUD* AT 1850 MEIERS", Smith,
K. L., Jr., Teal, J. M., Science, Vol. 179, Ho. 1(070, January 19, 1973, PP 888-283.
la altu measurements of oxygen uptake, as a measure of metabolic activity, were
made on undisturbed deep-sea benthlc coomnltles by placing resplrometers (tell Jars)
at a depth of 1850 meters on the continental slope south of Nev England. Toe
reaplrometera consisted of two capped Plexlglas cylinders which enclosed W sq cm of
sediment. A polarographlc oxygen electrode In each chamber fed a signal to a Ruatrak
recorder housed la a glass sphere atop the unit. Each chamber was stirred by a
magnetically driven stlrrer. Uptake measurements were made over periods of U8-72
hours. Formalin Injection was used to poison the biological oxygen demand. Additional
measurements of total oxygen uptake and chemical oxygen demand were made from a
research vessel using a drill rig equipped with a 2000-O drill pipe, a television camera
pod, and a hook apparatus. Oxygen uptake under the bell Jars ranged from 0.39-0.55
mg/sq. m/hr. Values obtained from the research vehicle were 0.62 ml/sq m/hr. These
values were two orders of magnitude lower than values from shallow depths. After
treatment of the sediments with formalin there was no measurable chemical oxygen uptake
which shows that the total uptake Is biological (community respiration). It Is
concluded that metabolic activity of deep-sea benthlc communities is low.
XNEEX TERMS: Biochemical oxygen demand,
equipment. Biological communities.
Respiration, Metabolism, Benthos,
Continental slope, Resplrometers.
Research
"MARINE WASTE DISPOSAL - A COMPREHENSIVE ENVIRONMENTAL APPROACH TO PLANNING",
Norrts, D. P., Blrke, L. E., Jr., Coekburn, R. T., Parker, ». S., Journal Water
Pollution Control Federation, Vol. 1*5, Ho. 1, January 1973, PP 53-To;
The city of San Francisco undertook a comprehensive study of the marine
nent (San Francisco Bay and the Pacific Ocean) to determine where and in what
quantities It is feasible to dispose of the city's dry- and wet-weather wastewater
effluents. The first phase of the study defined oeeanographlc characteristics of
potential discharge sites and the fate of the discharges. This Included determination
of mass water movement, drift of partlculate matter on the water surface, dispersion
characteristics, and water characteristics by aerial photography, shipboard
Instrumentation, in situ equipment, and tracer studies. The second phase of the study
was an ecological study which Included plankton studies, benthlc studies, diving
studies of near-shore areas, intertidal studies, in altu bloaasays with fish, static
and continuous-flow bioaasay with fish and macrolnvertebrates, microcosm studies,
stickleback blood studies, and biostlmulation studies. The results of the two phases
indicated that marine disposal la feasible and that the marine environment can be
adequately protected by discharging chlorinated primary effluent through one or more
submarine outfalls with properly designed dlffuser systems. The study Indicated
that additional treatment is not necessary to protect the marine ecosystem.
INDEX TERMS: Bloansay, Toxlcity, Pacific Ocean, Worms, Sticklebacks, Sewage, Sculplna,
Sea basses, Crabs, Shrimp, Snails, Clams, Mussels, Estuaries, Dispersion, On-alte
studies, Plankton, Benthos, Species diversity.
AMK-6553
"NITROGEN FIXATION BY A BLUE-GREEN EPIPHYTE ON PELAGIC SARGASSUM", Carpenter, E. J.,
Science. Vol. 178, Ho. b066, December 15, 1972, PP 1207-1209.
Nitrogen fixation by Dichotrix fucleola. an epiphyte on pelagic Sargasman,
was measured by acetylene reduction in May and June, 1972, in the western Sargasso Sea
and the Gulf Stream. This la the first report of nitrogen fixation by a
heterocyat-bearing blue-green al& in the open ocean, and also the first observation
of nitrogen fixation in the genus Dlchothrtx. Cellular carbon/nitrogen ratios
suggested that the Dlchothrtx was nltrogen-atarved. In dense aggregations of
Sargassum. such as rafts or windrows, the enrichment of surface aeawater with combined
nitrogen "from nitrogen fixation may be pronounced.
INDEX TERMS: Nitrogen fixation. Nitrogen cycle, Dlchothrlx fueleola. Sargasso Sea,
Acetylene reduction.
AMIC-6560
"NUTRIENT STUDIES IN TEXAS IMPOUNDMENTS", Huang, V. H., Mase, J. R., Fruh, E. G.,
Journal Water Pollution Control Federation. Vol. U5, No. 1, January 1973,
pp 105-110.
The objective of this study was to determine the limiting nutrients In two
distinctly different reservoirs in Texas, Lake Livingston on the Trinity River and lake
Travis on the Colorado River. The former is laden with relatively high organic and
Inorganic nutrient concentrations; the other has a low nutrient loading. Phytoplankton
and water quality samples were collected and returned to the laboratory for nutrient
enrichment testa aa well aa C-lU and nitrogen fixation tests. The latter two tests
were also conducted In situ. Enrichment testa were conducted with natural populations
and with inoculations of Chlorella pyrenoldosa. Growth rates were determined every 2
days by optical density measurements. C-l* tests were made with scintillation counts
of laboratory and In situ samples with and without added nutrients. Nitrogen fixation
was determined by the acetylene reduction method. The results showed that in the
high-nutrient system, nitrogen was the limiting nutrient In summer; blue-green
nitrogen-fixing algM became dominant in the late sumner and from laboratory tests seem
to be regulated by the available phosphorus. In the low-nutrient system, nitrogen,
phosphorus, or iron could limit phytoplankton growth at different times of the year.
With phosphorus enrichment of this system, algae with nitrogen-fixing capabilities could
develop.
INDEX TERMS: Limiting factors, Nutrients, Photosynthesis, Bloassay, On-slte tests,
Cyanophyta, Nitrogen fixation, Dominant organisms, Chlorophyta, Carbon, Nitrogen,
Phosphorus, Iron, Growth rates, Acetylene reduction.
-------
2. BIOLOOICAL METHODS
AMIC-6575
"CELL REPLICATION AND BIOMASS IN THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS", Speeee, R. E.,
Engelbrecht, R. S., Aukamp, D. R., Water Research. Vol. 7, No. 3. March 1973,
PP 361-371*.
Because of the Inherent difficulty In enumerating cell numbers In a flocculent
suspension, deoxyrlbonuclelc acid (DMA) was chosen as an Indicator of cell numbers In
the activated sludge process. A direct relationship between the concentration of DNA
in the sludge and plate count was found with a dispersed growth of mixed culture
microorganisms. Therefore, It was assumed that a direct relationship existed between
cell numbers and DNA concentration In the sludge in a flocculent suspension of mixed
culture microorganisms as found in activated sludge. An increase in DHA was therefore
assumed to be an Indication of cell replication. An Increase in blomaes before an
Increase In DNA Indicated a storage of substrate in seme form and not replication of
organisms. The average Increase in the weight per cell was determined by dividing the
weight of blonass Just prior to an increase In DNA by the Initial velght of organisms
present. Storage waa a function of the loading rate to which the organisms were
acclimated. A sludge acclimated to a loading rate of 8.0 per day Increased 270 percent
in blomass before replication. Sludges acclimated to lower loading rates showed an
extended time lag before cell replication occurred, while higher loading rates
maintained the sludges in a more active state having shorter time lags before
replication occurred. Increased frequency of feeding also resulted in less time before
replication occurred. Replication commenced as long as U h after the external substrate
was exhausted and the maximum blooass was reached in the F/M equal O.U system. Thus, in
the contact stabilization process, cell replication would be expected in the
stabilization tank vlth only substrate storage taking place in the contact tank, due to
low loading rates used.
AMIC-6578
"A PROPOSAL FOR THE APPLICATION OF HONDO'S MATHEMATICAL MODEL TO THE BIODEGRADATION
OF MINERAL OIL IN NATURAL WATERS", Fasoll, U., Numann, W.f Water Research, Vol. 7,
No. 3, March 1973, PP ^-MS.
This study was designed to obtain a set of results thnt would serve as a
means of: (1) investigating the possibility of employing the formula of Monod's model
la the interpretation of mineral oil biodegradatlon; (2) evaluating the coefficients
or constants used in the formula in terms of their influence on the course of
of biodegradatlon; and (3) determining the part played by evaporation and re-oxygenatlon
In the overall process of oil removal by comparison with the biological process, and
the effect of the possible onset of anaerobic phenomena. Oil emulsions were prepared
using Aghajarl oil and two series of experiments were run in half-filled and In
completely filled bottles. The oily water was extracted with CClU, and Infrared
analyses and the (1958) API 733 method were used to determine hydrocarbon content;
oxygen determination was made using the Winkler method; and bacterial counts were made
after filtration on a Sartortus 1U005 membrane containing * nutritive substrate. It
can be concluded from the results that 2 mechanisms are primarily involved in
forecasting natural hydrocarbon pollution phenomena: evaporation and biodegradatlon.
Evaporation la very Important in perfectly still water and may be a primary factor
when mixing takes place. Biodegradatlon is always Involved in the natural elimination
of mineral oil. Monod's model gives a good approximation for the forecasting of Its
course, provided it Is recognised that certain oil components, which are in fact
oxidized much more slowly, must be treated as non-biodegradable. It seems safe to
assert that anaerobic conditions will arise when Initial hydrocarbons levels are
around 20 ppn, except In cases where the water Is already markedly oxygen-deficient
and «n forms of aeration are excluded.
AMIC-6575 (Continued)
Card 2/2
AMIC-6578 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Activated sludge, Blomsa, Microorganisms, Suspended solids. Growth
kinetics, Methodology, Organic loading, Organic matter. Sewage bacteria,
Blolndleators, Substrate utilization, Cell replication, Deoxyrlbonuclelc acid,
Substrates, Optical density, Nucleic acids.
INDEX TERMS: Biodegradatlon, Evaporation, Forecasting, Water pollution. Mathematical
models, Mlcroblal degradation, Oxygen, Anaerobic conditions, Monod's model,
Mineral oil, Hydrocarbons.
-HE
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6579
"UTILIZING VESUL CONCENTRATION RELATIONSHIPS IN THE EASTEHN OYSTER (CRASSOSTRSA
VIROINICA) TO DETECT HEAVY METAL POLLUTION", Huggett, R. J., Bender, M. E., Slone,
B. E.. Mater Research, Vol. 7, No. 3, *rch 1973, PP •»51-1»6o.
A total of <*95 oyatera were collected during February Jfay, 1971, at various
sites In the Chesapeake Bay area, removed from the shell without puncturing, digested
In concentrated HN03, and analyzed for Cd, Cu, and Zn using atomic absorption
spectrophotometry. Examination of the data showed that oysters frcn the same sampling
location often differed In metal concentration as much as 100 percent and
occasionally 300 percent. These variable concentrations are assumed to be normally
distributed around some population mean, therefore the sample mean from each
location should approximate the population mean. Means were used only to ascertain the
areal distribution of metals In the various river systems. The means showed that a
concentration gradient existed In all systems and that each metal increased In
concentration as fresh water was approached. Several assumptions were made, (l) The
metals (Cu, Cd, and Zn) available to oysters In non-industrialized areas are from the
natural weathering of rocks. (2) The ratio of copper to zinc In the weathering rocks
la relatively constant within a drainage basin. (3) Oysters accumulate a constant
percentage of each element available to them. Statistical analysis of the metal
concentration data showed that a linear relationship exists between Cu and Zn, and
Cd levels in contaminated and uncontaminated oysters. No single concentration for an
action level can be set for cadmium, copper or Bine In oysters which will definitely
indicate pollution sources. However, the approach described has been proven valid In
the Chesapeake Bay and may be of use elsewhere.
AMIC-6581
"PKYTOFLAflKTON AS A BIOLOGICAL INDICATOR OF HATER QUALITY", ViUegaa, I., De Giner,
0., Water Research. Vol. 7, Ho. 3, March 1973, PP >»79-"»87.
The magnitude of ecological variations observed In the San Pedro River,
Rorthcentral Venezuela, was studied In relation to water quality. Routine sampling and
analyses were carried out over a consecutive 12-month period with samples being taken 3
times per week. The parameters measured were: collform, fecal collform, bacterial
density, dissolved oxygen, oxygen demand, organic nitrogen, ammonia nitrogen, nitrates,
nitrites, pH, detergents, and total fixed, volatile, filterable and nonfilterable
residues. A qualitative and quantitative study was made of the phytoplankton oriented
towards the calculation of the abundance of a group as Its percentage of the total
phytoplankton population from each sample (Armstrong, 1969), and phytoplankton samples
were collected from the same stations and at the same time as those for examination.
The membrane filter technique (Jackson and Williams, 1962) was used for enumeration and
identification of the groups. The qualitative and qualitative study of phytoplankton
related to non-biological values Indicating pollution shows that the ecological
condition of this biological group appears to bear a direct relation to the sanitary
state of water. No relation was found between the mere presence of the determined
species and Iss abundance, with the conventional Indices of pollution. The use of
phytoplankton as blotlcal community Indicator of pollution has value when comprehensive
ecological study Is made.
INDEX TERMS: Phytoplankton, BioIndicators, Water analysis, Water quality. Biological
communities, Aquatic algae, Water properties. Chemical analysis, Chrysophyta,
Aquatic bacteria, Water sampling, Chlorophyta, Cyanophyta, San Pedro River,
Species diversity. Species diversity Index, Venezuela.
AMIC-6579 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Oysters, Pollutant identification, Heavy metals, Water pollution sources,
Mollusks, Invertebrates, Salinity, Sampling, Cadmium, Copper, Zinc, Least squares
methods, Virginia, Industrial wastes, Chesapeake Bay, Sediments, Estuaries, Saline
water-freshwater Interfaces, Statistical methods, Crassostrea vlrglnlca,
Macroinvertebrates, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry, James River, Hampton
Roads, Elizabeth River, Data Interpretation.
AMTC-6582
"DENTTRIFICATION. STUDIES WITH LABORATORY-SCALE CONTINUOUS-FLOW UNITS", Du Tolt,
P. J., Danes, T. R., Water Research. Vol. 7, No. 3, torch 1973, pp W9-500.
Settled domestic sewage, lactate, and methanol were all investigated as carbon
sources for denltrlflcatlon In different types of denitrifying units. The denitrifying
units consisted of a suspended growth (SG) unit and a PC unit. The SG units were
operated at a hydraulic residence time of UO h. The stone PC unit was operated at a
hydraulic residence time of 10 h. The coke PC unit was operated at different residence
times to determine the minimum time required for efficient denltrlflcatlon of the
nitrified effluent. Samples were withdrawn, at the different sampling ports (PC units)
at each stage of the experiment after at least three hydraulic residence times had
elapsed. Gas samples were periodically taken for analysis by gas chronntography. The
units were operated In a controlled temperature room at 20 C. General chemical
analysis (COD, total- and ortho-phosphate, total- and NH3-nltrogen, volatile fatty
acids and ABS determinations) was performed by means of a Technicon autoanalyzer.
Nitrates and nitrites were analyzed by previously described methods and lactate was
determined enzynatlcally. Settled domestic sewage is unsuitable as a carbon source for
Inducing denltrlflcatlon, although efficient COD removals can be obtained In the system.
The fact that ammonia nitrogen flows freely through this system results in poor total
nitrogen removal values. Lactate Is an efficient additive for achieving denltrlflcatlon
Efficient removal of nitrate by lactate addition can be achieved effectively by a C:N
ratio of less than 1-5:1, where R represents -N03 or -N02 nitrogen. Methirol is also
suitable for inducing an acceptable rate of denitriflcatlon. The packed column type
unit appears to be a very effective system for use as a denitrifying unit, particularly
when packed with coke to Increase the surface area. A denitrifying unit packed with
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AKTC-6582 (Continued)
Card 2/2
coke and receiving methanol as hydrogen donor used In series with a bacterial disc unit
appears to provide an efficient unit for use In water reclamation schemes.
INDEX TERtC: Denltrificatlon, Methodology, Sewage, Domestic wastes, Laboratory tests,
I Nitrates, Nitrites, Suspended solids, Chemical oxygen demand. Ammonia, Nitrogen
compounds, Gas chromatography, Alkylbenzene sulfonates, Sampling, Chemical
analysis, Hydrogen Ion concentration, Lactate, Hetbanol, Continuous flow system,
Substrate utilization, Denitrifying bacteria, Crthophosphates, Fatty acids,
Enzymatic techniques. Culture media. Enrichment culture.
'COKR2LATION TO EVALUATE THE EFFECTS OF WASTEWATER PHOSPHORUS ON RECEIVING WATERS",
Fitzgerald, G. P., Faust. S. L., HadOer, C. R., Water and Sewage Works, Vol. 120,
Ho. 1, January 1973, PP Wl55.
Algal growth tests were conducted with water from several rivers and lakes In
Wisconsin to determine the amounts of available phosphorus and the effect and sources of
the phosphorus. The methods used were short- and long-term bioassays for measuring
available phosphorus, In situ bioassays to determine limiting or surplus phosphorus,
and chemical analyses to determine soluble ortho and total phosphorus. Cladophora
so., Rhlzoclonlum sp., and Selenastrum caprtcornutum were used In the bloassaya. The
water system investigated was Lake Mendota, Lake Honona, Uke Wlngra, Lake Wanbesa,
Lake Kegonsa, Lake Koshkonong and their connecting and feeding rivers. The results of
the bioassays and the chemical analyses were compared to ascertain their validity. The
results show that soluble ortho POU-P analyses correlate with bloassaya for available
phosphorus, and total phosphorus analyses do not correlate. This indicates that either
method (bloassay or chemical ortho POb-P analysis) could be used to measure the
phosphorus available for the growth of algae. There was close agreement of results
between the two types of bloassay: the one-day sorptlon-extraction test versus the
long-term growth assay, even though the two methods differ greatly. However, since the
growth of algae on the phosphorus in water samples is the ultimate proof of the
availability of phosphorus, the longer growth tests must still be used occasionally to
cheek on the results obtained with the short-term bioassays or chemical analyses of
soluble ortho POU-P. The significance of the tests are discussed with regard to the
sources and effects of phosphorus In the lakes and rivers analyzed.
IHDEX TERMS! Bloassay, Growth rates, Phosphates, Chemical analysis. Water pollution
sources. Limiting factors. Cladophora. Lukes, Rivers, Orthophospnate.
AMK.656U
"THE ROLE OF SLUDGE WORMS IN EUTROPHICATION", Brlnkhurst, R. 0., University of
Toronto, Department of Zoology, Ontario, Canada, Report No. EPA-B3-7g-COUf August
1972, 68 pp.
A study was undertaken to evaluate the recovery of potential nutrients from
sediment via the production of sludge worm tissue and the rate of destruction of„
organic matter in sediment via assimilation by worms (production plus respiration).
Samples of worms in Toronto Harbour were taken according to a grid plan whereby four
samples were taken at each of U3 sites with a KB eorer and screened through narrow mesh
screens (0.2-mm opening). The worms were selected using stereo microscopes and their
dry weight determined. Standing stock data were derived from monthly core samples.
Sediment analyses for caloric content, nitrogen content, and percentage of organic
matter were made on samples dried at 60 C prior to analysis. Samples of worms taken
with the Ekman grab and retained by a 0.5-nm pore size sieve were used in respiration
studies. Growth studies were conducted using pure cultures Inoculated with a stock
culture of five species of bacteria. Defecation rates, calorific values, and
ash-free dry weights were determined. In grossly polluted Toronto Harbour, Lake
Ontario the worm population averaging 96,000 anlmala/sq m (18.3 g ash-free dry vt/sq n)
assimilates, I,7lv3 keals/sq m/yr and produces 1550 kcala/sq m/yr worm tissue. Of the
total nitrogen Input of 830 tons/yr, 7 tons are present in worm tissue at any one time
and 113 tons may be circulated in a year. Worms feed selectively upon the bacteria in
sediment. They also pump water through sediment. Large worm populations play a
significant role in preventing organic matter from being deposited in an energy or
material sink.
INDEX TERMS: Sludge worms, Eutrophicatlon, Secondary productivity. Respiration, Tublfl-
elds. Nitrogen, Organic matter. Sediments, Sewage bacteria, Assimilation.
U8
AfflC-6587
"EFFECTS OF ALUM ADDITION ON ACTIVATED SLUDGE BIOTA", Anderson, D. T., Hammer,
M. J., Water and Sewage Works. Vol. 120, Ho. 1, January 1973, PP 63-67.
Experiments were carried out with settled municipal wastewater and soluble
synthetic waste to determine the effects of alum additions on BOD removal and on sludge
biota. Alum was added at ratios of aluminum to phosphorus ranging from 0 to 2.6 to 1.
Both sludges contained good varieties of higher life Including Naeglerla. Euplotes.
Epietylls, Vortlcella microstcma, Tokophrya, Philodina, *Prlchocera. Euclanls.
SShaerotflUB natana7"SpIrostomum. and Oikomonaa. The additions of alum did not reduce
Bm ffftmi, pwflMfciy because alum removes free bacteria from suspension which stimulate
further bacterial growth and extraction of wastes. Higher life forms were adversely
affected by alum to the extent that additions in excess of 15 mg Al per liter eliminated
viable protozoa. In this case chemical flocculatlon appeared to replace protozoan
Clarification. The effects of alum on protozoan metabolism is discussed.
INDEX TERK3S Activated sludge, Biochemical oxygen demand, Toxlclty, Protozoa,
Alum, Haegleria, Euplotes, Eplstylls, Tokophrya, Vortlcella mlcrostcoa, Philodina,
Triohocera, Euclanls, Sphaerotllus natans, Splrostomum, Oikomonas.
-------
2. BIOLOOICAL METHODS
AMIC-6590
"TEMPERATURE TOLERANCE OF PATHOGENIC AND NONPATKOGEN1C FREE-LIVING AM3EBAS",
Griffin, J. L., Science, Vol. 178, No. U063, November 2U, 1972, pp 869-870.
Within tested strains of the genera Hae,
and Acanthamoeba the ability
to grow at high temperatures seems directly related to virulence, with nonvlrulent
strains unable to grow at normal or elevated body temperatures. Outside these genera,
nonvlrulent HartnannellB and Tetramltus do grow at elevated temperatures, which
suggests a barrier to pathogenlcity other than temperature sensitivity. The high
optimal temperature of pathogenic Haeglerla apparently explains previous difficulty In
obtaining Isolates from the aquatic environment.
INDEX TERMS i Human diseases, Water pollution effects. Biological properties. Heat
resistance. Protozoa, Invertebrates, Aquatic animals. Human pathology. Cultures,
Freshwater, Temperature, Swimming pools, Amoebas, Pathogenlclty, Pollutant
effects, Tissue culture, Naeglerla fowlerl, Naegierla gruberl, Acanthamoeba
culbertsonl, Acanthamoeba rhysodes, Virulence, Acanthamoeba polyphaga,
Acanthamoeba castellanil, Acanthamoeba astronyxls, Acanthamoeba palestlnensis,
Hartaannella agrlcola, Tetramltus rostratus. Environmental sanples, Pollution
sources.
AMIC-6599
"TOXICm OF COPPER TO THALASSIOSIRA PSEUDOHAHA IN UNERRICRED INSHORE SEAWATER",
Erlekson, S. J., Journal of Phycology, Vol. 0, Ho. U, December 1972, PP 318-323.
Toxlelty of copper to T. pseudonana (formerly Cyclotella nana. clone 13-1)
was examined in inshore seawater using a 96-hr bloassay method.haw unenrlched
seawater was filtered through a 0.22-mlcron membrane filter and then pasteurized for
30 fflln at 60 C. Following this treatment, samples contained 0.68-1.lb micrograms
Cu/llter. Copper was added as the chloride in 5-mlcrogram increments over the range
of 5 to 30 mlcrogrema/llter (about 0.1-O.5 microM). Population densities, mean cell
volume, and C-lfc bicarbonate uptake were measured. Population growth and C-lU uptake
by T. pseudonana displayed inhibition over the entire range of added copper. Growth
rate constant (k~) to T. pseudonana decreased with increasing copper concentration and
during the course of growth at each concentration. Correspondingly, mean cell volumes
Increased with copper concentration and time. Copper toxicIty varied In different
water samples. The presence of decomposed natural plankton and detritus decreased
toxlclty. In the absence of enrichment, bacteria had little effect on copper toxlcity.
Results were influenced by glassware treatment, collection and storage of seawater,
and absence of enrichments.
IHDEX TERMS: Toxlcity, Copper, Water pollution effects, Diatoms, Bioassay, Heavy
metals. Marine algae, Chrysophyta, Sea water. Growth rates. Absorption, Carbon
radiolsotopes, Water sampling, Water storage, Bacteria, Salinity, Hydrogen Ion
concentration. Tides, Thalassloslra pseudonana, Cyclotella nana, C-lb, Population
density, Enrichment.
AfflC-6598
"THALASSIOSIRA ECCEHTRICA (EHRENB.) CLEVE, T. SYMMETRICA SP. NOV., AND SOME
RkLA'ltb GENTKlC DIATOMS", Fryxell, G. A., Hasle. G. H.. Journal of Phycology. Vol. 8,
No. l», December 1972, PP 297-317.
Examination of original material from the Ehrenberg collection plus clonal
cultures from the Gulf of Mexico and net hauls from widely separated stations in the
world's oceans confirms that CoBclnodiseus eccentrleus is correctly placed as
Thalassioslra eccentrics (Ehremb.J Cleve. A closely related species, T. symmetries.
is described, with the mala differences being found in the value proeeues and
distribution patterns. The former species is more abundant in the Inshore waters; the
latter has been found in oceanic waters. Comparisons are drawn between these 2
species, T. mendiolana and PlanXtoniella sol.
INDEX TERMS: Marine algae, Diatoms, Systematlcs, Ecological distribution, Phytoplankton,
Chrysophyta, Gulf of Mexico, Distribution patterns. Cultures, Electron microscopy,
Atlantic Ocean, Pacific Ocean, Indian Ocean, Water sampling, Speciatlon,
Thalassloslra eccentrlca, Thalassloslra symmetrlca. Clones, Scanning electron
microscopy, Light microscopy, Transmission electron microscopy, Thalassloslra
mendiolana, Planktonlella sol, Cosclnodlscus eccentrlcus.
AMIC-6600
"THE RELATIONSHIP OF LIGHT, TEMPERATURE, AND CURRENT TO THE SEASONAL DISTRIBUTION
OF BATRACHDSPEFMUM (RHODOPHYTA)", Rider, D. E., Wagner, R. H., Journal of Phycology,
Vol. 0, NO. », December 1972, pp 323-331.
Batrachoapermum
and B. monl 11 forme, collected In a dark-water and a
um vacua
clear-water stream, respectively, were studied in order to elucidate species
variation, growth phenomena, and the rates and causes of disintegration. To permit
manipulation of environmental factors and simulate the natural habitat of
Batrachoapermum, a series of chambers was designed and constructed which allowed water
In a trough to flow from one compartment to the other at a rate that could be adjusted
by changing the slope of the trough. The water used In the system, transported from
Black Moshannon Spring, was chosen because of its transparency. Carbon dioxide levels
were maintained by filling an Inverted 2-llter Erlenmeyer flask with pure C02 once or
twice a day and allowing it to diffuse slowly through the water. Chemical
characteristics of the water (C02, pH, iron, hardness, and eulfate) determined, using
a Each kit, after 3 weeks of running the water system with algal samples in it,
remained unchanged. Light intensity was varied by raising or lowering lights above
the chambers; readings were taken with a YSI-Ketterlng Model 65 Radiometer and a
Weston Model 756 Sunlight Illumination Meter. Samples of B. vagum and B. monlllforme
were maintained simultaneously In the trough under constant illumination for periods of
2 or 3 weeks. Chlorophyll was extracted from each sample after complete dehydration.
All washes but one were made with methane! and the resulting lump of material was
ground with mortar and pestle using MeOH until the wash was colorless and the cell
remains were brown. Chlorophyll absorption and the concentration of Chi a were
determined using data obtained with the Beckman DB recording spectrophotometer.
Observations of the 2 growth sites and the laboratory experiments performed on
-------
AMIC-6600 (Continued)
Card 2/2
B. vagum and B. monlllforme Indicate that B. monlliforme is better suited to higher
Intensity Illumination than IB B. vagum. Without the protection of dark water, the
B. monlllforme disintegrated under the high light Intensities of summer. In the
laboratory, B. monlllforme retained a healthy macroscopic condition over a full range
of light-Intensity treatments; above 250 ft-c B. vagum was increasingly disintegrated.
It vaa found that within the limitations caused by water depth, current velocity can
become limiting to the growth of B. vegan. Although the evidence for environmental
factors affecting the growth of B_7 monlllforme In Snay's Run Is less extensive,
light Intensity and current velocity In this site also appear to Interact to control
the growth pattern of the algae.
INDEX TERMS: Limiting factors. Ecological distribution, Rhcdophyta, Laboratory tests,
On-site investigations. Environmental effects. Light Intensity, Water temperature.
Aquatic algae, Seasonal, Currents (water). Separation techniques. Water analysis.
Growth rates. Degradation (decomposition), Batrachospermum vagum,
Batrachospermum monlliforme. Chlorophyll a.
M. MCTHOE6
AMIC-6602
"THE EFFECT OF GROWTH ILLUMINATION ON THE PIGMENTATION OF A MARINE DINOFIAGELLAOE",
Mandclll, E. F., Journal of Phycology. Vol. 8, No. I*, December 1972, pp 367-369.
Variations in plgrent concentration, especially within the carotenold
plgnent system, were investigated In the marine dlnoflagellate Amphidlnlum klebsli in
relation to light intensity. Cultures of the dlnoflagellate were grown in Gulllard's
medium ff' under constant temperature and light Intensities of 0.003, 0.032, 0.051,
and 0.129 ly/mln. Day-night conditions were simulated by alternating 12-hr periods
of light and darkness. Cultures were harvested during the light photoperlod at
mid-log growth phase; cell densities were determined using a hemacytcmeter. The
plgaents were extracted using 90 percent acetone, separated using diethyl ether,
hydrated, and spotted on silica gel G. The developing solvent contained petroleum
ether, ethyl acetate, and dlethylamlne (58:30:12v/v). Estimation of pigment
concentration and identification of carotenoid pigments by determining absorption
spectra in various solvents were carried out using a Beckman spectrophotometer.
.urn klebsii cultures grown under different light intensities exhibited similar
H a content per cell. Among the accessory pigments, chlorophyll £
concentration decreased slightly in cells exposed to increasingly light intensities
up to 0.129 ly/mln. The concentration of the 2 major xanthophylla present in A.
klebsli cells—perldlnln and dladlnoxanthln—however, varied according to the Tight
background of the cells. Some biochemical pathways In the formation of perldlnln In
dinoflagellates are discussed.
INDEX TERMS! Dinoflagellates, Light intensity. Plant pigments, Environmental effects,
ta. Marine algae. Protozoa. Solvent extractions, Amphidlnlum klebsii,
yll a, Chlorophyll c, Carotenolds, Perldlnln, Diadlnoxanthin,
esls. Absorption spectra. Infrared spectra.
AMXC-6601
"GROWTH AND EXCRETION IN PLANKTONIC ALGAE AND BACTERIA", Nalewajko, C., Lean,
D. R. S., Journal of Phycology, Vol. 8, No. U, December 1972, pp 361-366.
In short-term experiments using cultures of Chlorella
AMIC-6603
"THE UPTAKE OF GLUCOSE BY CHLAMfDOMDNAS SP.", Bennett, M. E., Hobble, J. E.,
Journal of Phycology, Vol. B, No. ft, December 1972, pp 392-398.
Anabaena flos-aquae. Asterionella formosa. and NavleuEa pellicuJosa, both the
proportion of photosynthetic products released from cells and the composition of these
products altered with age. In the first 3 species, percentage extracellular release
values Increased with increasing growth rates, but the reverse trend was shown by
Havlcula. Fractlonatlon of filtrates using Sephadex indicated that, in general,
larger molecular weight compounds became predominant as cultures aged. Also a
time-dependent shift in a similar direction occurred in cultures of all ages. In
several lakes a predominance of large molecular weight compounds was apparent in
filtrates even from short-term experiments. Filtrates of mixed cultures of planktonlc
bacteria growing on C.Ik glycolate were found to contain large molecular weight
organic compounds. It was demonstrated that in nonaxenic cultures of algae and in
lake water, bacteria utilize low molecular weight extracellular metabolites of algae
origin and larger molecular weight compounds are formed.
INDEX TERMS; Aquatic bacteria, Aquatic algae, Photosynthesis, Growth rates. Primary
productivity, Radioactivity techniques, Excretion, Metabolites, Chlorella
pyrenoldosa, Havlcula pelllculosa, Anabaena. flow-aquae, Asterionella formosa,
Substrate utilization, Glycolate, C-lb, Release rates. Chemical composition.
50
The glucose uptake of a species of Chlamydomonas was studied at various
concentrations of D-glucose plus glucose-1-C-lU (0.003-10.0 mg/llter) and at various
light levels (0-220 ft-c). The al«a grows at U C either in the light or in the dark
with added glucose, celloblose, maltose, or fructose. Uptake of glucose could be
described by the Mlchaells-Menten equation, and both the maximum velocity of uptake
and the half-saturation constant Increased when the cells were exposed to glucose In
the dark. However, the high value of the half-saturation constant (5 nig glucose/liter)
compared with the low levels of glucose In nature (5-10 olcrograms/liter) makes It
unlikely that a transport system is effective under natural conditions. Even if a
total of 10.0 mg/llter of glucose plus other organic compounds were available as
substrate, the rate of photosynthesis would still be more than 10 times higher (at
220 ft-c) than the rate of organic substrate uptake. Light had no effect on the
total uptake of glucose but did reduce the percentage of C-1U02 evolved from 6l
percent of the total C-lU taken up In the dark to 0 percent at 220 ft-c. This decrease
could be due to either preferential use of the C-lUOS In photosynthesis or of the
photosynthate In respiration.
INDEX TERMS: Absorption, Chlamydomonas, Aquatic algae, Velocity, Organic compounds.
Carbohydrates, Phytoplankton, Protozoa, Invertebrates, Aquatic animals, Light
intensity, Photosynthesis, Primary productivity, Path of pollutants. Radioactivity
techniques, Carbon radioisotopes, Heterotrophy, Glucose, Substrate utilization,
Celloblose, Maltose, Fructose, Substrate concentration, C-lU.
-------
2. BIO"X>ICAL METHODS
AMIC-660&
"INHIBITION OF PHYTOSYNTHES1S IN AICAE BY DIMETHYL SULFOXIDE", Cheng, K. H.,
GnxUlnskl, B., Colman, B., Journal of Phycology, Vol. 8, No. U, December 1972,
pp 399-'iOO.
Bacteria-free cultures of the blue-green algae Oscillatoria op., Anabacna
flos-aquae, and Anacystle nldulana were grown and harvested according to a
previously described method, and Chlorella pyrenoldosa was grown on the Watt and
Fogg medium (1966) and harvested as were the blue-greens. The rate of photosynthesis
was determined at 30 C by measuring 02 evolution with a Gllson differential
resplraneter fitted with photoflood lamps which gave a light intensity of 10 klux at
the flask level, and by measuring the Incorporation of C-lU from C-lb-blcarbonate
under the same conditions. Cells were suspended In 2.7 ml of 0.01 M phosphate buffer,
pH 8, containing 3$ mlcromoles NoHCO3 and 02 evolution was measured for 30 mln.
Dimethyl sulfoxlde (DMSO), a polar solvent which Increases the permeability of cell
membranes, of the appropriate concentration waa added and 02 evolution measured for
an additional 30 mln, at which time 0.1 BL) of C-lU-sodlum bicarbonate (0.6 mlcroCl)
was added and 02 evolution measured for an additional 30 mln. A sample (100 mlcrollters,
of cell suspension was removed and C-lU-incorporation determined. DKSO at concentra-
tions above one percent Inhibited photosynthetlc oxygen evolution and C-1U02 fixation
by pll It species of algae.
IIJDEX TSRM5: Photosynthesis, Water pollution effects, Aquatic algae, Photosyathetic
oxygen, Inhibition, Plant physiology. Laboratory tests, Blcaasay, Plant
physiology, Chlorophyta, Cyanophyta, Radioactivity techniques, Carbon radio-
isotopes, Cultures, Dimethyl sulfoxlde, Pollutant effects, Oscillatoria, Anabaena
floB-aguae. Anacystis nldulans, Chlorella pyrenoidosa, Organic solvents, C-lU.
AMIC-661U (Continued)
Card 2/2
blooms on this lake. A sustained spring peak of fixation wan associated with a
simultaneous bloom of ApharUzanenon flos-aquae in all three basins, an autumn peak with
an ephemeral bloon of Anabaena clrclnalls occurring at a different time In each basin.
A steptd.se multiple regression analyolsThoved that fluctuations in 112 fixation were
best described by variations in heterocysts, quantities of blue-green algae, PO*uP,
H03-N, and temperature. Annual rates of N2 fixation were correlated with the
proportion of heterocysts in Anabaena. Previous nitrogen budgets for Clear Lake have
shown a large excess of nitrogen in outflow over Inflow, which is accounted for by the
levels of N2 fixation measured.
INDEX TERMS: Eutropblcation, Nitrogen fixation, Nitrogen cycle, Energy budget, Path of
pollutants, Nitrates, Ammonia, Phosphates, Phosphorus, Cyanophyta, Aquatic algae,
Phytoplankton, Primary productivity, Cycling nutrients, Methodology, Chemical
analysis, Acetylene reduction, Heterocysts, Seasonal variation. Clear Lake,
Ethylene.
AMIC-661U
"NITROGEN FIXATION IN CLEAR LAKE, CALIFORNIA. I. SEASONAL VARIATION AND TOE ROLE
OF HETEROCYSTS", Home, A. J., Qoldman, C. R., Limnology and Oceanology. Vol. 17, No. 5,
September 1972, pp 678-692.
Details are given of more than 2200 acetylene reduction measurements of aquatic
N2 fixation for a 7-month period and their relationship to a correspondingly large
number of measurements of other relevant physical and chemical variables. Samples were
taken at 0.5- or 1.0-m intervals throughout the water column with a Van Dorn bottle.
Samples from each depth were pooled to give a representative sample of the whole basin
at that depth. Acetylene reduction was measured essentially by the original technique
of Stewart et al. (1967). The main modifications were the exclusive use of unconcen-
trated phytoplankton samples, larger bottles (60 ml here) and in situ Incubation (Home
1969). Gas samples were analyzed for ethylene by GLC. Dally and hourly rates of
reduction were calculated; algae, and heterocysts and cells were counted using a
microscopic technique. Heterocysts were expressed either as a percentage of the total.
number of vegetative cells per species or as the total heterocyst numbers in the entire
water column. Spectrophotometrlc determinations of nitrate, ammonia, and chlorophyll a
were made; total-P and POU-P were estimated colorImetrlcally. Carbon fixation was
measured using the C-lb technique, and total-M using a standard micro-KJeldahl method.
The nitrogen budget was calculated from regular measurements of the nitrogen content of
the inflowing and outflowing streams and rainfall. Including storm periods. The amount
of nitrogen deposited in the sediments was found by direct measurement. Denitrlficatlon
was estimated from changes In lake nitrogen when conditions were suitable for
dentrlflcatlon. The annual contribution of N2 fixation to Clear Lake In 1970 was about
550 tonnes, SCO Mg (megagrams) or 18 kg/ha, 1*3 percent of the lake's yearly nitrogen
Inflow. Biological N2 fixation is Implicated as the main cause of large algal nuisance
__
Amc-6615
"NITROGEN FIXATION IN CLEAR LAKE, CALIFORNIA. II. SYNOPTIC STUDIES ON THE AI/TOMN
ANABAENA BLOOM", Home, A. J., Dlllard, J. E., Fujita, D. K., Goldman, C. R., Limnology
and Oceanography. Vol. 17, No. 5, September 1972, pp 693-703.
Nitrogen fixation at three stages of an autunal bloom of Anabaena clrclnalls
was measured after almost simultaneous collection at up to 32 stations in Clear LakTand
algal heterocysts, phytoplankton cell numbers, N03-N, NHU-N, dissolved organic-N,
POU-P, Fe, primary production, partlculate carbon, and chlorophyll a were also measured.
Nitrogen fixation was significantly and positively correlated to Anabaena heterocyst
numbers (P greater 0.0001), negatively correlated to N03-N (P greater 0.01), and
positively correlated to dissolved organic-N (P greater 0.01) and POU-P (P greater 0.05)
A negative correlation with NHU is probable; no significant relationship was found with
the other variables measured. An explanation of the apparent restriction of substantial
cyanophycean H2 fixation to nonoligotrophlc waters Is proposed. The results are consis-
tent with the theory that heterocysta are responsible for N2 fixation in situ under oxic '
conditions. (Reprinted from Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 17, No. 3, September 1972,
PP 693-703. -
Copyright 1972 by the American Soel
Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
of Limnology and Oceanography, Inc.
INDEX TERMS: Nitrogen fixation, Eutropblcation, Seasonal, Aquatic alage, Cyanophyta,
Primary productivity, Nitrogen cycle. Cycling nutrients, Water pollution effects,
Anabaena clrclnalls, Heterocysts, Clear Lake.
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6620
'•THE UPTAKE OF UREA BY NATURAL POPULATIONS OF MARINE PHYTOPIANKTON", McCarthy, J. J.,
Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 17, No. 5, September 1972, pp 738-7W3.
Nltrogen-15 isotopes were used to study the uptake of nitrate, ammonium, and
urea by natural phytoplankton populations In 36 samples collected at nine stations off
the coast of southern California. Samples for measurement of nitrate, ammonium, and
urea productivity and for chemical anyses were collected with a 50-liter PVC sampler
or an 8-llter Van Dorn bottle from depths corresponding to the 87, 1*3, 20, 7, **, and 1
percent surface light Intensity as determined fey either a submarine photometer or a
Secchl disk. Subsamples were filtered through 183-mlcron nylon mesh to remove the
larger zooplankton and were then used to fill U-llter Pyrex bottles covered with neutral
density filters calibrated to simulate the light level at the depth from which the
samples were collected. Additions of the N-15-labeled compounds were made to different
bottles from each sample; the bottles were plugged with slllcone rubber stoppers and
placed under natural light In Plexlglas Incubators on the deck of the research vessel.
Die bottles were shaken every few hours and after 2k hr the contents were filtered, the
partlculAte samples dessicated under partial vacuum over silica gel, combusted in a
Coleman nitrogen analyzer, and the gaseous product swept into a glass vacuum system.
A single beam Nier sector-type mass spectrometer was used to determine the N-15:N-ll*
ratio of each sample. Portions of sea water samples were analyzed for nitrate, ammonium,
urea, particulate nitrogen, and carbon productivity, the percentage of the total
phytoplankton nitrogen productivity accounted for by urea varied from less than 1
percent to greater than 60 percent and for the entire study averaged 28 percent. The
percentage of total available nitrogenous nutrient (ambient nitrate, ammonium, and
urea plus the 17*15 additions) utilized per day varied among the stations from a
AfflC-6623
'ttOPEPODS OF MARINE AFFINITIES FROM MOUNTAIN LAKES OF WESTERN NORTH AMERICA ,
Wilson, M. S., Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 17, Bo. 5, September 1972, pp 762-763.
Occurrences of Llmnocalanus macrurus, Senecella calanoldes, a variation of
Mesochra raplens and Huntenannla lacuntrls. all copepods either euryhallne or related
to marine forms, are recorded from lakes in the Cascade and Rocky Mountains, western
Horth America. (Reprinted from Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 17, No. 5, September
1972, pp 762-763. Copyright 1972 by the American Society of Limnology and Oceanography,
Inc. Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS: Copepods, Salt tolerance, Lakes, Crustaceans, Invertebrates, Aquatic
animals, Zooplankton, Deep water, Systematlcs, Euryhallne, Llmnocalanus macrurus,
Senecella calanoldes, Mesochra raplens, Huntemannia lacustrls, Macrolnvertebrates,
Harpacticolds, Bear Lake, Arthropods, Vaterton Lake, Cedar Lake.
AMIC-6620 (Continued)
Card 2/2
of 5 percent at station b (12 km off San Diego) to a maximum of U6 percent at station
19 (off White Point). The average C:H uptake ratio was 12.U.
INDEX TERMS: Absorption, (ferine algae, Phytoplankton, Ureas, Radioactivity techniques.
Primary productivity, Nitrates, Carbon, Chemical analysis. Sea water, Secondary
productivity, On board analysis. Ammonium.
"PREPARATION OF MEMBRANE FILTER SAMPLES FOR DIRECT EXAMINATION WITH AN ELECTRON
MICROSCOPE", Harris, J. E., McKee, T. R., Wilson, R. C., Jr., Limnology and Oceanography
Vol. 17, No. 5, September 1972, pp 78^-787.
A simple apparatus is described for transferring samples of suspended matter
collected on Mllllpore filters to specimen grids for examination with an electron
microscope. The apparatus is made from glassware available in most laboratories
and is relatively inexpensive. Samples of suspended matter prepared with this method
have been used to obtain the particle size distribution and shapes for particles
between 5 and 0.05 microns. The distribution of coccollths and other nanoorganlsm
remains In the water column of the Gulf of Mexico are being studied. Clay minerals
have been studied and successfully identified using selected area electron dlffnctlon
on samples prepared with this apparatus. This method should also be useful in preparing
samples for light microscopy.
INDEX TEBt£: Membrane filters, Sample preparation, Cellulose membranes, Particulate
matter, Electron microscopy, Laboratory equipment. Distribution patterns, Aquatic
microorganisms. Clay minerals.
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL MEMOES
AMXC-6628
'THESHWATEK HAKPACTIC03U COH3PODS OF NEW ZEALAND", Lewis, M. H., New Zealand Journal
of Marine and Freshwater Research. Vol. 6, NOB. 1 and 2, June 1972, p 23-*T.
Seven species of Attheyella. and two of Elapholdella are discussed. The
original descriptions of A. brehml~TChappuis, 1989) and A. maorica (Brehm, 1928) are
revised and five nev species described: two from each o? the aubgenera Delachauxlella
and Chappublella and a semi-terrestrial species of Elapholdella.
INDbX TERtG: Copepods, Crustaceans, Aquatic animals, Systematlcs, Invertebrates,
Ecological distribution. Habitats, Mosses, Peat, Harpactlcolds, Speclatlon,
AMIC-6706
"TEMPERATURE FLUCTUATIONS WITHIN EBCLISH LOWLAND POBUS", Martin, N. A., Hydrobiologla.
Vol. IW, Ho. U, December 15, 1972, PP U55-"*70.
Continuous records were made, for almost two years, of the water temperatureo
In two ponds In Leicestershire, England. The nuniber of degree-hours and the weekly
and monthly mean temperatures were calculated. The water temperature In the ponds
and the factors Influencing the temperatures were very different In the winter and
summer. In the winter the water temperature was fairly uniform, only fluctuating
slightly, and was Influenced mainly by the air temperature. In the sunnier the water
temperature was very variable within a pond and was mainly Influenced by the amount
of sunshine received. The range of temperature fluctuation and rate of change within
a pond varied Inversely with the depth of water, water cloudiness and the amount of
plant growth. These Internal factors had greatest effects In the summer when the
Influence of the aim was greatest. Hie effect of temperature on pond water animals lo
briefly discussed.
IBDEX TERMS: Water temperature, Fluctuations, Aquatic animals. Farm ponds. Thermal
stress. Seasonal, Depth, Pondveeds, Aquatic plants, Aquatic algae. Aquatic insects
Amphibians, Newts, England, Thermographs, Potanogeton natans, Callltrlehe,
Olyceria fluitans, Juncus artlculatus, Juncus Inflexus, Phalarls arundlnacea,
Sigara nlgrollneata, Trlturis vulgarls, Notonecta maculeata. Bugs.
AMIC-6631
"DEVICE FOR '
CTBB AND MEASURING ACTIVITY OF LARGE MAHIHE CRUSTACEANS", Coombs, R. F.
Hew Zealand Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research. Vol. 6, Nos. 1 and 2, June 1972,
pp 19»-205.
A device Is described for detecting and measuring the loccnotor activity of
large marine crustaceans In captivity. The device consists of two electrodes: one of
stainless steel, which acts as a sensing surface, and the other of aluminum Immersed In
a tank containing sea water. The sensor Is essentially a simple galvanic cell, of which
the electrolyte la the sea water in which the animal Is maintained. When the cell
circuit is initially closed a current flows which rapidly decreases as the cell
polarizes mainly because of a build-up of hydrogen gas on the cathode. Any disturbance
in the water displaces gas and the current produced by the cell Increases. The
activity sensor described was devised to record the activity of the spiny lobster
Jasus edwardsli. and operates by detecting movements In the water and by contact of the
animal with a sensing surface. It Is effective in a large tank, and may be built at
modest cost. It can, however, be used only for marine anlmala. A puncned-tape
recording system used with this device is also described.
INDEX TERMS: Crustaceans, Marine animals, Laboratory equipment. Measurement,
• Locomotor activity. Sensors, Macrolnvertebrates, Detectors.
AMC-6T08
'OH THE CHANGES IN THE STRUCTURE OF TWO AICAL POPULATIONS: SPECIES DIVERSITY AND
STABILITY", Symons, F., Hydrobiologla, Vol. Uo, No. fc, December 15, 1972, pp U99-502.
Two algal populations sampled In the same pond were compared and two
assumptions were made: (1) When comparing two sample places in the same pond, the one
taken nearer to the water edge will show a more diversified population structure.
(2) The population taken nearer to the water edge having a more diversified population
structure will be more self-regulatory than the one taken from the open water. For each
of those two assumptions a quantitative measure was proposed. The calculated
coefficients did seem to confirm the assumptions.
IHDEX TERMS: Aquatic algae. Plant populations, Stability, Aquatic plants, Diatoms,
Chrysophyta, Chlorophyta, Mathematical studies. Species diversity.
53
-------
2.
BIOLOGICAL HETHDD6
A MIC-6709
"LIMHOLXICAL INVESTIGATJONb TN THE AREA OF ANVERS ISLAND, ANTARCTICA", Samsel, G. L.,
Jr., Parker, B. C., Hjrdroblologla, Vo3. UO, Bo. l», December 15, 1972, PP 505-511.
Comparisons were made of primary productivity, physical features, and chemical
and biological composition of two small lakes possessing different 'trophic states'
during January, 1970 at Anvers Island, Antarctica. Measurements were made of radiation,
water temperature, pH, primary productivity via a C-lU technique, extractablc
chlorophyll, and carbon fixation. Both lakes, less than 500 meters apart, hud partial
Ice cover the entire season and were underlain with a similar silica-rich granite.
Striking dissolved chemical differences were chloride (7.5 and 35.0), anmonlum-N (0.1
and 2.5), and total phosphate-P (0.03 and 1.7 mg/1), respectively, for lake nos. 1 and
2. Extractable total chlorophyll In subsurface water ranged from 15-tl mg/sq m In lake
no. 1 and 35-112 mg/cu m In Lake no. 2 during the three week study period. Ranges in
net photosynthesis were 0.78-3.5 (Lake no. 1} and 9*0-72.0 mgC/sq m/hr (Lake no. 2).
Kiel ranges for chlorophyll and carbon fixation also fell within these values. It is
hypothesized that enrichment of lake no. 2 with phosphate-P and anaonium-H may account
for Its higher 'trophic state1.
INDEX TERMS: Limnology, Aquatic algae. Primary productivity. Water properties, Iced
lakes, Photosynthesis, Chlorophyll, Phytoplankton, Aquatic plants, Antarctic,
Physical properties. Chemical properties, Chlorophyta, Cyanophyta, Chrysophyta,
Blonasa, Aquatic bacteria. Protozoa, Crustaceans, Lake sediment, Lake morphology,
Water analysis, Antarctica, Bryophytes, Anvers Island, Lichens, Snow algae.
AMIC-6711
"POLYCHAETOUS ANNELIDS COLLECTED BY 'UMTAKA-MARU1 FROM THE ARABIAN GULF",
Mohammad, M-B. M., Hydrobiologla. Vol. UO, No. U, December 15, 1972, PP 553-560.
Seventeen species of polychaetous annelids, belonging to 12 families, have been
identified from a collection made by the Japanese research 'Unitaka-Maru* in December,
1968 from the Arabian Gulf. The material was collected from 12 sites along the coasts
of Kuwait, Bahrain, Qatar, and the Truclal States. During the collection period, the
mean sea-water temperature, salinity, and dissolved oxygen near the bottom (depth, 15
to 20 metrics) at the stations at which the polychaetes were collected were In the
neighborhood of 2U.1 degrees C, Ul.O ppt, and U.6 cc/1, respectively (Tokyo University
of Fisheries and Kuwait Institute for Scientific Research, 1969). Two pelagic families
(Alclopldae, Tofflopterldae) and five species (Plotohelmls capitate. Tomopterla sp.,
Autolytus cf. A. longjataffl, Lysidlee ninetta. Plsta criatata) nave been recorded new
to the fauna of the Arabian Gulf.
INDEX TERMS: Annelids, Invertebrates, Systematlcs, Marine animals, Polychaetes,
Arabian Gulf, Pelagic animals, Speelatlon.
AMIC-6710
"ON THE QUANTITATIVE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PELAGIC ECOSYSTEM OF DALNEE LAKE
(KAMCHATKA)", Sorokln, Yu. I., Paveljeva, E. B., Hydrobiologla. Vol. UO, No. U,
December 15, 1972, pp 519-552.
Data are presented on the biomass, production, metabolism, and trophic
relations of the components of the ecosystem or Lake Dalnee (Kamchatka). Water samples
were taken with a plastic water bottle of the Suslijaev type from depths selected
according to the stratification of the water column. Primary productivity of
phytoplankton, trophic characteristics of zooplankters, and bacterial production were
measured by a C-lb technique. Counts of phytoplankton, colorless flagellates, and
zooplankton were made. The carbon content of Use predominant diatom, Stephanodiscus
astraea, was measured by wet combustion of Its suspension obtained in culture.The
data on the spectrum of feeding, on rations and on optimal food concentrations were
ascertained. All these data, together with the observations in the lake, were used
for the construction of a scheme of energy flow. The scheme shows that the ecosystem
of the lake receives the third part of Its energy from the land as allochtonous organic
matter via microblal biosynthesis. The main part of energy accessible to the animals
of the second trophic level is used by protozoa, and of a third part by the predatory
rotifer Asplanchna.
INDEX TERMS: Ecosystems, Trophic level, Biomass, Primary productivity, Zooplankton,
Phytoplankton, Metabolism, Food habits. Ecological distribution. Vertical
migration. Organic matter, Aquatic bacteria, Aquatic microorganisms, Eutrophlca-
tlon. Dominant organisms. Stratification, Predntlon, Pelagic animals. Energy flow,
Lake Dalnee, Stephanodiscus astraea. Vertical distribution.
_
AMIC-6712
"PHOSPHORUS AVAILABILITY AND ALKALINE PHOSPHATASE ACTIVITIES IN TWO ISRAELI FISHP01&S",
Berman, T., Moses, G., Hydrobiologia. Vol. UO, No. U, December 15, 1972, PP U67-U9B.
Alkaline phosphataee activities and the release of orthophospnate from endogen-
ous substrates by these enzymes were measured In waters from two commercial fishponds in
the watershed area of Lake Kinneret (Northern Israel). These data were compared with
results from the lake at seasons of adequate or limited phosphorus supply. In the
fishponds, high relative phosphatase activity ratios (greater than 2) and relatively
large amounts of orthophospnate extracted from plankton by autoclaving (average 27
percent of readily available phosphorus) Indicated adequate, or even excess, levels of
phosphorus availability despite elevated pond productivity (2 to 3 tons carp/ha/yr).
Decreasing routine phosphorus fertilization of these ponds would not affect overall
productivity, but would eventually lover the amounts of phosphorus reaching Lake
Kinneret. In general, the R.P.A. ratio may be a useful index to evaluate phosphorus
availability for a wide range of natural waters. Values for this ratio of less than 1
and greater than 2 appear indicative of limited or adequate phosphorus availability
respectively. Three sources of orthophosphate, (Pi), readily available to phytoplankton,
are indicated: (1) enzymatically released Pi, (2) PI In Intracellular pools and
(3) PI initially present in the water. Although the first source Is always important,
relatively greater amounts of PI are contributed by the other fractions In situations of
plentiful phosphorus availability. Activity of free dissolved phosphntaoes was found in
filtered samples of fishpond water. However, neither these enzymes nor added
phosphatases released significant amounts of Pi from the dissolved organic phosphorus
compounds in the filtered water.
INDEX TERMS: Phosphorus, Primary productivity. Secondary productivity, Alkaline
phosphatase, Nutrient availability, Enzyme activity. Substrate utilization.
-------
BIOU101C&L MhTffiJPS
AMIC-6737
"MERCUW CONCENTRATION IN RELATION TO SI2E IN SEVERAL SPECIES OF FRESHWATER FISHES FROM
MANITOBA AND NORTHWESTERN ONTARIO", Scott, D. P., Armstrong, F. A. J., Journal of the
Fisheries Research Board of Canada. Vol. 29, No. 12, December 1972, pp 1665-1690.
Statistical analysis of 53 samples of 11 species of fishes from a number of
areas of Manitoba and northwestern Ontario indicated that In general there was a
positive correlation between mercury concentration and length. There also appeared to
be a more variable positive relation between mercury concentration and fish condition
(fatness). It was possible to predict, for 31 of the 53 samples, the range of lengths
within which there was a 95 percent probability of all fish containing less than 0.5
ppm mercury. However, within species the relation between mercury concentration and
length was not consistent. The results show that, for certain of the populations
closed to commercial fishing because of mercury contamination, selection (by fishing
technique or otherwise) of certain sizes should provide fish of acceptably low mercury
concentration.
INDEX TERMS: Absorption, Mercury, Freshwater fish, Size, Mathematical studies,
Regression analysis, Heavy metals, Canada, Yellow perch, Sauger, Walleye, Lake
trout, White sucker, Burbot, Northern pike, Sheepshead, Lake whlteflsh, Tulllbee,
Goldeye.
AHEC-6739
"USE OF A COMMERCIAL DREDGE TO ESTIMATE A HARDSHELL CLAM POPULATION BY STRATIFIED
RANDOM SAMPLING", Russell, H. R., Jr., Journal of the Fisheries Research Board of
Canada. Vol. 29, No. 12, December 1972, pp 1731-1735.
, Results are presented of the application of a Fall River rocking-chair
dredge in a stratified random sampling design in which a limited number of samples
sufficed to provide a reasonably accurate population estimate of M. mereenaria In
Karragansett Bay, Rhode Island, Stratified random sampling was designed such that the
preliminary dredge survey served to identify centers of abundance and provide the
information necessary to construct contours enclosing areas of equal abundance.
Subsequent sampling was then directed towards approaching equal sampling fractions
based on areas between contours, or strata. Because of the nonrandom distribution
pattern of M. mereenaria. treatment of the data with normal statistics would indicate a
mean of 1.67 bu per dredge tow with a variance of 1.80. Stratified sampling, due to Its
Inherent weighting feature, provided a similar estimate of 1.36 bu per tow with a
variance of 0.033.
INDEX TERMS: Animal populations, Estimating, Statistical methods, Clams, Mollusks,
Invertebrates, Marine animals, Efficiencies, Dredging, Stratified random sampling,
Mereenaria mereenaria, Rocking-chair dredge, Performance evaluation, Random
sampling, Sampling design, Quahog, Hicroinvertebrates, Data interpretation.
AMIC-6738
"EFFECTS OF VARIOUS METALS ON SURVIVAL, GROWTH, REPRODUCTION, AND METABOLISM OF
DAPHNIA MAGNA". Bleslnger, K. E.f Chrlstensen, G. M., Journal of the Fisheries
Research Board of Canada Vol. 29, No. 12, December 1972, pp 1691-1700.
The toxiclties of various metals to Daphnia magna was evaluated on the basis
of a Jt8.hr 50 percent lethal concentration (LC$0), a 3-week LC50, and a 16 percent
decrease In the number of young born (reproductive Impairment). The 3-week 16 percent
reproductive Impairment concentrations (in mlcrograms per liter) for the metal ions
tested were: Na(l), 680,000; Ca(ll), 116,000; Mg(ll). 82,000; K(l), 53,000; Sr(ll),
te.OOO; Ba(ll), 5000; Fe(lll), l»380; Mn(ll), MOO; As(v). 520; Sn(II), 350; Cr(III),330;
Al(III), 320; Zn(ll), 70; Au(III), 60; Nl(II), 30; Pb(II), 30; Cu(II), 22; Pt(IV), lU;
Co(ll), 10; Hg(ll), 3.U; and Cd(ll), 0.17. At metal concentrations permitting survival
but impairing reproduction, daphnlds weighed less than control animals. Amounts of
total protein and glutamlc oxalacetic transaminaae activity varied with the different
metals. The negative logarithm of the solubility product constant (pK sub sp) of the
metal sulfldes, electronegatlvlty, and the logarithm of the equilibrium constant (log
K sub eg) of the metal-ATP complex were positively correlated with toxlclty to D. magna.
Other physlcochemlcal properties were considered, but no additional correlations were
found.
INDEX TERMS: Toxlclty, Heavy metals. Alkali metals. Alkaline earth metals, Bloassay,
Water pollution effects, Animal physiology. Crustaceans, Zooplankton, Aquatic
animals, Proteins, Enzymes, Statistical methods. Laboratory tests. Water analysis,
Cations, Growth rates. Reproduction, Metabolism, Daphnia magna. Data interpreta-
tion, Biochemical tests, Macrolnvertebrates.
5T
AMK-67U3
"SOME PHYSIOLOGICAL CONSEQUENCES OF HANDLING STRESS IN THE JUVENILE COHO SALMON
(ONCORHYHCHUS KISUTCH) AND STEELKEAD TROUT (SALMO GAIRDNERI)". Wedemeyer, G.,
Journal of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol. 29, Mo. 12, December
1972, PP 1760-1783.
The stress of handling Juvenile echo salmon (Oncorhynchus klautch) and
steelhead trout (Salmo galrdneri) In soft water and in water with added salts was
evaluated using blod and tissue chemistry fluctuations as indices of metabolic and
endocrine function. Changes in plasma glucose, chloride, calcium, and cholesterol
levels Indicated that significant osmoregulatory and metabolic dysfunctions can occur
and persist for about 2U hr after handling In soft water. Pituitary activation, as
Judged by lack of interrenal ascorbate depletion, did not occur. Increasing the ambient
NaCl and Ca(2 plus) levels to about 100 mllllosmols and 75-120 ppm, respectively,
partially or completely alleviated the hyperglycemia and hypochloremla indicating that
the stress of handling had been reduced.
INDEX TERMS: Fish physiology, Coho salmon, Rainbow trout, Juvenile fish, Environmental
effects, Water balance, Chemical analysis, Bloassay, Hardness (water), Metabolism,
Chlorides, Calcium, Handling stress, Biochemical tests. Blood, Oncorhynchus
klsutch, Steelhead trout, Salmo galrdneri. Plasma glucose. Cholesterol, Ascorbate.
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
•TINE STRUCTURE OF SOME BRACKISH-POND DIATOMS", Kargraves, P. E., Levandovsky,
M.f Nova Hedwigia. Vol. 21, NOB. 2Ji, 1971, pp 321-336.
Samples of diatoms were taken during simmer front a brackish pond on the
northern shore of Long Island, Hew York, 0.2$ mile west of Ht. Slnal Harbor mouth.
The diatoms were examined In the Philips EM-fiOO electron microscope at 80 lev as carbon
replicas and as direct preparations of acid cleansed unrepllcated frustules. Some of
the taxa had previously been observed by electron microscopy, while others were new
distributional records. Representative simmer conditions of the pond are tabulated.
INDEX TERMS: Electron microscopy. Diatoms, Brackish-water, Chrysophyta, Systematics,
Ecological distribution. Marine algae, Nannoplankton, Eutrophlcatlon, Water
temperature. Salinity, Hydrogen Ion concentration, Phytoplankton, Water properties
Summer, Pollutant identification, infrastructure. Sample preparation, Speclatlon,
Achnanthes haucklana, Amphlprora hyallna. Amphora tenulsslma, Bellerochea,
Cyclotella cryptlca, CycloteUa menegalnlanB, Cyllndrotbeca closterium, Fragllaria
plnnata, Fragllaria vlrescens var. subsalina, Navlcula cryptocephala, Navlcula
cryptolyra, Nltzschla frustulum, Nltzsehia ovalls, Skeletonema costatum,
Thalasslonema nltsschloldes, Thalassloslra alleni, Thalasaloslra pseudonana.
'DIATOMS FROM THE DEVIL'S HOLE CAVE FIFE, SCOTLAND", Carter, J. P., Nova Hedvigla.
Vol. 21, Hos. 2J», 1971, PP 657-682.
Material collected by the late Mr. George West of the University College,
Dundee, in the Devil's Hole Cave in Kincralg Hill, Fife, Scotland has been examined
for the presence of diatoms. Hie preparations yielded an abundance of small and
delicately structured forms, several of which could not be identified with certainty.
A total of 9U species and other subcategorles are reported, five of which are new to
science. Colonels borealls, Cymbella dlavola, Havlcula. varlollnea, Havlcula vula, and
Nltzsehia disputeta nov. app. are described. The types of the new species are lodged
In the British Museum (Ho. 77777 and 77778).
INDEX TERMS: Diatoms, Chrysophyta, Aquatic algae, Systeoatlcs, Ecological distribution,
ferine algae, Pollutant identification, Specialism, Scotland, Devil's Hole Cave.
AMIC.671*?
"ALTHOroHA CRDUCHII CEH. ET SP. NOV., A MARINE BIFLAGELLATE FUNGUS", Jones, E. B. G.,
Alderman. D. J.. Hova Hedwlgla. Vol. 21, Nos. 2-U, 1971, pp 381-399-
A new species of marine fungus has been described and a new genus
established. The morphological details observed by light microscopy are described.
For electron microscopic Investigations the following procedure was used. The fungus
was grown in yeast extract peptone seawater broth for 7-lb days at a temperature of
25 C. One mlllilltre of the medium containing mature sporangia was transferred to
50 ml of 0.0$ percent sodium glutanate in seawater in a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask.
Zoospores were discharged freely within 6-18 hours. The zoospores were fixed in
2 percent osmium tetraoxlde fumes, dried, and shadowed with gold-palladium. An
alternate fixation method utilized U percent glutaraldehyde. The morphology of the
Boospore and sporangium Is described In detail.
AMIC.6752
"ADDITIONS TO THE MARINE ALGAL FLORA OF GHANA I". John, D. M., lawaon, G. W.,
Nova Hedwigla. Vol. 21, Nos. 2-h, 1971, pp 817-8U2.
INDEX TERMS:
Electron
preparation
Marine fungi, Plant morphology. Pollutant Identification, Systematics,
i microscopy, Marine plants, Althornia crouchll, infrastructure, Sample
lion. Light microscopy, Speclatlon,
A list Is given of 36 new records of marine algae from the Ghanaian coast.
It includes information In the annotations on their morphology and other features of
tBxoncBiic Interest together with notes on their localities and world distributions. A
large proportion of these new records are of plants confined to the subllttoral (21) and
this reflects the flora of new areas where collecting has now been made possible by aqua
lung diving. Thirteen of these new records are of species not previously known from
West Africa and 5 of these plants are new to the Atlantic Ocean.
INDEX TERMS: Marine algae, Plant morphology, Ecological distribution, Spatial
distribution, Systenatics, Chlorophyta, Phaeophyta, Rhodophyta, Atlantic Ocean,
Africa, Pollutant identification, Ghana.
-------
2. BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6756
'THE Lirc-HISTOm OF SPHACELARIA FURCIGERA KUE. (PHAEOPHYCEAE) II. THE INFLUENCE OS
DAYLENGTH AND TEMPERATURE ON SEXUAL AND VEGETATIVE REPRODUCTION", Colljn, P., van den
HoeK, C., Nova Hedwlgia, Vol. 21, Hos. 2-J», 1971, PP 899-922.
Cultures of ganietophytes and aporophytea of Snhacelarla furclgera from
Hoek van Holland formed abundant propagulea under 12 C long day (equals SS hours
daylight) and 17 C long day conditions. Thle agrees with field data from temperature
regions which Indicate multiplication by propagules In the summer half year. No
propagules were formed under 17 C short day, 12 C short day, U C long day, and k C
short day conditions. Plurllocular nacrogametangla were abundantly formed under l» C
long day and 12 C long day conditions. Under 17 C long day conditions plurilocular
macrogametangla were Initially formed, but were soon succeeded by propagules. Unllocu-
lar sporangia of the dlplold generation were formed at 12 C and U C. There are some
Indications that short day conditions might have an Influence on the formation of
these structures, but the evidence la Inconclusive. In nature (in temperate regions)
un11oc"1nr' zoldangla 766, 6767, 6772, 6773, 6775.
57
-------
3. MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6UO9
AUTOMATISATION 1)E L'ANALYSE BACTERIOLOGIQUE DE L'EAU -I. BTUDE D'UN NOUVBAU TEST
SPECIFIQUE DE CONTAMINATION FECALE EX DBS CONDITIONS OFTIMALES DE SA KISE EH EVIDENCE",
Trlnel, P. A., Lederc, H.. Hater Research, Vol. 6, No. 12, December 1972, PP lW*5-ll»58.
With the aid of the Technlcon auto-analyzer, the optimal conditions for
synthesizing and measuring glatomic acid decarboxylaae In suspensions of Escherichla
coll have been defined. The proposed system allovs for a slqple, rapid and precise
search for the glutamlc acid decarboxylase In bacterial suspensions. It can also be
used for the bacteriological analysis of water. (Original article and abstract In
Trench)
INDEX TERMS: Synthesis, Measurement, Automation, Methodology, Bacteria, E. coll,
Bozynes, Water analysis, Anlno acids. Separation techniques. Analytical
techniques, Glutamlc acid decarboxylase, Autoanalyzer.
AMC-6U13 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Sewage effluents, Waste water (pollution). Hospitals, Municipal wastes,
Water pollution sources. Worms, Animal parasites. Bacteria, Viruses, Pathogenic
bacteria, Enteric bacteria, Sampling, Enterovlrus, Eggs, Reovirus, Tapeworms.
AMK-6U13
"THE LOAD OF INFECTIOUS H1CKO-ORCANISMS IN THE WASTE WATER OF TWO SOUTH
AFRICAN HOSPITALS", Grabov, W. 0. K., Nupen, E. M., Hater Research. Vol. 6,
No. 12, December 1972, PP 1557-1563.
Counts of microorganisms including Infectious bacteria, viruses and parasite
ova In the waste water of two hospitals were compared with those in city sewage. One
of these is an Isolation hospital with stringent disinfection procedures. Grab samples
were taken at hourly intervals over 2b-hour periods and individual samples were
Immediately cooled to U C and pooled. The waste water of each hospital and the city's
sewage effluent were sampled simultaneously. Prior to analysis, samples were homogenized
in a mixer for 1* mln at a speed selector setting of U. Some of the bacterial counts
Included total conforms, Clostrldium perfringena, Salmonellae fecal streptococci,
Paeudomonaa aeruglnosa, confirmed'ET'coll I; the viral counts were of entero- and
reovlruses, and those of parasite ova were for Ascarla, Taenla, Trlchurls, and
Necator or Ancylostoma. Counts of all the organlsma^tested, except Pseudomonas
;, were lower In the waste water of this hospital than In the sewage effluent
The other hospital is a general hospital with
Counts of some organisms were slightly higher
of the town in which it is located.
less stringent disinfection procedures.
In the waste water of this hospital than In the sewage effluent of the city In which it
Is located. The results obtained Indicated that under normal conditions the waste
water of hospitals needs no treatment before disposal into city severs. The disposal
of primary treated hospital effluents Into streams or their use for Irrigation should,
however, be considered with care.
AMIC-6U1U
"A SIMPLE METHOD FOR CONCENTRATING AND DETECTING VIRUSES IM WASTEWATER", Rao, V. C.,
Chandorkar, U., Rao, N. U., Kumar an, P., Lakhe, S. B., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 12,
December 1972, PP 1565-1576.
A simple method has been developed for routine analysis of sewage effluents
for detecting viruses using adsorption at pH 3 on a 0.1*5 -micron U7-oo diameter
membrane filter and elutlon at pH 8. It was tested on viruses added to autoclaved
sewage. Homogenizing the sample for k mln in a waring blender and clarification by
centrifugatlon at IflOO g and later at 9230 g facilitated easy filtration without any
loss of virus. Retention of the eluant for 30 mln on the mllllpore membrane and then
elutlon In situ under suction provided a sterile eluate with 100 per cent recovery of
viruses. Viruses added to fecal suspensions with 600 mg/1 BOD were completely recovered
when the sample pH was adjusted to 3 and its salt concentration Increased by adding
1200 mg/1 of Mg(24) as the chloride. This procedure eliminated the need for passing
the samples through ion exchange resins for removing membrane coating components. In
a 1 yr program of monitoring of raw sewage from a middle Income group community In
Nagpur, a maximum of 3150 PFU/1 during monsoon and 11575 PFU/1 during winter was
obtained. High efficiency and reproduclblllty of the method allowed the use of
sample volumes of UO ml of raw sewage and 320 ml of treated effluent for the detection
of viruses.
INDEX TERMS: Waste water (pollution), Isolation, Methodology, Viruses, Sewage, Sewage
effluents, Hydrogen Ion concentration, Laboratory equipment. Biochemical oxygen
demand, Sample preparation. Recovery, Membrane filters.
58
-------
3.
MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
"RAPID BIODEORADATION OF OTA BY A NOVEL BACTERIAL MUTANT", Wong, P. T. S., Liu, D.,
Datka, B. J., Water Research. Vol. 6, No. 12, December 1972, pp 1577-158U.
A bacterial mutant was Isolated from sewage after ultraviolet mutaoenlzatlon
and penicillin selection during a study which was Initiated to explore the possibility
of isolating a potent bacterium which could degrade HTA rapidly. Bacterial flora
from sewage after u.v. mutagenlzatlon and penicillin selection were plated onto
HTA-agar plates. Colonies which developed after 5 days incubation at 20 degrees C,
were picked off and purified by repeated transfers onto fresh agar medium. One culture
of Gram-negative short rod bacteria was found to grow most rapidly in 0.5 per cent OTA
broth. The following conclusions were reached concerning the mutant bacterium: 1.
This mutant vas able to grow without acclimatisation in OTA concentrations as high as
2.$ per cent as sole carbon, nitrogen and energy source. 2. The mutant could, degrade
OTA at a wide range of temperatures from U degrees to 37 degrees C with the optimal
temperature at 20 degrees C. 3* The optimal pH of HTA degradation was pH 7. U. The
mutant could grow on OTA as well as its intermediate products (glyclne, imlnodlacetlc
acid). 5. The bacteria were capable of utilizing KTA present in lake water and
sewage. 6. The rate of OTA degradation was very rapid. Alnost all the OTA was
degraded after U days Incubation at an Initial concentration of 0.2 per cent OTA. 7.
The OTA-metal complexes had no obvious effect on the bacterial degradation of HTA.
INDEX TERMS: Nltrllotriacetlc acid, Isolation, Hlcroblal degradation. Sewage bacteria.
Hydrogen ion concentration, Temperature, Environmental effects, Growth rates,
Mutants, Substrate utilization, NTA-metal complexes, Iminodlacetlc acid, Qlyclne,
Degradation rates.
AHIC.6U17 (Continued)
Card 2/2
Immediately before and 0.5 h after treatment of water samples. Petrl plates were
Incubated at 15 degrees C for 96 h before counting. Concentrations of metallic salts
which resulted in bacterial dcalh also caused erratic uptake and mineralisation rates of
C-lU-glucose whereas sub-lethal concentrations, as determined by nutrient agar plate
counts, caused a non-competitive inhibition of maximum heterotrophlc activity and
markedly Increased the turnover time of the glucose substrate.
INDEX TERMS: Metals, Salts, Mater pollution effects, Aquatic microorganisms,
Methodology, Sodium chloride. Radioactivity techniques, Bioassay, Heterotrophlc
bacteria, Viability, Substrate utilization. Silver sulfate. Barium chloride,
Cadmium chloride, Chromium chloride. Mercury chloride. Copper chloride, Nickel
chloride. Lead chloride. Zinc chloride. Glucose.
"TECHNIQUE TOR MEASURING METALLIC SALT EFFECTS UPON THE INDIGENOUS HETEROTBDPHIC
MKROFLORA OF A NATURAL WATER", Albright, L. J., Wentvorth, J. W., Wilson, E. M.,
Water Research. Vol. 6, 1972, pp 1589-1596.
A heterotrophlc activity assay method Is described which may be used to
determine the effects of several metallic salts, Ag2SOU, NaAs03, BaC12.2H20, CdC12.2.5
H20, CrC12.6H20, CuC12, HgC12, NaCl, NiC12.h20, PbC12 and ZnC12, at very low
concentrations, upon the net activity of the native heterotrophlc mlcroflora of an
aquatic ecosystem, without unduly disturbing In situ conditions. The method Is based upoi
the uptake and mineralization of a radioactivity labeled metabolite (C-lU-glucose) by
native heterotrophlc mlcroflora and the analysis of data by Mlchaella-Menten enzyme
kinetics equations. A 100-ml water sample was collected, temperature determined, and
divided into 25-ml portions, each of which was treated with 0.0538, 0.2690, 0.5375 or
0.8075 microgram amounts of C-lU-glucose. Five mllllllters were removed from each p
portion and placed In separate 25-ml erlenmeyer flasks which were sealed Immediately.
The reaction and control were Incubated with reciprocal shaking (60 strokes/mln) in the
dark at the same temperature of the water when sampled. After 0.5 h Incubation the
reaction flasks were acidified to about pH 1.0 to stop mlcroblal activity and to drive off
C-lU 02 which was trapped on phenethylamlne-lmpregnated vhatman paper. After further
incubation for an hour, the Whatman papers were removed, placed in scintillation vials
containing a toluene-based cocktail of 2,5-dlphenyloxazole (O.U percent) and
l,l*-bis-( 5-phenyloxazoly l-2)-benzene (0.01 percent). The aquatic contents of each
flask were filtered, washed, dried at 60 C for 15 mln and added to vials containing the
same cocktail. Counting was done with a Beckman LS-250 scintillation spectrometer.
salt effects upon bacterial viability were determined using nutrient agar plate counts
IT
AMIC-6U19
"THE USE OF AGAR DIP-SLIDES FOR ESTIMATES OF BACTERIAL NUMBER IN POLLUTED WATERS",
Mara, D. D., Water Research. Vol. 6, No. 12, December 1972, pp l605-l607.
Oxold and 'Uricult' agar dip-slides were used to estimate to the nearest
order of magnitude total and conform counts In sewage and polluted rivers. Samples of
sewage and polluted river water were collected In sterile 8-oz (228-ml) bottles.
Standard plate counts were obtained in Oxold yeast extract agar after 2U h incubation
at 35 degrees C. Total collform and faecal conform pour-plate counts were obtained
In lactose teepol agar (Jameson and Emberley, 1956) after U h incubation at 30 degrees
C followed 18-20 h at either 35 degrees or U* degrees C (Mara, in preparation). These
counts were used to Judge the accuracy of the dip-slide counts. Two Oxold dip-slides
were Imuersed in the sewage or river flow for ca. 5 s and Incubated, one at 35 degrees C
and the other W* degrees C for 20-2U h. At some sampling stations 'Uricult1 dip-slides
(Orion Pharmaceutical, Helsinki) were also used. These estimates agreed closely with
the corresponding pour-plate counts in yeast extract agar and lactose teepol agar. The
dip-slide technique is simple and suitable for routine monitoring of effluent quality
and river pollution.
INDEX TERMS: Sewage bacteria, Aquatic bacteria, Monitoring, Water pollution, Sewage,
Methodology, Pollutant Identification, Agar dip-slides. Estimating, Culture media,
Agars, Plate counts.
-------
3. MICROBIOLOOICAL METHODS
AMK-6U27
INACTIVATION ASSAYS OF ESTEROVIHUSES AND SALMONELLA IN FRESH AND DIGESTED VASTEWATEH
SLUDGES BY PASTEUHINATION", Foliguet, J., Doncoeur, ?., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 11,
November 1972, pp 1399-1'«07.
To determine the effectiveness of a pasteurization process for Inactivating
enterovlruses and Salmonella, three types of fresh sludge, three types of digested
sludge, and pure cultures of pollovlrus, Coxsacklcvirus. Salmonella paratyphl B were
subjected to the treatment. The pasteurization procedures consisted of hcnegenlzatlon
for 30 minutes, heating from 6-15 C to 80 C In less than JO minutes, and maintenance
at 60 C for 10 minutes. After treatment the samples were rapidly cooled to -70 C and
stored at -25 C until use. Culturing procedures are described by which the samples
were assayed. The results showed that the treatment provides relatively thorough
Inactivation of the pathogenic germs, thereby reducing the infection risk of the
sludges. The samples cannot, however, be considered to be entirely sterile since
they contain sporulated germs.
INDEX TERMS: Sludge treatment. Disinfection, Pollovlrus, Coxsacklevlrua, Salmonella
paratyphl, Pasteurization, Inactivation.
AMIC-6U1*!
'A PORTABLE VIRUS CONCENTRATOR FOR TESTING WAIER IN THE FIELD", Wallis, C., Homma, A.,
Melnlcb, J. L., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 10, October 1972, PP 121*9-1256.
A system is described for concentrating viruses from large volumes of water.
The system consists of a water pump, an electric generator, a series of clarlflers, a
virus adsorbent, a virus reconcentrator, a 5- and a 1-gal pressure vessel with a small
tank of nitrogen as a source of positive pressure, and ancillary equipment, all mounted
on 2-wheel carts for easy portability. Standardization of the system was achieved
by use of minute amounts of pollovlrus. The virus was added to dechlorlnaied city tap
water so that it could not be detected unless the virus was first concentrated. In the
system, raw tap water containing virus Is serially passed through clarifying filters of
porosities of 5-1 microns to remove partlculate matter, and then through a L-micron
cotton textile filter to electrostatically remove submlcron ferric and other heavy
metallic complexes. These filters do not devectably remove virus. Salts are then
added to the running tap water to enhance the adsorption of virus to a fiberglass or
cellulose acetate filter. Raw water could be processed at the rate of 300 gallons per
hour, with total virus removal from the water and with 60 percent elutlon of the virus
from the adsorbent.
INDEX TERMS: Viruses, On-slte tests, Equipment, Pollutant Identification, Methodology,
On-site investigations. Adsorption, Potable water. Filtration, Monitoring,
Portable virus concentrator, Adsorbents, Virus assays, Pollovirus, Metal complexes,
Particulate matter. Plaque forming units. Detection limits.
AMIC-6I*31
"BACTERIAL CHEMDRECEPTION: AN IMPORTANT ECOLOGICAL PHENOMENON INHIBITED BY
HYDROCARBONS", Mitchell, R., Fogel, S., Chet, I., Water Research, Vol. 6, No. 10,
October 1972, PP 1137-llUO.
Motile marine bacteria have been shown to display chemoreception, with each
microorganism exhibiting a highly specific response, and are attracted to a wide range
of organic compounds. Chemoreception is also Involved In the blodegradatlon of
phytoplankton and enteric bacteria by bacterial predators. Marine bacteria were
Isolated from seawater samples on seavater nutrient agar. The predators were isolated
by enrichment; culture on an artificial seawater medium containing the mlcroblal prey as
sole C source. Bacterial chemotaods was detected using this method: A 5-mlcron
capillary tube sealed at one end and containing the test chemical waa placed In a
suspension of test bacteria placed in seawater on a microscope slide. Bacterial
attraction was observed microscopically. Quantitative data were obtained by plating
the contents of the capillary tube on seawater nutrient' agar. Nutrients, in very low
concentrations, were detected very rapidly. Most carbohydrates and amlno acids
stimulated chemotaxls at concentrations as low as 0.01 mlcroM. The Isolated bacterial
predators were capable of degrading the diatom, Skeletonema costatum. The addition of
specific aromatic hydrocarbons (phenol, toluene, crude oil) to seawater totally
inhibited the chemotactic response of all bacteria without Immobilization. The
ecological implications of this type of sublethal effect on the self-purifyIng capacity
of the sea and on the behavior of marine animals are discussed.
INDEX TERMS: Marine bacteria, Marine algae, Predatlon, Organic compounds. Oil pollution,
Microblal degradation. Inhibition, Phenols, Chemoreception, Toluene, Crude oil,
AMIC-651U
"HIGH RESOLUTION FIELD IONIZATION MASS SPECTROMETRY OF BACTERIAL PYROLYSIS PRODUCTS"
Schulten, K. R., Beckey, H. D., Meuzelaar, H. L. C., Boerboom, A. J. K., Analytical
Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, No. 1, January 1973, pp 191-195.
The purpose of this study was to explore the potentials of high resolution
field lonization-mass spectrometry (PI-MS) for the analysis of extremely complex
multlcomponent mixtures and to perform a general survey of the chemical nature of
bacterial pyrolysis products. The spectra were obtained with a double-focusing mass
spectrometer equipped with an Fl-ion source and a specially designed emitter-adjusting
manipulator. The sample was 5 mg of Pseudomonas putida bacteria, freeze-drled and
pyrolyzed in a vacuum at 500 C. Over 200 lines were revealed on the developed
photoplate. Density measurements were made on about iBo lines. Accurate mass
measurements are listed for 119 of the strongest lines, and proposed names are
Included for some compounds. The results show that the range of compounds that can
be analyzed by FT-MS is greater than that of GLC-MS. The usefulness of FI-MS Is
limited by its inability to separate and Identify isomers without additional
Information. Consequently, the two methods may be used to supplement each other.
Differentiation of bacterial strains may be possible In this way.
INDEX TERMS: Pseudomonas, Organic compounds. Pollutant Identification, Mass
spectronetry. Field ionlzatlon-mass spectrometry, Sample preparation, Pseudomonas
putida, Mass spectra, Pyrolysis.
Skeletonema costatum.
60
-------
3.
MICROBIOUJOICAL METHODS
AKtC-6539
"THE MICROBIOLOGY OF AN ACTIVATED SLUDGE WASTE-WATER TREATMENT FLASH CHEMICALLY
TREATED FOR PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL", Davis, J. A., Unz, R. F., Water Research. Vol. 7,
Noa. 1/2, January/February 1973> PP 325-327.
Microbiological research was conducted on a dual, secondary wastewater
treatment, system vhich was part of The Pennsylvania State University wastewater
treatment plant. Each aeration basin received Identical vastewater which vaa the
effluent from a high rate trickling filter. One of the aeration basins was dosed with
aluminum sulfate for the purpose of phosphorus removal. The other aeration basin
(control) was operated in the conventional manner without alum addition. Plate counts
performed on combined chemical-biological sludge and control activated sludge revealed
that a higher number of viable microorganisms was contained in the chemical-biological
sludge, but the magnitude of difference between the two sludges was significant
depending on the culture medium employed. Results suggest the aluminum floes formed
In the chemical-biological treatment enmesh dispersed wastevater microorganisms, some
of which are qualitatively unlike those Indigenous to natural activated sludge. The
combined chemical-biological sludge contained significantly higher numbers of llpolytic,
gelatlnolytlc, and thlosulfate oxidising microorganisms and, possibly, fewer nitrite
oxidizing microorganisms than did control activated sludge. Alum did not appear to
affect flagellated protozoa in mixed liquor; however, amoeboid and ciliated protozoa
were found less frequently In alum dosed than In control mixed liquor. The settled
effluent from the combined chemical-biological aeration basin generally contained
fewer total conforms, fecal collforms, and fecal streptococci than did counterpart
control effluents.
AMIC-6559
"POLLUTION OF A MARINA AREA BY WATERCRAKT USE!", Mack, V. H., D'ltrl, F. M.,
journal Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol. (15, No. 1, January 1973,
pp 97-lOfc.
A bacteriological Investigation was undertaken to ascertain how a northern
Michigan marina, affects an unpolluted area of Lake Michigan. The study established
that the conform organisms Increased In the slips most frequently used by the yachts
that remained overnight because the yachtsmen used the heads aboard their boats. An
additional source of conform contamination resulted from the outflow of the septic
tank receiving human wastes from the rest rooms in the harbor master's building. The
data Indicated that only these two sources of conform organisms significantly
contributed to the total collform pollution of the marina. It was also established
that bacteriological eollform organism analysis is a much more sensitive indication
of the presence of such pollution than the selected chemical parameters (chlorides,
NH3, N03, and P) frequently used as pollution Indicators.
INDEX TERMS: Water pollution sources, Chemical analysis, E. coll, Marinas, Lake
Michigan, Waste disposal, Water quality. Septic tanks, Yachts.
AMIC-6539 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Phosphorus, Activated sludge. Microorganisms, Waste water treatment.
Protozoa, Conforms, Enteric bacteria, Analytical techniques, Alum, Removal.
AIC-6577
"CHANGES IN THE MICROBIAL POPULATIONS OF A RESERVOIR TREATED WITH THE HERBICIDE
PARAQUAT", Fry, J. C., Brooker, M. P., Thomas, P. L., Water Research, Vol. 7, Ho. 3,
March 1973, PP 395-'«07.
A freshwater fishing reservoir was treated with paraquat for the control of
weeds and the response of mlcroblal populations studied. Estimates of the standing crop
of macrophytes (P. pectinatus, M. splcatum, and C. globularis) were made periodically
by determining the organic carbon content. A paraquat formulation (Esgram) was sprayed
evenly over the reservoir. Water, weed and mud were sampled frequently after each
spraying and analyzed. Water samples taken In sterile bottles and mud samples taken from
the surface of the mud were used In the mlcroblal determinations. Counts of (1)
viable heterotrophlc microorganisms, (2) amylase producers, and (3) viable protease
and cellulase producers were made on CPS medium using different methods of development.
Viable paraquat resistant microorganisms were enumerated with the addition of 50
mlcrograms/ml paraquat, as Esgram, to the complete CPS medium. Submerged anglosperms
were completely eradicated by the application of 1.0 mg/1 paraquat, but the subsequent
growth of the macrophytlc alga, Chara sp., was resistant to a second application
of the herbicide. Some changes in the mlcroblal populations of the reservoir over
the period of study were consistent with the movement of paraquat within the system
and others with the death of the plants. Numbers of arbitrarily classified
"paraquat resistant" micro-organisms Increased in the water and mud innedlately •
after both herbicide applications, and after the first application a reduction
In total viable heterotroph counts was observed. Accompanying the death of the
anglosperms were Increases in the counts of viable heterotrophs and some exoenzyme
producers In the mud and water but after tne second application of paraquat, when
there was no plant death, these micro-organisms showed little re
61
-------
3.
AMIC-6577 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Mlcroblal degradation, Paraquat, Aquatic microorganisms, Water pollution
effects, Pesticide toxlclty, Viability, Resistance, Chemical analysis, Mid,
Aquatic algae. Enzymes, Anglosperms, Amylaae, Protease, Cellulase.
AMIC-66J.8
"RECOVERY OF SHIGELLA UDDER ACIDIC CONDITIONS", FlsHbeln, M., Mehlnan, I. J., Vents, B.,
Journal of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, Vol. 55. No. 6, November
^972, pp 13S3-132T.
The rationale for an Investigative approach in the recovery of small
numbers of Shlgella In the presence of large numbers of the competitive
Enterobacterlaceae vaa discussed. On this basis, the acid production of the .
Enterobacterlaceae In common enrichment media was explored. The inhibition of
Shlgella growth Initiation from small inocula (10-50 organisms/ml) by particular acid
metabolites, such as formic and acetic acids, vas shown. Finally, the ability of
small Shlgella Inocula to grow in the fermented acidic media In which the
Enterobacterlaceae have previously grown was studied In detail. It Is recommended
that the competitive factors affecting Shlgella be studied further.
INDEX TERMS: Shlgella, Acidity, Hydrogen Ion concentration. Aerobic bacteria. Enteric
bacteria, Competition, Organic acids. Pathogenic bacteria. Conforms, Inhibition,
Growth rates, Recovery, Culture media, Substrate utilisation. Enrichment, Inorganic
acids, Enterobacterlaceae.
AMK-6632
"STANDARDS FOR FAECAL COLIFORM BACTERIAL POLLUTION", Loutit, M., New Zealand Journal of
Marine and Freshwater Research, Vol. 6, Nos. 1 and 2, June 1972, pp 214-219.
Vldal and Collins (1970) discussed the applicability of a national standard
for fecal conform bacteria in the Wellington, New Zealand area. Comments have been
made concerning the author's (1) use of the presumptive collform test, (2) methodts) of
counting fecal and non-fecal conforms, and (3) contention that less strict standards
be employed for the Wellington area. In response to the comments, the authors (Vldal
and Collins) make clear the following points; (l) The production of gas and acid in
MacConkey broth confirms rather than presumes the presence of collform bacteria for
water examination purposes. (2) The generally accepted term "fecal collforms" better
suits the modern concept of an indicator of fecal pollution. (3) The term "non-fecal"
Is unacceptable because all known collforms can occur in faeces, although they do not
Invariably do so. (U) The lactose broth used In experimentation showed no selectivity
between fecal conforms and other collform bacteria. (5) If a standard of 200 fecal
collforms/LOO ml were set, then the Wellington area would not be on equal basis with
districts .where fecal collforms make up a small proportion of the total Index of
conform bacteria.
INDEX TERMS: Blolndlcators, Water pollution. Water quality standards, Collforms, Water
pollution sources, E. con, Fecal collforms, enumeration, Presumptive test. New
Zealand, KLebalella rhlnoscleromatus, Lactose broth, MacConkey broth, Culture
media. Selective media, Cltrobacter freundll, Klebslella ozaenae, KLebaiella
aerogenes, Klebslella pneumonias.
AKEC-6707
"ECOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON HBTEROTROPKIC[ METHANE OXIDIZING AND SULFATE REDUCING
BACTERIA IB A POND", Cappenberg, Th. E., Hydroblologla, Vol. Uo, No. k, December 15,
1972, PP fc7U»85.
Numbers of heterotrophlc, methane oxidizing and sulfate reducing bacteria
were counted in Lake Vechten and a dynamic distribution pattern was found. A maximum
of heterotrophs (numbers of greater than or equal to one billion bact./l) occured In the
deepest part of the lake in spring and In the metallmnlon during sunnier-stratification.
These bacteria use nearly all available oxygen in the hypollmnlon. It was found that the
concentration of available organic material and the oxygen tension caused the numbers
of heterotrophs in the netalimnlon to be high. The tnmrinmi numbers of methane oxidizers
(number of greater than or equal to 500,000 bact./l) were found at a depth of maximal
methane concentration: the de-oxygenated hypollmnlon. Preliminary evidence indicated'
that these organisms were facultative methane oxldlzers and must be regarded as
micro-aerophylllcs. By oxidizing methane they removed the residual oxygen under the
metallmnlon. The sulfate reducing bacteria could be observed In the hypollmnion only.
Decreased SOlf (2-) concentration and Increased numbers of bacteria were found In the
bottom water. An association between the methane oxldlzers and the sulfate reducers
could be deduced. It was assumed that favourable redox requirements for obligate
anaerobic sulfate reducers were the results of the activities of the methane oxidizing
bacteria. The dynamic distribution equilibrium of the Investigated groups of bacteria
was disturbed by the autumn turn-over. The heterotrophlc and methane oxidizing bacteria
decreased In number and were equally distributed; no sulfate reducers could be detected
In the free water.
-------
3* MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-6707 (Continued)
fflDEX TERMS: Aquatic bacteria, Sulfur bacteria, Ecological distribution. Temporal
distribution, Methane bacteria, Seasonal, Heterotrophlc bacteria. Vertical
distribution.
Card 2/2
AMC-67U1 (Continued)
Card 2/3
INDEX TERMS: Industrial wastes. Fish handling facilities, Mlcroblal degradation, Wast*
vater (pollution), Bacteria, Canneries, Nutrient requirements, Culture media,
Substrate utilization. Saloon cannery effluents. Fate of pollutants.
AMIC-67M
"SAUfOK-CANNINQ WASTE WATER AS A MTCROBIAL GROWTH MEDIUM", Straadlne, G. A.,
Melville, J. M., Journal of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol. 29, Ho. 12,
December 1972, pp 1769-1771.
Salmon-canning vaste vater vas shown to support the growth of six species of
bacteria both as a complete growth medium and as a supplementary source of available
nitrogen. Salmon-canning effluent (SCE) vas collected from the outfall of a local
cannery located on the Fraser River, B.C. The crude vaste water was filtered through
glass wool and 50-ml samples dispensed into 250-ml Erlenmeyer flasks. Six species of
bacteria which may be of comercial value were cultured on the SCE-salts media, and on
media using the following available nitrogen sources: tryptlcase, Bacto-peptone,
polypeptone, phytone, acldlcase, and beef extract. Total carbohydrate, free glucose,
reducing sugar, and total nitrogen were determined by previously described methods. All
six species of bacteria shoved relatively good growth In the SCE-salts media; with the
exception of polypeptone and possibly phytone, this was not true for the remaining
nitrogen sources. Based on the results obtained, two general approaches may be
considered for the mlcroblal utilization of salmon-canning waste water. The first and
probably the simplest of these would Include those possibilities In which the SCE serves
as an inexpensive source of available nitrogen for the mlcroblal degradation and/or
utilization of nitrogen-deficient wastes. One such waste Is the spend liquor from the
sulfite pulping process. The second approach for SCE would Include those methods
designed for the mlcroblal utilization of the waste per se as a pollution abatement
system and for the production of a marketable product.
63
AXE-6762
"KPHQHirCETES UTILIZING NATURAL GAS", Davles, J. S., Wellman, A. M., Zajic, J. S.,
Canadian Journal of Microbiology. Vol. 19, No. 1, January 1973, pp 81-83.
Twelve cultures of Hyphomcyetes capable of growth upon the ethane component
of natural gas were isolated from raw sewage by a continuous enrichment technique. Five
continuous enrichment systems were operated simultaneously. Each consisted of a closed
U-llter Erlfinmeyer flask containing Coty's mineral salts medium; the pH was adjusted
with 2 N HC1. A mixture of 50 percent natural gas and 50 percent air vas bubbled
through each system. Agitation of the medium vaa effected by means of magnetic
stlrrers which also aided In dispersion of the gas bubbles. During the enrichment
procedure fresh medium was pumped in dally by means of a multi-channel peristaltic
pump and the effluent vas harvested by positive gas pressure at the same rate, thus
effecting dilution. Each system received an Inoculum of 5 percent by volume of raw
sewage, taken from several points In an activated sludge-sewage treatment plant. All
five systems were run continuously for 6 weeks; after the first 2 weeks, attempts.were
made at weekly Intervals to Isolate Individual fungi from the effluent of each system
by the following method. Samples of the enrichment effluent were treated for 30 s In a
Waring Blendor to break up hyphal clumps into smaller fragments. Each sample vaa
washed by suspending the hyphae in sterile Coty's medium (pH 5.5) followed by
centrlfugatlon at 100 g for 2 mln. Tenfold dilutions In sterile Coty1s medium were
made from the resulting suspension and 0.1-ml aliquots were spread over the surface of
Petrl plates of Coty's agar. Replicate plates of each dilution of the sample were
Incubated at room temperature (22-25 C) In desiccators, gassed manonetrically as
follows: (1) Methane 1*0 percent: air 60 percent, (2) Ethane kO percent: air 60 percent,
(3) Air 100 percent (control). The plates were examined regularly for growth; when
-------
3.
Card 2/2
AM1C-6762 (Continued)
Card 2/2
significant growth of fungal colonies occurred, serial transfers were node to fresh
medium until pure cultures were obtained. All Isolates also grew on propana and
n-buta&e but not methane. These cultures are described and their toxanomlc position
discussed. Pour were tentatively placed In Graphlumi three were Identified as
Phlalophora Jeanselaei (Langeron) Ernnons; the remaining five are similar to Acremonlum
sensu QeasT
INDEX TERMS: Aquatic fungi. Sewage sludge, Isolation, Natural gas, Pollutant
Identification, Systematics, Activated sludge, Hyphomycetes, Substrate
utilization. Sewage fungi. Ethane, Propane, n-butane, Qraphlum, Phlalophora
jeanselfflBl, Acreaonlum, Continuous cultures, Culturlng techniques, Culture media.
AMC-676U (Continued)
p-chlorobenzolc acids were produced from the degradation of BP and pCB, respectively,
by Achromobacter pCB. Chloride was not produced by either Isolate during the degradation
of all chloroblphenyls tested Including the growth of Achromobacter pCB on
p-chloroblphenyl.
INDEX TEEMS: Folychlorlnated blphenyls, Mlcrobial degradation, Sewage bacteria.
Degradation (decomposition). Isolation, Aerobic bacteria. Pollutant identification,
Sewage effluents. Chemical analysis. Oxidation, Oxygen, Absorption, Metabolites,
Achrooobacter BP, Achronobacter pCB, Culturlng techniques, Heterotrophlc bacteria.
Fate of pollutants. Chlorinated hydrocarbons, Ultraviolet spectra. Mass spectra,
Infrared spectra, BMR spectra, Substrate utilisation.
AMIC-676U
"DEGRADATION OF POLYCHLDHINATED BIPHENYLS BY TWO SPECIES 0? ACHRCKOBACTER",
Ahmed, M., Focht, D. D., Canadian Journal of Microbiology. Vol. 19, No. 1, January
1973, PP "»7-52.
Two species of Achrcnobacter were isolated from sewage effluent using blphenyl
(HP) and p-chloroblphenyl ipCB) respectively as sole carbon sources. Cultures of
these bacteria were Incubated at 23 C on a reciprocating shaker for 36 and 66 hours,
respectively, to achieve stationary phases of growth. Oxygen uptake was determined at
30 C using a Gllson resplrometer. To Isolate the final products of degradation, the
culture medium was centrlfuged to obtain clear supernatant solutions. The supematants
were acidified with 1 N acetic acid. A compound was precipitated from the culture
supernatant of pCB on acidification, whereas no precipitate was formed from the BP
supernatant. The precipitate was washed twice with distilled water and dissolved In
ethanol. Light brown crystals that were formed on evaporation of the alcohol were
purified by crystallization with chloroform. The product was Identified by uv., l.r.,
n.m.r., and mass spectral analyses. Acidified BP supernatant was extracted with diethy1
ether. The crystalline material obtained on evaporation of the ether was recrystalllzed
twice from ethanol. The compound was identified by uv. and l.r. spectral analyses.
Achromobacter BP grown on blphenyl accumulated a product with an ultraviolet absorption
maximum at "357 nm which could not be Identified. Hashed cell suspensions of both
Isolates oxidized biphenyl, o-phenylphenol, phenyIpyruvate, catechol, p-chloroblphenyl,
m-chloroblphenyl, c-chloroblphenyl, o.o'-dlchloroblphenyl, and p,p'-dlchloroblphenyl.
Both Isolates produced meta cleavage products by fission of the benzene ring. However,
spectral characteristics of degradation products from respective substrates were dlfferen
between the two isolates. Indicating divergent degradation pathways. Benzole and
6b
AMC-6705
"ULTRASTHUCTUVE OF TWO SPECIES OF OIL-DEGRADING MARINE BACTERIA", Atlas, R. M.,
Helntz, C. E., Canadian Journal of Microbiology. Vol. 19, Ho. 1, January 1973, pp U3-U5.
Two species of marine bacteria with the ability to degrade crude oil were
compared ultrastructurally after growing In the presence and absence of oil. The
procedure of negative staining was used to evaluate the specimens by electron microscopy.
For observations by light microscopy, t£e organism cells were stained with Sudan black
B according to Burden's method of fat staining. Large electron-dense Inclusions, which
were located predominantly at the cell terminus, characterized species of Flavobacterlum
and Breylbacterium when growing on oil. Cells of Flavobacterlum sp. had smaller
Inclusions when grown on marine agar, while inclusion bodies were not found in
Brevibacterlum sp. grown on marine agar. Sudan black B staining indicated the inclusions
are stored llplds.
IHDEX TERMS: Marine bacteria, Mlcrobial degradation, Electron microscopy, Cytologlcal
studies, Aerobic bacteria, infrastructure, Crude oil, Flavobacterlum,
Brevibacterlum, Heterotrophlc bacteria. Light microscopy. Sample preservation,
Sample preparation.
-------
3. MCROBIOIOOICAL
AMIC-6807
"MICROBIAL DEGRADATION OF CRUIE OIL: FACTORS AFFECTING THE DISPERSION II) SEA WATER
BY MIXED AND PUPE CULTURES", Reisfeld, A., Rosenberg, E., Outnick, D., Applied
Microbiology. Vol. 2U, No. 3, September 1972. PP 363-368.
By means of the enrichment culture technique, a mixed population of
microorganisms was obtained which catalyzed the dispersion of crude oil in supplemented
seavater. From this enrichment culture, eight pure cultures were isolated and
studied. Only one of the isolates (RAG-l) brought about a significant dispersion of
crude oil. RAG-l has been tentatively characterized as a member of the genus
Arthrobaeter. The other seven Isolates gave rise to colonies on supplemented oil agar,
but were neither able to disperse oil nor to stimulate the dispersion catalyzed by
RAG-l. The dispersion of crude oil by either RAG-l or the enrichment culture was
absolutely dependent on exogenous sources of nitrogen and phosphorus and completely
Inhibited by 0.01 M aside. The Increase In cell number of RAO-1 was directly
proportional to the concentration of crude oil added to the medium over the range 0.03
to 1.0 mg/nl. Within this linear region, 1.0 mg of crude oil yielded 90 billion cells
and approximately 65 percent of the oil was converted into a nonbenzene extractable
form. Accompanying the emulslflcatlon vas a decrease in the pH from 7.6 to 5.0.
Acidic conditions, however, were neither necessary nor sufficient for oil dispersion.
When seavater vas supplemented with 0.029 mM K2HFOlf and 3.8 mM (NHU)2SOU and
inoculated with RAG-l, oil dispersion occurred within 1 day. This dispersion could
also be brought about by the supernatant following separation of the cells from the
medium. Similarly, the supernatant obtained following growth of RAG-l on hexadecane
vas capable of emulsifying crude oil in 60 min. (Reprinted from Applied Microbiology,
Vol. 2U, No. 3, September 1972, pp 363-368. Copyright 1972 by the
for Microbiology. Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
rican Society
"MTCROBIAL POPULATION OF FEEDLOT WASTE AND ASSOCIATED SITES", Rhodes, R. A.,
Hrubant, G. R., Applied Microbiology. Vol. 2U, No. 3. September 1972, pp 369-377.
A quantitative determination was made every 2 months for a year of the
mlcroflora of beef cattle waste and runoff at a medium-sized midvestern feedlot.
Counts were obtained for selected groups of organisms in waste taken from paved
areas of pens cleaned dally and, therefore, reflect the flora of raw waste. Overall,
in terms of viable count per gram dry weight, the feedlot waste contained 10 billion
total organisms, one billion anaerobes, 100,000,000 gram-negative bacteria, 10,000,000
conforms, 1,000,000 sporefomers, and 100,000 yeasts, fungi, and streptomycetes. The
specific numbers and pattern of these groups of organisms varied only slightly during
the study in spite of a vide variation in weather. Data Indicate that little
mlcroblal growth occurs in the waste aa it exists In the feedlot. Runoff froo the
peas contained the same general population pattern but with greater variation
attributable to volume of liquid. Comparable determinations of an associated field
disposal area (before and after cropping), stockpiled waste, and elevated dirt areas
in the pens indicate that fungi, and especially streptomycetes, are the aerobic
organisms most associated with final stabilization of the waste. Yeasts, which are
the dominant type of organism in the ensiled corn fed the cattle, do not occur in
large numbers in the animal waste. Large ditches receiving runoff and subsurface
water from the fields have a population similar to the runoff but with fewer conforms.
(Reprinted from Applied Microbiology. Vol. 2U, No. 3, September 1972, pp 369-377.
Copyright 1972 by the American Society for Microbiology. Reprinted by permission
of the copyright owner.)
AMIC-6807 (Continued)
Card 2/2
AMIC-6808 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Mlcrobial degradation, Sea water, Dispersion, Kinetics, Environmental
effects, Oil spills, Oil wastes, ferine bacteria. Crude oil. Fate of pollutants.
Enrichment, Arthrobaeter, Mixed cultures. Pure cultures.
INDEX TERMS: Farm wastes. Feed lots, Cattle, Runoff, Pollutant identification,
Microorganisms, Confinement pens, Conforms, Anaerobic bateria, Yeasts, Fungi,
Water pollution sources. Sampling, Methodology, Bacteria, Isolation, Soil disposal
fields, Domestic animals, Ruminants, Analytical techniques, Sample preparation.
Culture media, Streptomycetes, Enumeration.
65
-------
3. mCROBIOLDOICAL METHODS
AMIC-6809 ,.
"ENTEROBACTERIA IN FEEDLOT WASTE ADD RUNOFF", Hrubant, G. R., Daugherty, R. V.,
Rhodes, R. A., Applied Microbiology. Vol. A, Ho. 3, September 1972, pp 378-383.
Samples of beef cattle feedlot waste (FIN), runoff from the pens, and water
from a large drainage ditch at the feedlot were examined for Enterobacteriaceae. The
drainage ditch receives the runoff but contains primarily subsurface dralnageTran
fields on which FIW is spread for disposal. Plating and enrichment techniques with
seven different media were used to isolate 553 cultures of enterobacterla. FLW
contains about 50 million enterobacterla/g dry weight. More than 90 percent of these
were Escherichla coll. none of which were enteropathogeoic types as determined with
multlvalent sera. CTtrobacter and Enterobacter cloacae were other organisms present
in moderate numbers'! Application of enrichment techniques broadened the spectrum of
enterobacteria Isolates to Include the four Proteus spp., both Providencia spp.,
jQebsiella, Enterbacter aerogenes. Arizona, and a single isolate of Salmonella
I aerologies! group C2J. Shigella was not isolated. The wide spectrum of enterobacteria
in FIW may be a hazard if unsterlllzed waste is refed. Fever enterobacteria occurred in
the runoff and in the drainage ditch; the most numerous species in FIW also were most
numerous at these sites. However, neither Salmonella nor Arizona was isolated from
runoff or drainage-ditch waters. ( Reprinted from Applied Microbiology. Vol. 2U, Bo. 3,
September 1972, pp 378-383. Copyright 1972 by the
Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner. )
Applied Microbiology.
American Society for
Microbiology.
INDEX TERMS: Cattle, *Feed lots, Runoff, Enteric bacteria, Farm wastes. Pollutant
Identification, Isolation, Aerobic bacteria, Drainage ditches, Enterobacteriaceae,
Enrichment, Culture media, Plate counts. Selective media.
See also« Category 2, AMIC-6W»6, 6601
Category U, AMIC-6770, 6773-
66
-------
U. METHODS AMD PERFOPMftKCE EVALUATION
AHtC-6662
"COLLABORATIVE STUDY OF A SIMPLIFIED HALPHEN PROCEDURE FOR THE QUANTITATIVE
DETERMINATION OF LOW LEVELS OF CYCLOPROPENE FATTY ACIDS", Coleman, E. C.,
Journal of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, Vol. 56, No. 1, January
1973t PP 82-85.
A collaborative study was conducted on a simplified Halphen procedure for
quantitative determination of low levels of cyclopropane fatty acids. Twelve Labora-
tories (some of these participated in a precollaberatlve study of this procedure)
analyzed 9 samples consisting of mixtures of transesterlfled corn oil and cottonseed
oils, whose cyclopropene content ranged from 0.00 to 0.19 percent. The amount of
cyclopropane fatty acids In the samples vas
-------
k. METHODS AHD PEBFOKMM1CE EVALUATION
AMIC-6766
"A BAffiSIAN APPROACH TO BIOASSAY", Ramsey, F. L., Blometarlca. Vol. 28, No. 3,
September 1972, pp 8U1-858.
A prior distribution for the class of continuous, non-decreasing potency
curves Is Introduced. The Bayea posterior distribution resulting from an assay
experiment with quanta! responses Is discussed. Several examples are presented where a
posterior nodal function la used to summarize the posterior distribution. The examples
Illustrate the value of obtaining smooth estimates of potency and the value of
experimental designs using many doses with few observations per dose. The methods
suggested may be used to analyze quanta! response from experiments with one observation
per dose, situations In which the standard problt and loglt methods cannot be used. It
Is even suggested that one observation per dose may be In fact the beat design for
estimating ED50.
INDEX TERMS: Bloassay, Toxlclty, Statistical methods, Estimating, Lethal limits. Water
pollution effects, Mathematical studies, Bayeslan method. Median tolerance limit.
Data interpretation. Potency curves, Experimental design.
AHIC-6770
"ESTIMATION OF HIC80BIAL VIABILITY", Thomas, V. J., Doughty, N. A., Fletcher, ft. H.,
Robertson, J. C., Biometrics, Vol. 26, No. U, December 1972, PP 9"*7-95B.
Determinations of microblal viability, using the slide culture technique on
suspensions In which organisms are aggregated to form clusters, give higher values than
would be obtained If all organisms were suspended singly. Formulae have been derived
for estimating the viability of indJvudual organisms from the viability of clusters and
the distribution of organisms among clusters of different sizes. With the limited
stochastic model used It was assumed that clusters of a given size are randomly dis-
tributed over a slide and that the distributions of numbers of different sized clusters
are statistically Independent. An additional assumption was made to the effect that the
probability of any organism being alive is constant with value pi, and that life or
ieath for any one organism Is an independent binomial varlate with parameter pi.
Depending on the method of sampling used there are two reasonable approaches for estimat-
ing the viability of Individual organisms from the cluster viability and the cluster
size distribution. (1) The first approach depends on a sampling scheme la which a count
Is made of the number of live and dead clusters for each cluster size over a number of
separate samples. In practice this could be carried out by counting the same field of
vlev on a microscope slide before and after growth of the clusters. (2) If preparation
of a sample for counts of live clusters differs from, and Is incompatible with,
preparation for counts of cluster sizes, two separate sets of samples are used. The
latter method was used for estimating viability on suspensions of Hocardla coralllna.
A difference of 6.8 percent was obtained between the viability of clusters and that of
Indlvlual organisms. This value was considerably greater then the degree of Incertalnty
In both estimates. It was concluded that clustering does have a considerable effect on
AMIC-6767
"SOME DISTRIBUTION-FREE PROPERTIES OF THE ASYMPTOTIC VARIANCE OF THE SPEARMAH ESTIMATOR
IN BIOASSAYS", Chang, P. C., Johnson, E. A., Biometrics, Vol. 28, No. 3, September 1972.
pp 882-889.
Some distribution-free properties of the asymptotic variance of the Spearman
estimator In bioaasay have been investigated. The integral of the function, F (1-F) dx
was Investigated for distribution functions with varying skewesa and kurtosla. It was
shown that for various shapes of the tolerance distribution, the asymptotic variance of
the Spearman estimator can be expressed approximately In terms of either the standard
deviation or the distance between the 5th and the 9?th percentile of the tolerance
distribution. It was observed that K prime sub 60, K prims sub 80, and K sub Sigma all
lepend upon akewness and kurtosis of distribution functions more than does K prime sub 90
K prime sub 90 equals approximately 0.17 for all those distribution functions except for
the t distribution with 1 degree of freedom. These distribution-free properties can be
ised in planning quanta! assays of required precision.
INDEX TERMS: Bloaasay, Lethal limits. Statistical methods. Laboratory tests, Toxlclty,
Resistance, Mathematical studies, Experimental design. Spearman estimator.
Asymptotic variance. Precision, Data Interpretation, Quanta! assays, Median
tolerance limit.
AMIC-6770 (Continued)
Card 2/2
viability determinations and it should be considered especially where interpretations of
intracellular materials on maintenance of viability are to be made.
INDEX TERMS: Estimating, Viability, Microorganisms, Mathematical studies. Model studies,
Probability> Soil fungi. Water pollution effects, Environmental effects.
Stochastic models, Data Interpretation, Slide culture techniques, Nocardla
coralllna, Cluster analysis. Random distribution, Pollutant effects.
68
-------
k.
METHODS AND PHIFOHMAUCE EVALUATION
AMIC-6771
"INVERSE SAMPLING OF A POISSON DISTRIBUTION11, Metier, H., Biometrics, Vol. 28, Ho. l>,
December 1972, pp 959-970.
Given a situation where an observation or 'trial* may result in a number X
equals 0, 1, 2, ... of events or 'successes', with X a polsson varlate of mean mu, a
series of Independent trials Is conducted, resulting in XI, X2, ... successes
respectively. The series Is terminated as soon as the total number XI plus X2 plus ...
plus Xn of successes has reached or exceeded a preasslgned number k. Let Hk be the
number of trials required to reach k successes. The moments, of H over k to m are
derived for both positive and negative integer values of m. Exact confidence limits for
j based on Hk, are derived, and the width of the confidence Interval in relation to the
size of the trial unit is discussed. In applications to counts of particles In
suspension, the most suitable dilution and size of the trial unit are investigated to
ensure an approximate Folsson distribution.
INDEX TERMS: Sampling, Statistical methods. Confidence limits, Polsson distribution.
Sample size.
AHIC-6773
"QUANTAL RESPONSE ANALYSIS FOR A MIXTURE OF POPULATIONS", Ashford, J. R.,
Walker, P. J., Biometrics, Vol. 28, Bo. it, December 1972, PP 981-988.
This paper is concerned with the biological assay of a mixture of populations
which cannot be differentiated on the basis of their external characteristics. It
a shorn that the overall dosage-response relation may be expressed In terms of the
corresponding relations for the separate populations and of the proportion of each
present In the mixture. The derivation of the mn-imimi likelihood (ML) estimates of
;he unknown parameters Is then described and the proposed methods are Illustrated
by an example of the analysis of a quanta! assay of tiypanosomes involving a mixture
of two distinct populations. The calculation of the parameter estimates involved
an Iterative procedure which Is only practicable using a digital computer, and It is
pointed out that the quantity and quality of the experimental data must conform
to very stringent criteria If an analysis is to be worthwhile.
NDEX TERMS: Bloassay, Statistical methods. Estimating, Toxiclty, Population,
Mathematical models, Data Interpretation.
AMIC-6772
INVERSE BINOMIAL SAMPLING AS A BASIS FOR ESTIMATING NEGATIVE BINOMIAL POPULATION
DENSITIES", Gerrardj D. J., Cook, R. D., Biometrics, Vol. 28, No. k, December 1972,
pp 971-980. -
A sequential sampling procedure has been developed which yields
var lance, unbiased estimates of a mean density population and relies solely upon the
presence or absence of Individuals In sampling units. Using Inverse binomial samples of
presence or absence, the population densities of negative blnomlally distributed
organisms are characterized by a known parameter k. The estimator is shown to be the only
unbiased, uniformly minimum variance estimator obtainable from Inverse binomial samples.
A comparison of Its cost efficiency with that of conventional sampling indicates that the
proposed technique offers a promising, economical alternative whenever direct enumeration
at populations is either difficult or Impractical.
INDEX TERMS: Sampling, Estimating, Statistical methods, Population, Distribution
pattern. Data Interpretation.
AMIC-6775
"BAYESIAN ESTIMATION AND DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS FOR GROWTH RATES WHEN SAMPLING
FHQMTHE POISSON DISTRIBUTION", Behnken, D. V., Watts, D. G., Biometries. Vol. 28,
No. U, December 1972, pp 999-1009.
Data on algal growth rates were used to Investigate the problem of estimating
the growth rate parameter, beta, for a process with an expected value lambda sub
1 equal to alpha e to the beta t sub 1 power. This equation produces data from a
Polsson distribution p of lambda sub 1 at time t sub 1 (1 equals 1,2, ..., n). The
posterior distribution for beta Is derived, and an approach to designing experiments
In this situation is suggested.
INDEX TER4S; Estimating, Growth rates, Algae, Statistical methods, Bloassay, Sampling,
Data Interpretation, Experimental design, Polsson distribution, Selenastrum
caprlcornutum.
69
-------
5.
INSTRUMENT
AM1C-62U
"CALIBRATION -AND MAINTENANCE EXPERIENCE WITH AN CCEAHCGRAPHIC ADD MEIBOHOLOOICAL
DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM FOR LARGE HAVIGATIOH BUOYS", Mclntosh, J. A., U. S. Coast
Guard, Office of Research and Development, Washington, D.C., Final Report, May
1972, b9 pp. OTIS Report No. AD 7^2 659.
Instruments to measure air temperature and pressure, wind speed and
direction, water temperature and conductivity, and current speed and direction were
Installed on a large, unmanned buoy, together with equipment to telemeter the data
ashore. On shore, a terminal was Installed to receive, store, and display the data.
The purpose of the Installation vas to gain experience with Instrumentation of this
type. To date the Installation is about four years old. The installation and
operation of the Instruments on an unmanned buoy presented no problems and did not
Interfere with the buoy's primary purpose, that is, as a platform for various marine
aids to navigation. Except for the problems of marine fouling and corrosion, which
may well have been solved by the use of copper-plated plastic exterior housings, the
equipment mounted on the buoy required little maintenance. The trend of the
calibration data obtained Indicated that annual re-calibration of the meteorological
Instruments would be more than adequate. The maintenance of the shore terminal
required far more effort than had been anticipated. The equipment involved was so
complex that even under optimum conditions, it was estimated that it would require
attention for an average of about two hours per week by a skilled and knowledgeable
technician. The shore terminal for an operational system with the sane Instruments as
presently used could (and should) differ from the prototype In one of two ways. Either
it could be much simpler and cheaper, or a terminal similar to the existing one could
be used to Interrogate and process the data from a much larger number of sensors on
each of several buoys.
AMTC-6215
"SURFACE CURRENT MEA3URQE1JTS BY EXPENDABLE PROBES", Brolda, S., Richardson, W. S.,
U. S. Coast Guard, Office of Research and Development, Washington, D.C., Technical
Report, Contract No. DOT-CG-20,859A, June 1972, 7 pp. NTIS Report No. AD 7^3 70S.
An expendable probe for making measurements of surface currents and
directions consists of six basic parts: a weighted nose cone, a clock (a kitchen timer),
two floats that rise from the bottom when released by the clock, the surface marker, and
a protective outer tube. When the probe Is dropped from an airplane the surface marker
Is separated and floats to the surface. The remainder of the probe settles to the
bottom and releases two floats after predetermined time delays between them. These
floats emit fluoresceln dyes at the surface. Surface current and direction can be
calculated from the known time delay and the distance between floats. One possible use
of the equipment is In determining bulk movement of spilled materials.
INDEX TERMS: Currents (water). Mechanical equipment. Drifting (aquatic).
AMIC-62U (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Maintenance, Electronic equipment. Water temperature, Conductivity,
Current meters. Calibrations, Fouling, Corrosion, Buoys.
AKEC-6253
'SOME CHARACTERISTICS OF SEVERAL COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE CATION-RESPONSIVE GLASS
ELECTRODES", Fhang. S., Steel, B. J., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. UU, No. 13, November
19722, pp 2230-2232.
Ten cation-responsive glass electrodes are characterized and the conditions
necessary for such electrodes to be useful In the determination of activity coefficients
are given. Solutions of reagent grade sodium chloride, nitric acid, and sodium hydroxide
were used to test the electrodes. The electrodes ware tested at 85 C; each cell was
magnetically stirred and only aged thermal electrolytic type Ag, AgCl electrodes were
used. The response of the electrodes tested In reference to pH variations was consistent
with the K sub HH sub a values found by earlier experimentation. Responses to light
variations show that the effects of light on glass electrodes are serious when accurate
ictlvlty coefficients are to be measured.
QffiEX TERMS: Cations, Physical properties. Electrical properties, Variability,
Hydrogen ion concentration, Light intensity, Ion selective electrodes, Glass
electrodes, Characterization, Activity coefficients, Silver electrodes.
70
-------
5.
AMIC-6507
'W/O-EK QUALITY MONITORING IN DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS: A PROGRESS REPORT", McClelland,
N. I., Mancy, K. H., Journal American Water Works Aasoclatlon, Vol. 6U, Ho. 02,
December 1972, pp 793.003.
The progress of the Water Quality Monitoring Project vhlch is being conducted
by the National Sanitation Foundation is reviewed. A prototype potable-vater quality
monitor Is on-stream and can measure: temperatures using thermistors; DO with a
voltaunetrlc membrane electrode; pH with a glass electrode; conductivity with an a-c
conductivity cell; hardness, nitrates, chlorides, and fluorides vlth ion-selective
electrodes; turbidity with a nephelometer; free residual chlorine with a galvanic
cell; alkalinity with a glass electrode; Cu by anodic stripping voltanmetxy; Cd and
Pb by differential anodic stripping voltammetry; and corrosion by a polarization
admittance technique. Saqple analyses for hardness, nitrates, chlorides, fluorides,
and heavy metals are Included. A laboratory teat for measuring scaling potential
using a rotating ring disc electrode has also been developed.
INDEX TERMS: Potable water, Monitoring, Instrumentation, Water temperature, Dissolved
oxygen. Hydrogen ion concentration. Conductivity, Hardness, Chlorides, Fluorides,
Turbidity, Alkalinity, Nutrients, Nitrates, Chlorine, Copper, Cadmium, Lead,
Corrosion, Scaling, Heavy metals, Ion selective electrodes, Hephelometers,
Galvanic cells, Anodic stripping voltannetry.
AMIC-6U63
'ACTIVITY MEASUREMENTS «T HIGH IONIC STRENGTHS USING HALIDL-SKL>CT LVE MEMBRANE
ELECTRODES", Bagg, J., RechnJlz, G. A., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. l»5, Ho. 2, February
1973, PP 271-276.
The never hallde-selectlve electrodes have been examined in a cell with a
hoBolonlc liquid-Junction vhlch does not require a reversible cation-electrode or the
use of extra-thermodynamlc assumptions in the calculation of theoretical emf. These
electrodes have been shown to have nearly theoretical potentlometrlc response in
chloride, bromide, and fluoride solutions up to U-5 molal. The iodide-selective
electrode is restricted by deterioration of the electrode surface to solutions less than
0.5 molal. The single-Ion activity convention, based upon hydratlon considerations,
proposed by Bates, Staples, and Robinson, combined with the Henderson equation for
residual liquid-Junction potentials, fitted the data for a cell with heterolonlc
Junction up to 6m KaCl, Ifm KC1, Urn KBr, 3m KF, and 1m L1C1. The results are
consistent with previously proposed mechanistic models for the operation of crystal
membrane electrodes. (Reprinted from Analytical Chemistry, Vol. !*5, No. 2, February
1973, PP 271-276. Copyright 1972 by the American Chemical Society. Reprinted by
permission of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS: Halides, Measurement, Bromides, Chlorides, Fluorides, Electrochemistry,
Iodides, Ion selective electrodes. Membrane electrodes, Hallde selective
electrodes, Ionic strength, Ionic activity.
AMIC-6U60
"ELECTROCHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE GOLD MICROMESH ELECTRODE", Blaedel, W. J.,
Boyer, S. L., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 2, February 1973, pp 258-263.
The design and construction of a flow-through gold mlcrcnesh electrde are
described. Current-voltage curves are reported for various flow rates. Measured
limiting currents are shown to be directly proportional to the number of screens (N)
In the electrode, to the concentration of electroactlve material (C), and to the
cube root of the volume flow rate (Vf) of solution through the electrode. Various
mesh sizes are examined. Application IB made to the measurement of submlcromolar
concentrations.
INDEX TERMS: Design, Construction, Electrochemistry, Flow rates, Zfcta potential.
Physical properties. Electric currents, Electrochemical properties. Gold micro-
mesh electrode, Ion selective electrodes.
AMIC-6U76
"IMPROVED UREA ELECTRODE", Gullbault, G. G., Nagy, G., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. Uj,
No. 2, February 1973, PP <*17-IH9.
An Improved urea electrode was made by covering the active surface of a solid
type ammonium electrode with a physically lonoblllzed urease (enzyme) reaction layer.
This layer was made according to the procedure of Gullbault and Montalvo (1970). A
nylon net was placed over the sensor surface and fixed with rubber rings. A solution
of 175 mg urease In 0.9 ml monomer solution was dropped onto the netting and
polymerized by light for 60 mln. The emnonlum selective electrode was made using the
antibiotic Nonactin as the active ingredient embedded in a silicons rubber matrix.
Studies of the electrode show It to have good stability and response characteristics.
It allows a convenient determination of urea in water solution, an estimation of urea
content of biological fluids of unknown potassium ion concentration, and an accurate
measurement of the urea concentration in biological fluids of approximately known
potassium concentration. Some theoretical aspects of the enzyme electrode are
discussed.
INDEX TERMS: Aqueous solutions. Pollutant Identification, Ureas, Selectivity, Potassium,
Ions, Enzymes, Electrical stability, 2eta potential, Construction, Methodology,
Electrochemistry, Urea electrode. Ion selective electrodes. Biological fluids,
Response time. Ureas, Ammonium electrode.
71
-------
5.
IN9IEB1MEHT DEVELOEMERE
AMK-6VT9
'DEMOUNTABLE JUNG-DISK ELECTRODE", Harrington, G. W., Laltlnen, H. A., TKndafllov, V.,
Analytical Chemistry, Vol. Uj, No. 2, February 1973, pp l*33-l*3l».
Although the ring disk electrode lias become a valuable tool in studying many
electrochemical processes, there are difficulties In fabricating and centering the
electrode. The use of different materials requires fabrication of an entirely new
electrode for each material. With the present designs, neat treatment of coated
electrodes is Impossible. An electrode has been specifically designed to permit the use
of different materials for the disk and to eliminate problems associated with centering
the electrode. Two platinum disk- platinum ring electrodes were constructed and tested
with solutions of Cu(ll) in 0.5 M KC1; the results agreed exactly vlth those published
previously. Experimental collection efficiency agreed with the theoretical value of
0.3U5 vlthln less than 2 percent. The electrodes were disassembled and reassembled
several times with no changes in the experimental collection efficiency. The procedure,
accompanied by a diagram, is given for constructing such an electrode. A descriptive
discussion Is also presented for a tin oxide-coated glass disk-platinum ring electrode
and an electrode in which both disk and ring are of tin oxide-coated glass.
INDEX TERMS: Construction, Design, Methodology, Efficiencies, Electrochemistry,
Laboratory equipment, Ring disk electrode, Platinum, Sensors, Tin oxlde.coated
glass. Precision.
AMIC-6506 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Electrochemistry, Instrumentation, Ion selective electrodes. Transfer
functions, Mercury electrodes, Platinum electrodes.
AMIC-6506
"LINEAR AND NONLINEAR SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTROLLED-POTENTIAL ELECTROLYSIS
CELLS", Harrar, J. E., Pomernacki, C. L., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, NO. 1,
January 1973, pp 57-78.
A detailed study was made of the characteristics of three-electrode
controlled-potentlal electrolysis cells as components of control systems. In the
absence of significant faradalc current, these cells can be represented as linear,
brldged-T type networks. Important parameters that determine cell response are the
reference electrode resistance and a parasitic capacitance that couples the cell Input
to the output. Cells whose electrodes are arranged for optimum dc potential
distribution were also found to have the minimum phase shift for a given attenuation,
and on the basis of the circuit model the phase shift will not exceed 90 degrees.
Sells with poor geometry exhibit excessive phase shift in their transfer functions. In
the presence of significant faradalc current, the fundamental frequency transfer
function is altered considerably and at applied potentials near the current-potential
waves the cells are nonlinear. Negative-admittance reactions can cause the cell phase
shift to be more negative than -90 degrees, but most faradalc reactions cause the cell
to exhibit less phase shift than the background solution value. Sufficient conditions
for system stability, taking into account the time-varying, nonlinear, and other
complicating characteristics of the cells, can be rigorously obtained using the circle
criterion. Several aspects of electrochemical system design and measurement are
Uscussed. (Reprinted from Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 1, January 1973,
if 57-78. Copyright 1972 by the American Chemical Society. Reprinted by permission
)f the copyright owner.)
AMIC-6519
'AUTOMATED DATA HANDLING USING A DIGITAL LOGGER", Larsen, D. G., Analytical Chemistry,
Vol. 1*5, No. 1, January 1973, PP 217-220.
Data from analytical Instruments requiring little or no control may be input
to a small computer by a system developed by the author. Analog data are fed Into a
Keithley Model l£o Digital Multimeter whose BCD signal is converted to ASCII code by a
coupler driver. This code is then fed to an ASR 33 teletype which produces hard copy
and paper tape output. The tape is then used as input to the computer. The data
logger has proven to be useful for automating digital data collection from a wide
variety of spectrometers and other equipment. The logging speed or data rate Is
limited to a maximum of one data word per second. The logging system has the
advantage of low cost and can be built from connerclally available equipment.
schematics of the system are Included.
INDEX TERMS: Digital computers, Electronic equipment, Data processing, Data transmission
Analog to digital converters, Data logger.
72
-------
5.
DEVELOPMENT
AMIC-6630
"UNDERWATER CAMERA SYSTEM FOR DEtP-SEA BOTTOM PHOTOGRAPHY", Singleton, R. J., Cole,
A. G., Nev Zealand Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research, Vol. 6, Nos. 1 and 2,
June 1978, pp IBS-193.
A 35 mm camera system has been developed to operate to depth of U,000 m.
The camera and trigger unit are In an underwater housing and are worked by a magnetic
switch which is closed on contact with the ocean bottoms. The camera in turn fires a
flash unit in a separate housing. A DC/DC converter charges the flash unit from
batteries and a Schmltt trigger turns off the DC/DC converter when the flash unit Is
charged, thus extending battery life. The system described uses standard carbon-sine
torch cells, and has been designed to give maximum battery life by using a flash unit
of relatively low output (fcO J), restricting the recycle tine of the system to 60 a,
and an electronic system to turn off the power to the flash unit when fully charged.
The batteries In the flash unit will last 300 flashes or more, and those of the camera
unit more than 1,000. The system takes up to A pictures at one lowering. Details of
the system are given.
INDEX TERMS: Deep water. Photography, Sea water. Mechanical equipment, On-slte data
collections, On-slte investigations. Construction, Design data, Marine environment,
Underwater camera system, Sea bottom, Underwater cameras.
(Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS: Conductivity, Estuaries, Monitoring, Instrumentation, Profiles,
Measurement, Density stratification, Inlets (waterways), Automation, On-slte data
collections.
AVJC-67UO
"AN INSTRUMENT FOR MEASURING CONDUCTIVITY PROFILES IN INLETS", Farmer, D. M.,
Osborn, T. R., Journal of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol. 29, No. 12,
December 1972, pp 1767-1769.
A description is given of an instrument for monitoring conductivity profiles
in the upper few meters of stratified estuarlne waters. Watertight containers of P.V.C.
tubing separately house the batteries and the electronics. Four low specific gravity
6-volt, lead-acid batteries provide the power. Each probe was calibrated by imerslng
it In a large container of salt water of known temperature, for which the conductivity
could be determined accurately by other means. After noting the output, the cell was
removed from the salt solution and a conducting loop In series with a potentiometer was
passed through the probe. In this way, it was possible to find a cell constant, Ke,
in terms of the solution conductivity, Sc, and the 'equivalent resistance', Req, of the
jotentiometer that yielded the same output as that obtained with the cell in solution.
The Instrument measures the electrical conductivity of seawater at lU depths by
successively interrogating, for 1 mln at a time, each of the lU conductivity probes on
the chain. There is a 15th probe inside the Instrument housing which serves as a check
on any drift in the response of the electronics. Output from the conductivity measuring
circuit Is fed to a Rustrak chart recorder. A converted fiberglass marker buoy with a
Lid at one end and an Inner sheath of plastic foam affords shock protection and
notation for the battery and Instrument cases. The instrument runs for one week
>etween chart replacements. Contours of constant conductivity derived from the chart
records have provided a graphic description of wind effects In Alberai Inlet.
AMTC-6625
"CYCLIC ANALOO-TO-DIGITAL CONVERSION", Barnes, J., Instruments and Control Systems,
Vol. U6, No 3, March 1973, PP 35-36.
Cyclic converters ere continuous devices In which lists are calculated
serially and an output word Is always available. The conversion may be implemented
in a series of successive approximation stages. To determine whether the bit at each
stage is ODE or ZERO, the reference voltage, which equals half the full-scale of the
converter, is subtracted from the unknown Input. The difference is multiplied by -2,
and is applied to a sign comparator. For the most significant bit (MSB) a negative
value causes the sign comparator to generate a ONE and a positive value results in a
ZERO. For all subsequent bits, the polarities are reversed. The output of the
reference comparator is also applied to an absolute value circuit, to create a residue
for use as the input to the next stage. The analog portion of each converter stage
can be Implemented with operational amplifiers. The reference comparator, sign
comparator, and absolute value circuit are described.
INDEX TERMS: Data processing. Data transmission, Electronic equipment, Analog to digital
converters.
73
-------
5.
AMlc-6826
"WATER POLLUTION MONITORING", Contl, U., Industrial Photography, Vol.
July 1972, PP 30-33, >I9.
21, Ho. 7,
Members of the Geosclence Engineering Department at the University of
California, Berkeley, are testing an automatic, continuous. In situ water pollution
monitoring system which promises to be both more economical and easier to operate
than a comparable system already in use. This system consists of a towed vehicle about
four feet long, capable of following a given vertical path (constant depth of constant
distance from the bottom) and housing a number of sensors. The parameters measured
are depth, dissolved oxygen, temperature, salinity, pH, chloride ion activity, sulflde
ion activity and ambient light. The system is powered by its ovn battery pack and
does not require an electrical cable incorporated In the tow line. The problem of
recording the eight parameters (plus two Internal checks and time for a total of 11
parameters) has been solved very economically with a movie camera by translating the
various parameters to voltages, which are displayed sequentially In alphanumeric form
on a Vfcston Model 1292 digital voltmeter. A Bell and Hovell ifimm magazine camera takes
single-frame pictures of the digital voltmeter, of an electric watch and of the scanner
readout which shows which parameter is being measured. The camera has been modified to
be motor driven at a speed of 20 frames per minute. As no changes have been made on the
shutter mechanism, each frame is exposed for about 1.5 seconds. A standard 50-foot Ifina
magazine contains 2000 frames or data points, and supplies more than 1.5 hours
continuous record. The film is read on a small standard editor, and the data from one
50-foot reel can be transcribed onto tables or computer cards in about two hours. The
main advantages of this system are great reliability, ease of operation and lov cost.
The entire system has been tested extensively at sea in Mexico and in the San Francisco
AMIC-6826 (Continued)
AMIC-6627
"CALIBRATOR} PLATINUM RESISTANCE THERMOMETERS", Benedict, R. P., Russo, R. J.,
Instruments and Control Systems, Vol. 1*5, Ho. 10, October 197?, PP 55-56.
Replacement of the International Practical Temperature Scale of 19)16
;iPTS-l*8) with IPTS-68 requires that the calibration of platinum resistance thermometers
changed. Consequently, the Callender Interpolation equation has been revised for
determining calibration constants from experimental data in the temperature range
Between the Ice and antimony points. A correction factor is applied to the equation
to satisfy the new scale.
INDEX TERMS: Calibrations, Temperature, Platinum thermometers.
Card 2/2
Bay. The recording system worked flawlessly, recording very small changes in the
measured parameters. Additional uses of the system are dlsscussed.
INDEX TERMS: Hater pollution. Monitoring, Automation, Photography, Water properties,
Mechanical equipment. Water quality, Physical properties, Chemical properties.
Cameras, Reliability, Sensors.
AMIC-6628
"TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENTS AND THEIR COMPENSATION IN ION-SELECTIVE SYSTEMS", Negus, L. E.
Light, T. S., Instrumentation Technology, Vol. 19, No. 12, December 1972, pp 23-29.
Temperature effects In Ion-selective electrode systems are discussed as well
as compensation techniques for these effects. The electrodes discussed fit in either
of the following categories: 1. The cell potential and thermal characteristics are
Independent of any internal filling solution (solid-state membrane electrodes for Ag,
chloride, bromide, iodide, sulflde, cyanide, and Cu). 2. The cell potential and
thermal characteristics are dependent upon the Internal filling solution (electrodes
for pH, Na, fluoride, Ca, Mg, and water hardness). Application of such electrodes Is
aided if there Is exact information available on their thermal characteristics. It
has been shown that those characteristics can be derived from the tlernst equation and
from experimental data, and how various thermal effects can be minimised.
INDEX TERMS: Thermal properties. Instrumentation, Mathematical studies, Temperature,
Laboratory equipment. Research equipment, Temperature control. Electrochemistry,
Ion selective electrodes, Temperature coefficients, Temperature compensation.
Sensors.
See also! Category 1, AMIC-6U53, 61*92
Category 2, AMIC-6631.
------- |